英語情境應用文法教程

英语情景应用语法教程
主编马玉玲
副主编白颜鹏闫虹
主审郭海云
北京交通大学出版社
·北京·
内容简介
本教程涵盖了动词的时态、语态、句法、非谓语动词和虚拟语气等方面的内容。本教程有别于一般的
语法书，首先是在每个单元的开头设置了导入语，用生动形象的语言激发学生的学习兴趣，使学生对将要
学习的内容有一定的了解；其次是在每个单元的最后设置了学习反馈表，以便学生对本单元的学习效果做
出评价。本教程最大的特点是每个单元都提供一些音频和视屏学习资料，让学生在实际场景中学习枯燥的
语法知识，同时还根据音频和视频学习资料设计了相应的学生活动，以做到学以致用。
本教程可供高等学校一二年级的学生学习英语语法使用，也可供其他英语学习爱好者参考。
版权所有，侵权必究。
图书在版编目（ＣＩ
Ｐ）数据
英语情景应用语法教程／
马玉玲主编．— 北京：北京交通大学出版社，２０
１２８
Ｉ
ＳＢＮ９
７８－７－５１２１－１１１
８－９
Ⅰ①英… Ⅱ①马… Ⅲ．①英语－语法－高等学校－教材 Ⅳ．①Ｈ３１４
中国版本图书馆ＣＩ
Ｐ数据核字（２０１
２）第１８７０６６号
责任编辑：张利军
出版发行：北京交通大学出版社电话：０
１０－５
１６８
６４１
４
北京市海淀区高梁桥斜街４
４号邮编：１
０００
４４
印刷者：北京市德美印刷厂
经销：全国新华书店
开本：１
８５×２
３０印张：２
０５字数：６
０４千字
版次：２
０１２年９月第１版２
０１２年９月第１次印刷
书号：Ｉ
ＳＢＮ９
７８－７－５
１２１－１
１１８－９／
Ｈ·２
７３
印数：１３２
００册定价：３
２０
０元
本书如有质量问题，请向北京交通大学出版社质监组反映。对您的意见和批评，我们表示欢迎和感谢。
投诉电话：０
１０－５
１６８
６０４
３，５
１６８
６００
８；传真：０
１０－６
２２２
５４０
６；Ｅ
ｍａｉ
ｌ：ｐ
ｒｅｓ
ｓ＠ｂ
ｊｔｕ
ｅｄ
ｕｃ
ｎ。
本教程以提高学生综合英语知识及应用能力为目标，强化大学时期的语法能力，拓展情
景交际中的语用行为。语法是学习英语的生命线，要用此线贯穿语言的学习，从而达到正确
掌握、应用语言的目的，进而为学生的职业发展奠定基石。
本教程以《大学英语课程教学要求》为总则，以先进的教学理念为指导，总体设计体
现“以人为本”的人文主义教育观，注重培养学生的人文素质。本教程在编写过程中坚持
做到四个“结合”：语言知识与语言技能相结合、单项技能与综合应用能力相结合、语言教
学与文化传授相结合、课堂教学与自主学习相结合。本教程注重对学生的“多维度”、“一
体化”培养，即语言能力、学习策略、文化素养的同步培养。在教学模式上，本教程着重
构建多层次、立体化教学模式，也就是说，在丰富学生语法知识的同时，也锻炼学生的听
说能力。语法对听力与口语的提高起着至关重要的作用，没有语法，词汇中的词语只是一
堆构造句子的材料；把一种语言的词语汇集在一起，充其量只能编成一部词典，而不可能
成为句子；只有把一定的词语按照语法规则组合起来，才能成为句子，才能表达思想和进
行言语交际。本教程通过一些视频教学资料将这个三方面有机地结合在一起，全面提高学
生的英语应用能力。
本教程的部分语法内容选自各种影音视频，让学生在练习听力、口语及交际能力的同时
轻松愉快地学习枯燥的语法内容。在编写过程中，编者力图使内容具有时代性、趣味性、可
思性和人文性，做到有声、有影、有文字，能说、能写、能用。本教程区别于一般的语法书，
活泼、有趣，语言难度适中，同时具有可教性。
本教程共 37 个单元，涵盖了动词的时态、语态、句法、非谓语动词和虚拟语气等方面的
内容。其中，孙延丽编写第 1～4 单元，张慧成编写第 5～8 单元，杨玲玲编写第 9～12 单元，
邓倩编写第 13、29、36、37 单元，马玉玲编写第 14 单元，白颜鹏编写第 32、33 单元，李艳
芳编写第 34、35 单元，孙杰编写第 15、25、26、27 单元，潘莹编写第 16、18、20、28 单元，
王向荣编写第 17、19、21、22 单元，闫虹编写第 23、24、30、31 单元。全书由马玉玲担任
主编，负责全书的审校和定稿。
本教程是对传统语法教学模式的一次突破与创新。但由于编者水平所限，其中难免有疏
漏之处，欢迎广大读者批评指正。
编者
2012 年 9 月
I
Unit 1 一般现在时 The Simple Present Tense·············································································· 1
Unit 2 一般过去时 The Simple Past Tense ················································································· 12
Unit 3 现在进行时 The Present Continuous Tense···································································· 20
Unit 4 过去进行时 The Past Continuous Tense ········································································· 27
Unit 5 一般将来时 The Simple Future Tense············································································· 35
Unit 6 过去将来时 The Past Future Tense ················································································· 41
Unit 7 现在完成时 The Present Perfect Tense ··········································································· 46
Unit 8 过去完成时 The Past Perfect Tense················································································· 62
Unit 9 现在完成进行时 The Present Perfect Progressive Tense··············································· 72
Unit 10 过去完成进行时 The Past Perfect Progressive Tense ·················································· 77
Unit 11 将来进行时 The Future Continuous Tense ··································································· 83
Unit 12 将来完成时 The Future Perfect Tense ·········································································· 87
Unit 13 被动语态 The Passive Voice ··························································································· 92
Unit 14 直接引语和间接引语 The Direct Speech and the Indirect Speech ··························· 103
Unit 15 宾语从句 The Object Clause························································································ 115
Unit 16 时间状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Time ···························································· 122
Unit 17 地点状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Place ···························································· 132
Unit 18 条件状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Condition ···················································· 139
Unit 19 目的状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Purpose ······················································· 149
Unit 20 结果状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Result ·························································· 157
I
Unit 21 原因状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Reason ························································ 167
Unit 22 让步状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Concession·················································· 174
Unit 23 方式状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Manner ······················································· 184
Unit 24 主谓一致 Subject-Verb Agreement ············································································· 187
Unit 25 主语从句 The Subject Clause ······················································································ 198
Unit 26 表语从句 The Predicative Clause················································································ 204
Unit 27 同位语从句 The Appositive Clause ············································································· 211
Unit 28 定语从句 The Attributive Clause ················································································ 215
Unit 29 it 的用法 The Usage of It······························································································ 231
Unit 30 动词不定式 The Infinitive···························································································· 238
Unit 31 动名词 The Gerund ······································································································ 252
Unit 32 分词 The Participle······································································································· 262
Unit 33 独立主格结构 The Absolute Structure········································································ 271
Unit 34 倒装句 The Inversion ··································································································· 280
Unit 35 强调句 The Emphatic Sentences ················································································· 291
Unit 36 省略句 The Elliptical Sentences ·················································································· 300
Unit 37 虚拟语气 The Subjunctive Mood ················································································ 310
II
Unit 一般现在时
The Simple
Present Tense
亲爱的同学们，转眼间你们已经从一名懵懵懂懂的高中生变成了大学生。新学期，
新同学，新气象，但是我们应该如何用英文把现在的学校、老师及同学描述出来呢？应
该用到什么时态呢？答案就是一般现在时态。好，今天就让我带领大家进入英语时态之
最常见、用途最广的一般现在时。大家准备好了吗？OK，let’s go！
1.1 一般现在时的定义
时态就是时间的状态，是根据事情所发生的时间来确定的，英语中共有 16 种时态。
一般现在时（The Simple Present Tense）：表示通常性、规律性、习惯性的状态或者动作
（有时间规律发生的事件）的一种时间状态。
一般现在时的时间状语有 every day/week/morning/year, sometimes, usually, often, on
Sunday/Monday/Tuesday，等等。
1.2 一般现在时的基本结构
1. 肯定句型
一般现在时肯定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+谓语动词（be 动词、行为动词或者情态动词 can，may，must 等）
1
1）谓语动词是 be 时
（1）主语是第一人称单数时，谓语动词用 am。例如：
I am filled with desire to go back home.
我心中充满了回家的渴望。
（2）主语是第二人称或第一人称、第三人称复数或名词复数时，谓语动词用 are。例如：
You are college students.
你们是大学生。
（3）主语是第三人称单数、名词单数或不可数名词时，谓语动词用 is。例如：
Our English teacher is knowledgeable and friendly.
我们的英语老师不仅知识渊博而且十分友好。
2）谓语动词是行为动词时
（1）主语是名词复数或第一人称、第二人称时，谓语动词不用做任何变化，即用动词原
形表示。例如：
They like playing table tennis very much.
他们非常喜欢打乒乓球。
We have English class every Tuesday morning.
我们每周二上午有英语课。
（2）主语是名词单数或第三人称单数时，谓语动词需要变化为第三人称单数。例如：
He goes to Tian’anmen Square by subway.
他坐地铁去天安门广场。
This book belongs to a friend of mine.
这本书是我一个朋友的。
动词第三人称单数的变化规则如表 1-1 所示。
表 1-1 动词第三人称单数的变化规则
情况构成方法读音例词
like→likes
清辅音后读/s/
一般情况加s want→wants
浊辅音和元音后读/z/
friend→friends
do→does
以 o 结尾的词加 es 读/z/
go→goes
guess→guesses
以 s, sh, ch, x 等 wash→washes
加 es 读/iz/
结尾的词 teach→teaches
fix→fixes
2
续表
以辅音字母+y study→studies
变 y 为 i，再加 es 读/z/
结尾的词 carry→carries
不规则变化：have 变 have 为 has have→has
3）谓语动词是情态动词时
谓语动词是情态动词时，不论单复数、不论人称都没有变化，都用 can，may，must，need，
ought to 等。而且，句子中有了情态动词，谓语动词就不需要有任何变化了，即用动词原形
表示。例如：
He must be a diligent student.
他一定是个勤奋的学生。
You ought to scrap the old bike and buy a new one.
你应该扔掉这辆旧自行车，买一辆新的。
2. 否定句型
（1）谓语动词是 be 或者情态动词 can，may，must 等，在助动词或情态动词后加 not。
例如：
I am not a student any longer.
我不再是一个学生了。
Mr. Wang isn’t 50 years old.
王先生不是五十岁。
You mustn’t take the book out of the reading room.
你不可以把书带出阅览室。
You can not stay here. Leave this room right now.
你不能留在这里，请立刻离开这个房间。
（2）谓语动词是行为动词时，在谓语动词前加 do not 或 does not，谓语动词改用动词原
形。例如：
They don’t go to bed until 10 pm.
他们直到晚上 10 点才去睡觉。
It doesn’t matter whether he will come tomorrow.
不管他明天来不来都没关系。
3
3. 一般疑问句型
（1）谓语动词是 be 或 can，may，must 等，应将这些词移到主语前面。例如：
Are you students of this university?
你们是这所大学的学生吗？
Yes, we are./No, we aren’t.
是的，我们是。/不，我们不是。
Is Jane in the classroom?
简在教室吗？
Yes, she is./No, she isn’t.
是的，她在。/不，她不在。
Can you play billiards?
你会打台球吗？
Yes, I can./No, I can’t.
是的，我会。/不，我不会。
（2）谓语动词是行为动词，应在主语前加助动词 do 或 does 构成一般疑问句，句中动词
要改用原形动词。do 用于第一人称、第二人称和名词复数，does 用于第三人称单数、名词单
数或不可数名词。例如：
Do you think that he is right?
你认为他是对的吗？
Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
是的，我这样认为。/不，我不这样认为。
Does she have a twin sister？
她有一个双胞胎姐姐吗？
Yes, she does./No, she doesn’t.
是的，她有。/不，她没有。
Do they play hockey after school?
他们放学后打曲棍球吗？
Yes, they do./No, they don’t.
是的，他们打。/不，他们不打。
4. 特殊疑问句型
（1）谓语动词是 be 或 can，may，must 等，应将这些词移到主语前面，并在这些词前面
加特殊疑问词。例如：
Why must you leave right now?
4
你为什么必须马上离开？
Where is your birth place?
你的出生地在哪里？
What can I do for you?
我能为你做点什么吗？
（2）谓语动词是行为动词，应在主语前加助动词 do 或 does 构成特殊疑问句，句中动词
要改用原形动词，并在 do 或 does 前加特殊疑问词。例如：
Why do you buy that yellow coat?
你为什么买那件黄色的大衣？
How does he write this paper?
他怎么写的这篇论文？
一般现在时的基本结构如表 1-2 所示。
肯定句否定句
I am a student. I am not a student.

He is a good boy. He is not a good boy.
They like apples. They don’t like apples.
She can speak English. She can not speak English.
一般疑问句肯定回答否定回答
Are you a student? Yes, I am. No, I am not.

Is he a good boy? Yes, he is. No, he is not.
Do they like apples? Yes, they do. No, they don’t.
Can she speak English? Yes, she can. No, she can’t.
Dialogue & Analysis（此处有视频学习资料）

A: Hi, my friend, you look very good in this new suit.
B: Really? You look smart, too. But you wear too many clothes today.
A: I often feel cold this time of the year.
5
B: But it is spring now. It is warm in spring. Do you remember? We are going to have a race
today.
A: Why? You usually run faster than I do.
B: I don’t feel quite good today.
C: You are the winner today. You are my hero.
A: I feel really great today.
B: I am not the winner today. I really don’t feel good.
一般现在时的用法
（1）一般现在时表示现在发生的动作或存在的状态。例如：
I feel really great today.
（2）一般现在时表示经常性或习惯性动作，常与 everyday，often，always，usually，
sometimes 等频率副词连用。例如：
You really run faster than I do.
（3）一般现在时表示真理或客观事实。例如：
But it is spring now. It is warm in spring.
R ole Play
Watch the video one more time, try to imitate the dialogue with your partners, and
then, show your performance to your classmates.
1.3 一般现在时的基本用法
（1）表示经常性或习惯性的动作，常和时间状语连用，时间状语通常为 usually，
sometimes，everyday，等等。例如：
I usually go to school by bus.
我通常坐公交车去上学。
He sometimes goes to that gym with some friends.
他有时跟几个朋友去那个健身房。
6
He wakes up at 7 everyday morning.
他每天早上七点钟醒。
注意：使用一般现在时，要特别注意对“现在”两个字的正确理解。不要以为一般现在
时是表示“现在”这个时间点上的动作，因为就绝大多数的动词来说，一般现在
时并不表示这个时间点上的动作。下面用图 1-1 来解说一下。
图 1-1 一般现在时的时间示意图
一般现在时对大多数的动词来说表示图 1-1 中圆圈的范围，就是说一般现在时表示包括

现在这个时间点在内的经常性、习惯性的动作。
（2）表示客观真理、客观存在、科学事实。例如：
The earth moves around the sun.
地球围着太阳转。
Shanghai lies in the east of China.
上海位于中国的东部。
（3）用在格言或警句中。例如：
Pride goes before a fall.
骄兵必败。
Knowledge is power.
知识就是力量。
（4）表示现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。例如：
I like jogging around my campus.
我喜欢围着我的校园慢跑。
The children sing well.
孩子们唱得很好。
Task 1
用括号内动词的适当形式完成下列句子。
1. They (play) basketball well.
2. The sun (rise) in the east every day.
7
3. Language (be) the dress of the thought.
4. I (go) to Zhongshan Park every weekend.
1.4 一般现在时的特殊用法
（1）在时间状语从句、条件状语从句中表示将来的动作。例如：
When they graduate, they will go to work in Beijing.
他们毕业后将去北京工作。
We will go for a picnic if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.
如果明天不下雨，我们就去野餐。
（2）表示安排或计划好的将来的动作（一般只限于某些表示习惯性或点动作的动词，如
go，come，start，leave 等）。例如：
The train leaves at seven o’clock in the morning.
火车将于上午七点离开。
When does he leave for China?
他什么时候动身去中国？
Supper is at six today.
今天六点开晚饭。
（3）引用书籍报刊或其作者所言时，一般须用一般现在时。例如：
The story describes how a young scientist develops a new theory.
故事描写一位青年科学家如何建立了一种新的理论。
Samuel says that language is the dress of thought.
塞缪尔说语言是思想的外衣。
（4）主句中的谓语动词表示的是过去发生的动作，但是从句陈述的是客观真理，从句中
的谓语动词仍须用一般现在时。例如：
Our teacher told us the earth moves round the sun.
老师告诉我们地球是围绕太阳转动的。
（5）在某些常用语的句子中表示在一个具体的现在时间所发生的动作或存在的状态（即
不是经常发生的动作或存在的状态）。例如：
He is better now.
他现在好多了。
What is the weather like in Beijing now?
北京现在的天气怎么样？
下面的句子中也须用一般现在时：
Here she comes.
8
她来了。
There goes the bell.
铃响了。
Task 2
1. Everyone knows that the moon (move) round the earth.
2. Here (come) the bus, let’s go.
3. If you (see) him, can you give me a call?
4. The report (say) there is heavy rain today.
5. Our plane (leave) in an hour.
I. 写出下列动词的第三人称单数形式。
drink go stay make
look have pass carry
come watch plant fly
study brush teach
II. 用括号内动词的适当形式完成下列句子。
1. We often (have) dinner at home.
2. He (not read) books on Sunday.
3. Jenny (not go) to the zoo on Saturday.
4. they (like) the World Cup?
5. What you usually (do) on Sundays?
6. your parents (watch) TV every day?
7. The boy (teach) us English on Sundays.
8. She and I (take) a walk together every evening.
9. There (be) some water in the bottle.
10. Mary (like) singing.
III. 按要求改写下列句子。
1. Do you often go home by bus?（肯定回答）
9
2. They have many books.（改为否定句）
3. Li Ming’s brother likes playing basketball.（改为否定句）
4. She lives in a small town near New York.（改为一般疑问句）
5. I read books every day.（改为一般疑问句）
6. We have three chairs.（改为否定句）
7. Tina doesn’t run fast.（改为肯定句）
Fun Time
一般现在时口诀
1. 当主语是第三人称单数时
肯定句：主语+动词的第三人称单数+其他
否定句：主语+doesn’t+动词原形+其他
一般疑问句：Does+主语+动词原形+其他
肯定回答：Yes，主语+does
否定回答：No，主语+doesn’t
特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+一般疑问句
2. 当主语不是第三人称单数时
肯定句：主语+动词原形+其他
否定句：主语+don’t+动词原形+其他
一般疑问句：Do+主语+动词原形+其他
要注意，句式结构错则全句都错。
10
Self-evaluation
New language points The mistakes I have made Solutions
11
Unit 一般过去时
The Simple Past
Tense
同学们，你们进入大学已经有一段时间了，你对大学的感觉怎么样？在有些新鲜感
的同时会不会怀念初高中的生活呢？要想跟你的新同学分享你以前的经历需要什么时
态呢？Good，那就是过去时。今天就让我带领大家走进英语中的另一个时态：一般过
去时。你们准备好了吗？OK，let’s go！
2.1 一般过去时的定义
一般过去时（The Simple Past Tense）：表示过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态；过去习

惯性、经常性的动作、行为；过去主语所具备的能力和性格。
一般过去时的时间状语：ago［two hours ago（一段时间+ago）］，yesterday（用在句子开
头或结尾），the day before yesterday, last week (year, night, month ...)，具体时间（如 Jan. fourth),
just now, at the age of, one day, once upon a time（很久以前）, this morning, long long ago，等等。
2.2 一般过去时的基本结构
1. 肯定句型
一般过去时肯定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+动词的过去式+其他
12
例如：
He went to the toy store with his nephew yesterday.
他昨天跟侄子去了玩具店。
动词过去式的变化规则如表 2-1 所示。
表 2-1 动词过去式的变化规则
cook→cooked
清辅音后读/t/ finish→finished
一般情况加 ed 浊辅音和元音后读/d/ call→called
以“t”或“d”结尾的读/id/ want→wanted
need→needed
清辅音后读/t/ live→lived
以 e 结尾的词加d
浊辅音和元音后读/d/ hope→hoped
carry→carried
以辅音字母+y 结尾
变 y 为 i，再加 ed 读/d/ marry→married
的词
study→studied
以元音字母+y 结尾 enjoy→enjoyed
直接加 ed 读/d/
的词 play→played
以重读闭音节结尾双写后面的辅音字清辅音后读/t/ stop→stopped
的词母，再加 ed 浊辅音和元音后读/d/ plan→planned
2. 否定句型
一般过去时否定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+did not (didn’t)+动词原形+其他
例如：
He didn’t go to the toy store with his nephew yesterday.
他昨天没跟侄子去玩具店。
一般过去时一般疑问句型的基本结构如下：
Did+主语+动词原形+其他
例如：
— Did you go to the Palace Museum last week?
上周你们去故宫了吗？
— Yes, we did. (No, we didn’t.)
是的，我们去了。（不，我们没去。）
13
— Did you meet the photographer before?
你以前见过那个摄影师吗？
— No, I didn’t. (Yes, I did.)
不，我没见过。（是的，我见过。）
一般过去时特殊疑问句型的基本结构如下：
疑问词+did+主语+动词原形+其他
例如：
(1) — What did you do last night?
你昨天晚上做了什么？
— I watched a TV serial with my family.
我跟家人看了个电视剧。
(2) — Where did you meet each other for the first time？
你们第一次是在哪儿认识的？
— At a friend’s party.
在一个朋友的聚会上。
一般过去时的基本形式如表 2-2 所示。
表 2-2 一般过去时的基本形式
肯定句否定句
I/He/She/It was ... I/He/She/It was not ...

be
We/You/They were ... We/You/They were not ...
I/He/She/It/We/You/They had not ...

have I/He/She/It/We/You/They had ...
I/He/She/It/We/You/They did not have …
行为动词 I/He/She/It/We/You/They studied … I/He/She/It/We/You/They did not study …
一般疑问句简略回答
Was he/she/it ...? Yes, he was. (No, he wasn’t.)

be
Were we/you/they ...? Yes, you were. (No, you were not)
Had I/he/she/it/you/we/they ...? Yes, you had. (No, you hadn’t.)

have
Did I/you/he ... have ...? Yes, you did. (No, you didn’t.)
行为动词 Did he/she/it/we/you/they study ...? Yes, you did. (No, you didn’t.)
14
A: Did you have breakfast this morning?

B: Yes, I did. What about you?
A: I had pizzas for breakfast this morning.
B: Really? Were they good?
A: Just so so. The ones I had before were even better.
B: Did you ever have pizzas before?
A: Of course I did. I was a little boy at that time.
B: Were you rich before?
A: Yes, I had a lot of gold at that time.
B: I never saw any gold.
A: You know Clinton?
B: The American President?
A: He would come to see my father every week.
B: Really?
A: You know Dianna?
B: She was dead.
A: I visited her twice a week in those days.
B: Really?
A: We used to go to some fine restaurants. Money! Money! God bless you good people!
B: Aren’t you a rich man?
A: I was, but now, I am not.
一般过去时的用法
（1）一般过去时表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态，或过去经常发生的动作。一
般过去时的疑问形式为：Did+主语+动词原形。
（2）一般过去时的形式由动词的过去式表示；动词 be 除第一人称和第三人称单数
用 was 外，其余都用 were。
（3）一般过去时表示过去发生而现在已结束的动作或状态，常和 a moment ago, last
year, yesterday, at that time, in the past 等表示过去时间的副词或短语连用。
（4）一般过去时表示过去曾有或未曾有过的经验，需与 never（从未），ever（曾
经），once（曾经）连用。
（5）used to +原形动词表示现在已不存在的过去的习惯或存在的状态。
15
R ole Play
2.3 一般过去时的基本用法
（1）表示过去的动作或状态，常和明确的过去时间状语连用，如 yesterday，last week，

three days ago，in 1998，just now 等，或与由 when 引导的从句连用。
注意：一般过去时表示过去某个时间，即图 2-1 中第一条竖线处（Past）所发生的动作。
Now
Past Future
图 2-1 一般过去时的时间示意图
（2）表示过去某一段时间内经常或反复出现的动作，句子中常带有 every day, often,

usually, always, sometimes 等时间状语。例如：
When I worked in that company, I got up early every morning.
在那家公司上班时，我每天早晨都起得很早。
In the past few years she usually went touring during her summer holidays.
在过去的几年里，每逢暑假她总是出去旅游。
Task 1
1. They (go) out for dinner yesterday.
2. He (is) eight years old when they came there.
3. When I (am) a little boy, I often (play) games with my friends.
4. They (arrive) there in 1990.
16
2.4 一般过去时的特殊用法
（1）叙述过去连续发生的一件件事情。例如：
He got up early in the morning, fetched water, swept the yard and then went out to work.
他早上起得很早，打水，扫院，然后出去干活。
（2）在条件状语从句、时间状语从句中表示过去将来的动作。例如：
They said they would let us know if they heard any news about him.
他们说如果听到什么关于他的消息，就通知我们。
He said he would not go if it rained.
他说如果下雨他就不去了。
（3）用于虚拟语气。例如：
If only I were a bird.
要是我是只鸟儿就好了。（表示不可能）
Did you wish to see me?
你想见我吗？（表示委婉）
Task 2
1. He (read) the books for a while, (go) upstairs, (kiss) good
night to his wife and (go) to bed.
2. If I (am) you, I won’t do this.
3. She said if it (is) windy, they would not go for a picnic.
I. 写出下列动词的过去式。
is/am fly plant are
drink play go make
does dance worry mask
taste eat draw put
throw kick pass play
17
1. I (watch) a cartoon film last Saturday.
2. Her father (read) a newspaper last night.
3. We (go) to the zoo yesterday, and they (go) to the park.
4. you (visit) your relatives last Spring Festival?
5. he (fly) a kite last Sunday? Yes, he .
6. Li Ming (pull) up carrots last weekend.
7. I (sweep) the floor yesterday, but my mother .
8. — What she (find) in the garden yesterday morning?
— She (find) a beautiful butterfly.
9. It (be) Ben’s birthday last Friday.
10. We all (have) a good time last night.
1. Lucy did her homework at home yesterday evening.（改为否定句）
2. He found some meat in the fridge.（改为一般疑问句）
3. She stayed there for a week.（对画线部分提问）
4. There was some orange juice in the cup.（改为一般疑问句）
5. The girls didn’t go shopping after class yesterday.（改为肯定句）
Fun Time
一般过去时口诀
一般过去时并不难，表示过去动作、状态记心间。
动词要用过去式，时间状语句末站。
否定句很简单，didn’t 站在动词原形前，其他部分不要变。
一般疑问句也好变，did 放在句子前，主语、动词原形、其他部分依次站。
特殊疑问句也简单，疑问词加一般疑问句记心间。
最后一条请注意，was, were 就是过去的 be。
18
Self-evaluation
19
Unit 现在进行时
The Present
Continuous Tense
同学们，你现在正在做什么呢？你最近几天一直在做什么呢？你来大学后一直都在
做什么呢？诸如这类问题我们应该怎么回答呢？这就需要我们接触英语里的另一个时
态：现在进行时。今天就让我带领大家走进现在进行时，你们准备好了吗？OK，let’s go！
3.1 现在进行时的定义
现在进行时（The Present Continuous Tense）

：主要表示现在或现在这一阶段正在进行的动作。
一般现在时的时间状语：now, this week/month/year, at this/the moment, at the present,
today，等等。
3.2 现在进行时的基本结构
1. 肯定句型
现在进行时肯定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+be（is/am/are）+现在分词
例如：
He is fixing his TV set now.
他现在正在修理他的电视机。
20
动词现在分词的变化规则如表 3-1 所示。
表 3-1 动词现在分词的变化规则
sleep→sleeping
一般情况加 ing 读/iŋ/ work→working
study→studying
make→making
以不发音的 e 结尾的词去掉 e 加 ing 读/iŋ/
come→coming
sit→sitting
先双写末尾的辅音
以重读闭音节结尾的词读/iŋ/ run→running
字母，再加 ing
begin→beginning
die→dying
以 ie 结尾的词变 ie 为 y，再加 ing 读/iŋ/
lie→lying
2. 否定句型
现在进行时否定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+be（is/am/are）+not+现在分词
例如：
Susan isn’t playing the piano in the training room.
苏珊没在训练室里弹钢琴。
现在进行时一般疑问句型的基本结构如下：
be（is/am/are）+主语+现在分词
例如：
Is she sleeping now?
她正在睡觉吗？
Yes, she is./No, she is not.
是的，她正在睡觉。/不，她没有在睡觉。
现在进行时特殊疑问句型的基本结构如下：
特殊疑问词+相应的助动词 be+主语+现在分词+sth.（或其他）
例如：
What are you doing now?
21
你现在正在做什么？
现在进行时的基本形式如表 3-2 所示。
表 3-2 现在进行时的基本形式
肯定句否定句
I am doing my homework. I am not doing my homework.

He/She is working. He/She is not working.
We/You/They are laughing. We/You/They are not laughing.
Are you doing your homework? Yes, I am. No, I am not.

Is he/she working? Yes, he/she is. No, he/she is not.
Are you/they laughing? Yes, we/they are. No, we/they are not.

A: Peter, what are you doing there?（现在进行时的形式是 is/am/are + doing，疑问句将
be 动词提前。）
B: I am preparing for the trip.
A: What? What trip?
B: I am going to the moon, don’t you know?（动词 go, come, arrive, leave, begin, start 等
可用现在进行时表示将要发生的动作。）
A: What? Where are you going? When are you leaving?
B: I am leaving for the moon late this morning.
A: Oh, dear, you are always dreaming.（现在进行时与 always, all the time, constantly,
forever 等频率副词连用，表示经常发生的动作，并带有感情色彩。）
B: Are you talking to me, mom?
A: No, I am not talking to anybody.（现在进行时表示现阶段正在进行的动作，而此
刻这一动作并不一定正在进行。现在进行时的否定形式为：be 动词(am, is, are) +
not+动词-ing。）
B: What time is it now?
A: It’s over eight!
22
B: Oh, I am late.
A: Where are you going?
B: I am going to the moon. The spaceship is arriving soon.
R ole Play
3.3 现在进行时的用法
（1）现在进行时表示此刻或现阶段正在进行的动作，中文一般用“正在……”或“……
着”表示。例如：
The young lady is doing yoga.
那位年轻的女士正在练瑜伽。
My family is having dinner when he comes in.
当他进来的时候我的家人正在吃晚饭。
Tom is working on his dissertation these days.
汤姆这些天一直忙着写毕业论文。
My cousin is still waiting for you in front of the library.
我表弟仍在图书馆前面等你。
注意：现在进行时主要用来表示现在正在进行的动作，即图 3-1 中处所发生的动
作。
（2）动词 go, come, arrive, leave, begin, start 等可用现在进行时表示将要发生的动作。
例如：
We are going to take PE class.
我们要去上体育课了。
23
图 3-1 现在进行时的时间示意图
He is coming to see you soon.

他很快就来见你。
They are leaving for Hong Kong this afternoon.
他们今天下午就要启程去香港了。
（3）现在进行时与 always, all the time, constantly, forever 等频率副词连用，表示经常发生
的动作，并带有感情色彩。例如：
He is always losing his purse.
他总是丢钱包。
You are interrupting me all the time.
你一直在打断我。
Task 1
1. They (play) basketball now.
2. We (go) to Beijing to have a trip this coming weekend.
3. He (talk) with me constantly when I am doing my homework.
I. 写出下列动词的现在分词形式。
walk jump watch lie
play sing smoke dance
drive run swim sit
tie read eat
24
II. 用现在进行时完成下列句子。
1. you (fly) a kite? Yes, .
2. you (sit) in the boat?
3. he (talk) with his English teacher?
4. We (play) football now.
5. What you (do)?
6. I (sing) an English song.
7. What he (mend)?
8. He (mend) a car now.
9. These boys (play) tennis on the playground.
10. My mother (cook) in the kitchen.
1. They are doing housework.（改为否定句）
2. The students are cleaning the classroom.（改为一般疑问句）
3. They are not watering the flowers now.（改为肯定句）
4. I am doing my homework.（对画线部分提问）
5. We are watching TV now.（改为一般疑问句）
Fun Time
口诀教你学 doing
进行时很好记, be 加动词-ing。
直接双写去哑 e，分词构成须仔细。
别说 be 词无词义，主语和它最亲密。
变疑问 be 提前，否定 not 在后添。
何时要用进行时, look, listen, now 标志。
25
Self-evaluation
26
Unit 过去进行时
The Past
Continuous Tense
同学们，上一单元我们学了现在进行时，表示现在或最近一阶段正在进行的动作。
现在我们正在大学里学习，那么回想一下上个周末的这个时间你正在干什么呢？去年的
今天你正在干什么呢？整个高中阶段你都在干什么呢？很明显我们不能再用现在进行
时回答这些问题了，我们需要用的是表示过去的另一个时态：过去进行时。好，今天就
让我带领大家走进过去进行时。大家准备好了吗？OK, let’s go！
4.1 过去进行时的定义
过去进行时（The Past Continuous Tense）表示在过去某一时刻或某一段时间内进行或发

生的动作。
过去进行时的时间状语：at+时间点（eight, nine, etc.）+last night/morning/week/month/year
或 last Saturday 等或者 when, while, as 引导的过去时间状语。
4.2 过去进行时的基本结构
1. 肯定句型
过去进行时肯定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+was/were+现在分词
27
例如：
He was taking a shower when the phone rang.
电话响起来的时候他正在洗澡。
2. 否定句型
过去进行时否定句型的基本结构如下：
主语+was/were not +现在分词
例如：
This time yesterday Jack was not watching TV. He was repairing his bike.
昨天这个时候，杰克不是在看电视，而是在修理自行车。
过去进行时一般疑问句型的基本结构如下：
was/were + 主语+ 现在分词
例如：
Were you playing volleyball at four yesterday afternoon?
昨天下午四点你们在打排球吗?
Yes, we were./No. we weren’t.
是的，我们在打。/不，我们没在打。
过去进行时特殊疑问句型的基本结构如下：
特殊疑问词+was/were+主语+现在分词
例如：
What were you doing when I came in?
我进来的时候你在干什么？
过去进行时的基本结构如表 4-1 所示。
表 4-1 过去进行时的基本结构
肯定句否定句
I was doing my homework. I was not doing my homework.

He/She was working. He/She was not working.
We/You/They were laughing. We/You/They were not laughing.
28
续表
Were you doing your homework? Yes, I was. No, I was not.
Was he/she working? Yes, he/she was. No, he/she was not.
Were you/they laughing? Yes, we/they were. No, we/they were not.

A: Remember what I said before I left this morning?
B: Sure. You told me that your mother was coming today.（was coming 是动词的过去进
行时，用来表示过去的将来即将发生的动作。）She was flying here this afternoon.
（was flying 是动词的过去进行时，用来表示过去的将来即将发生的动作。）I was
meeting your mother at the airport.（was meeting 是动词的过去进行时，用来表示过
去的将来即将发生的动作。）
A: What were you doing at two o’clock? And the whole afternoon?［过去进行时表示过去
某一时刻正在进行的动作，过去进行时的形式是：was (were)+现在分词。］
B: I was watching TV at 2 o’clock this afternoon. I was watching TV before 4 o’clock.
（过去进行时表示过去某一段时间持续进行的动作。）I have been reading from 4
o’clock to now.
A: Why didn’t you meet my mother?
B: I dare not go.
A: Why?
B: It’s your rule that I can’t get in touch with any females except you.
过去进行时的用法
（1）过去进行时表示过去某一时刻正在进行的动作，与表示过去某一时刻的副词
或副词短语连用。
（2）过去进行时的形式是“was(were) + 现在分词”。
（3）过去进行时可以表示过去某一段时间持续进行的动作。
（4） arrive, begin, come, drive, fly, go, leave, meet, move, stay, start 等动词的过去进
行时，可用来表示过去的将来即将发生的动作。
29
R ole Play
4.3 过去进行时的基本用法
（1）过去进行时的基本用法主要表示过去某一时间正在进行的动作。例如：
He fell asleep when he was reading.
他看书的时候睡着了。
注意：过去进行时表示过去的某个时间正在发生的动作，即图 4-1 中处所发生的动
作。
Now
Past Future
图 4-1 过去进行时的时间示意图
（2）用过去进行时表示现在主要是为了使语气委婉、客气。例如：
I was wondering if you could give me a lift.
我不知你能否让我搭一下车。
注意：此处也可用一般过去时，但比较而言，用过去进行时显得更客气，更不肯定。
（3）过去进行时表示感情色彩与现在进行时相似，过去进行时也可表示满意、称赞、惊
讶、厌恶等感情色彩，通常也与 always, forever, continually 等副词连用。例如：
They were always quarrelling.
他们老是吵架。
（4）动词 be 的过去进行时也可表示过去一时的表现或暂时的状态。
比较：
He was friendly.
他很友好。（指过去长期如此）
30
He was being friendly.
他当时显得很友好。（指过去一时的表现）
补充：when 的后面加一般过去时，而且动词是非延续性动词；while 的后面加过去进行
时，动词是延续性动词。
Task 1
1. It (rain) when we went out.
2. I (wonder) if you could help me.
3. He (kind) at that time.
4. He (is) always (change) his mind.
4.4 过去进行时的特殊用法
（1）当句子意思很清楚时，也可以把两个动词都换成一般过去时。例如：
We listened carefully while the teacher read the text.
老师读课文时，我们都仔细地听着。
（2）表示按计划、安排过去将要发生的事。用于 come, go, leave, start, arrive 等表示位置
转移的动词时，也可以用过去进行时表示过去将要发生的动作。例如：
He told me that he was going soon.
他告诉我他很快就要走了。
（3）表示故事发生的背景。例如：
It was snowing as the medical team made its way to the front.
那支医疗小组往前线行进时，天正下着雪。
（4）表示一个新的动作刚刚开始。过去进行时可用来引出一个新的动作，这种用法颇有
点儿像镜头转换。例如：
Five minutes later, he was standing in the doorway smoking a cigarette.
5 分钟后，他已站在门口抽着烟。
（5）过去进行时还可和 when 结构遥相呼应，含有意外之意。例如：
I was walking in the street when someone called me.
我正在街上走时突然有人喊我。
（6）用来陈述原因或用作借口。例如：
She went to the doctor yesterday. She was having a lot of trouble with her heart.
她昨天去看病了。她患了很严重的心脏病。
31
（7）与 always, constantly 等词连用，表示感情色彩。例如：
The girl was always changing her mind.
这女孩总是改变主意。
Task 2
1. He (is) always (help) others.
2. I (sleep) yesterday when someone came in.
3. It (rain) when we (play) basketball outside.
4. They said they (arrive) soon.
5. When I saw him he (decorate) his room.
I. 用括号内动词的适当形式完成下列句子。
1. While we (wait) for the bus, a girl (run) up to us.
2. I (telephone) a friend when Bob (come) in.
3. Jim (jump) on the bus as it (move) away.
4. We (test) the new machine when the electricity (go) off.
5. She (not want) to stay in bed while the others (all, work) in the fields.
6. I (have) my breakfast at half past six yesterday morning.
7. Mary (go) over her lessons from six to seven last night. John and peter (do)
the same thing.
8. What you (do) at that time? We (watch) TV.
9. Was your father at home yesterday evening? Yes, he was. He (listen) to the radio.
10. They (not make) a model ship when I saw him.
II. 选择题。
1. I a meal when you me.
A. cooked; were ringing B. was cooking; rang
C. was cooking; were ringing D. cooked; rang
2. He said he to draw a plane on the blackboard at that time.
A. tries B. tried
32
C. was trying D. will try
3. While she TV, she a sound outside the room.
A was watching; was hearing B. watched; was hearing
C. watched; heard D. was watching; heard
4. They a football game from 7 to 9 last night.
A. were watching B. watch
C. watched D. are watching
5. What book you when I you at four yesterday afternoon?
A. did, read; was seeing B. did, read; saw
C. were, reading; saw D. were, reading; was seeing
1. The students were doing their homework.（改为否定句）
2. He was working in the wind.（改为一般疑问句）
3. They were not having a meeting at that time.（改为肯定句）
4. I was sleeping when you came.（对画线部分提问）
5. They were watching TV yesterday evening.（改为一般疑问句）
Fun Time
A Funny Story
“Why are you crying, Sonny?”

“My brother’s lost his school cap, and he hit me.”
“But why should he hit you?”
“I was wearing it when he lost it.”
33
Self-evaluation
34
Unit 一般将来时
The Simple
Future Tense
随着时间的变化，事物也随之变化，比如：树长高了，人长大了，衣服变旧了，等
等。时态也是同样的道理，随着时间的变化，谓语动词的形态也要随之变化，在这一单
元里我们将展望一下“未来” 。表示将来有两种基本形式：
“will/shall+动词原形”和“be
going to+动词原形”。尽管有时它们可以互换，通常却表达不同的含义。随着学习和练
习的深入，我们会对英语时态有更清晰的理解。
5.1 一般将来时概述
1. 定义
一般将来时指时间上发生在将来，表示计划、打算、企图做某事或将来注定要发生的事
情。其基本的构成形式为：
will/shall+动词原形
am/is/are going to+动词原形
其中，shall 用于第一人称，will 用于第二人称和第三人称，但美式英语在陈述句中不区
分人称，一律用 will。
2. 功能
（1）表示“纯粹的将来”。
35
① 表示将要发生的动作或情况，常带有表示将来的时间状语，如 tomorrow, next week, in
two days, from now on 等。例如：
According to the weather report, it will rain tomorrow.
According to the weather report, it is going to rain tomorrow.
据天气预报说，明天将有雨。
② 表示预料将要发生的动作或情况。例如：
Look at those black clouds! It’s going to rain.
乌云密布，要下雨了。
③ 表示由于习惯倾向而会经常发生的动作，本用法中的 will 要重读。例如：
People will die without air.
没有空气，人类不能生存。
（2）表示“带有情态意义的将来”，用来表示意图，用 will 来表示。例如：
I will be more careful next time.
下次我要更加小心。
It is our consistent policy that we will achieve unity through peaceful means.
通过和平手段取得统一是我们的一贯政策。
如图 5-1 所示，一般将来时表示在将来某个时间（Future）将要发生的动作或存在的状态。
图 5-1 一般将来时的时间示意图
注意：will 在疑问句中，用来表示有礼貌地征询对方的意见。例如：
Will you have some more tea?
要不要再喝点茶？
What shall we do this weekend?
本周末我们要干什么？
Task 1
用下列所给单词回答问题“What is going to happen?”。
break the window crash drink the coffee play the violin
read a book post a parcel have supper
36
1. She is
2. The woman
3. He
4. The cars
5. The ball
5.2 be going to 和 will 用法的区别
be going to 和 will 虽然都表示将来发生的动作或情况，但它们的用法是有区别的。

（1）be going to 主要用于以下几种情况。
① 表示事先经过考虑、安排好打算要做的事情。例如：
What are you going to do today?
今天你们打算做什么？
She’s going to play the piano.
她打算弹钢琴。
② 表示根据目前某种迹象判断，某事非常有可能发生。例如：
Look! It is going to rain.
瞧！天要下雨了。
I am afraid I am going to have a cold.
恐怕我要感冒了。
（2）will 主要用于以下几种情况。
① 表示单纯的未来的“将要”，通用于各个人称。例如：
After being interviewed for the job, you will be required to take a language test.
通过面试后，你需要参加语言测试。
② 表示不以人的意志为转移的自然发展的未来的事。例如：
Today is Saturday. Tomorrow will be Sunday.
今天是星期六。明天（将）是星期日。
He will be thirty years old this time next year.
明年这个时候他就（将）三十岁了。
③ 问对方是否愿意做某事或表示客气的邀请或命令。例如：
Will you please turn on the radio?
请打开收音机好吗？
Will you go to the zoo with me?
你和我一起去动物园好吗？
37
Task 2
选择正确的形式来完成下列句子。
1. Tom is going to/will have a baby.
2. — There’s someone at the door.
— I go./I’ll go.
3. I will see/am seeing the doctor at 8:00 tomorrow morning.
4. — Shall we go out?
— No, I’ll/I’m going to do the homework.
5. Look, Anne is going to/will show us something interesting.
5.3 可以表示将来意义的其他结构或时态及其用法
（1）用一般现在时表示将来意义。
① 句中的动词是一般现在时，但所表示的意义却是一般将来时。例如：
Are you free tomorrow? = Are you going to be free tomorrow?
你明天有空吗？
② 在时间状语从句或条件状语从句中，如果主句是一般将来时，从句习惯上用一般现在
时表示将来。例如：
Please tell him to go when he comes.
他要过来了就让他去。
I’ll be glad if she comes over to visit me.
如果她过来看我，我会很高兴的。
I will get everything ready before you come back.
在你回来之前，我会将一切准备就绪。
What are you going to do when you graduate? 你毕业了做什么？
（2）用位置移动的行为动词的现在进行时表示将来意义，即按计划将要发生，常和表示
最近的将来时间连用，这些动词有 come, go, leave, begin, arrive, start 等。例如：
We are leaving tomorrow.
我们明天要走了
（3）用“am/is/are + about + 不定式”这种结构表示即将发生的动作，但句中不可用表示
未来时间的状语。例如：
The meeting is about to begin.（正确）
The meeting is about to begin soon.（错误）
38
选择题。
1. There no more prejudices against certain kinds of jobs.
A. will be going to B. will going to be C. will be D. will go to be
2. Many new will be opened up in the future for those with a university education.
A. necessities B. realities C. opportunities D. probabilities
3. It was essential that these application forms back as early as possible..
A. must be sent B. will be sent C. are sent D. be sent
4. There a dolphin show in the zoo tomorrow evening.
A. was B. is going to have C. will have D. is going to be
5. — you free tomorrow?
— No. I available the day after tomorrow.
A. Are; going to; will B. Are; going to be; will
C. Are; going to; will be D. Are; going to be; will be
6. Turn on the television or open a magazine and you advertisements showing happy
balanced families.
A. are often seeing B. will often see C. often see D. have often seen
7. — Shall I buy a cup of Cabuchino for you?
— .（不，不要。）
A. No, you won’t. B. No, you aren’t. C. No, please don’t. D. No, please.
8. — Where is the morning paper?
—I it for you at once.
A. get B. am getting C. to get D. will get
9. a concert next Saturday?
A. There will be B. Will there be C. There can be D. There are
10. While people may refer to television for up-to-minute news（最新的消息）, it is unlikely that
television the newspaper completely.
A. have replaced B. will replace C. replace D. replaced
11. He her some flowers on her next birthday.
A. gives B. gave C. will giving D. is going to give
12. He to us as soon as he gets there.
A. writes B. has written C. will write D. wrote
13. He in three days.
A. coming back B. came back C. will come back D. is going to coming back
39
14. If it tomorrow, we’ll go roller-skating.
A. isn’t rain B. won’t rain C. doesn’t rain D. doesn’t fine
15. It is not easy to learn English well, but if you hang on, you in the end.
A. succeeded B. will succeed C. succeeding D. is going to be succeed
Fun Time
为了帮助同学们记忆一般将来时，请把它想象成 Mr. Will，让我们成为朋友，一起畅
想“未来”。
Mr. Will 简介
1. 我的基本情况
动词一般将来时，表示将要发生事。
谓语动词要记清，will (shall)加原形。
若变一般疑问句，will (shall)移句前。
变否定也简单，will (shall)之后 not 添。
2. 我的同胞兄弟
be going to+动原，一般口语多常见。
准备、计划或打算，be 有人称、时、数变。
迫在眉睫发生事，be 为中心相应变。
Self-evaluation
40
Unit 过去将来时
The Past
Future Tense
过去将来时的句子一定要有一个时间上的参照点，也就是过去发生的一件事情，
比如 he said，而我们所要真正表达的内容是在这个参照点之后将要，或可能，或打
算要做的事情。也就是在过去的时间（体现出过去的概念）点之后的未来动作（体
现出将来的概念）。这通常在我们转述别人的过去状态时使用。我们赶快一起来学习
一下吧！
6.1 过去将来时概述
1. 定义
过去将来时表示在过去某个时间看来将要发生的动作或存在的状态。其动词的构成形式同
一般将来时，只把系动词 be 变为过去式，把 will 和 shall 变为过去式即可：
would + VERB
was/were going to + VERB
2. 功能
（1）表示从过去某时看来将要发生的动作或存在状态，常表示按计划或安排即将发生的
事。最常见的过去将来时是由 should (would)+原形动词构成，可与 be going to 替换使用。
例如：
41
I would appreciate your keeping it a secret.
我很感激你能保守秘密。
I was told that he was going to buy some stuff after work.
有人告诉我他下班后准备去买东西。
如图 6-1 所示，过去将来时表示在过去某个时间看来将要发生的动作或存在的状态。
图 6-1 过去将来时的时间示意图
注意：was/were going to 可表示根据当时情况判断有可能但不一定会发生某事。例如：

It seemed as if it was going to rain.
看来好像要下雨。
He was going to come last night, but it rained.
他本打算昨天晚上来的，但是天下雨了。
（2）表示过去的某种习惯性行为，只用 would。例如：
Whenever we had trouble, he would come to help us.
每当我们遇到困难时，他总会给予帮助。
Task 1
1. I wasn’t sure whether Lora (come) the next year.
2. The scientists said the world’s population (slow) down in future.
3. Dora said the bus (leave) at five the next morning.
4. I wasn’t sure whether he (lend) me his book the next day.
5. He was sixty-three. In two years he (retire).
6.2 可以表示过去将来意义的其他结构及其用法
（1） was/were about to do 表示过去即将发生的动作，一般不带时间副词。例如：

I felt something terrible was about to happen.
我觉得有可怕的事要发生了。
She was about to say more, and then she stopped.
42
她还想说下去，但是却止住了。
（2） was/were on the point of doing 表示“正要……” 。例如：
I’m glad you are here. I was on the point of calling you.
很高兴你能来，我正要给你打电话。
Tom was on the point of leaving when we came in.
我们进来时，汤姆正要离开。
（3）come, go, leave, arrive, start 等动词可用于过去进行时，表示过去将要发生的动作。例如：
The waitress said she was arriving soon.
服务员说她很快就要到了。
The train was leaving at six the next morning.
火车将于第二天早晨六点离开。
（4）was/were to do 表示曾计划做某事，但不表明计划是否被执行，或表示“命运” （即
命中注定要发生的事）。例如：
It was said that the machine was to be repaired sometime the next week.
据说，下周会修理机器。
When he was to open the door, he found the keys nowhere.
他正要去开门，却发现找不到钥匙了。

W: Why are you late again?
M: I told you that I was to see Mary.［ “was (were) to +动词原形”表示在过去安排或计
划好的即将发生的动作，可带表示时间的副词或短语。］
W: But, you said you were going to see her next week.［表示过去未来发生的动作可用
“was (were)+going+to”表示。］
M: Yes. But today she called me that she would go abroad to study soon.［最常见的过去将
来时由“should (would) + 动词原形”构成。］
W: Go abroad to study?
M: She said the new school year began on September 1.（begin, come, go, leave 等动词的一般
过去时可表示在过去安排或计划好的未来的动作。）She said she was coming to see me
before she left（begin, come, go, leave 等动词可用过去进行时表示即将发生的动作。）
W: OK, but do you remember we have a date?
M: Of course I do. That’s why I’m here.
W: Then do you know what time it is now?
43
“was (were) + about to +动词原
M: I was about to leave when it began to rain cats and dogs.［
形”表示过去即将发生的动作，一般不带表示时间的副词或短语。］
W: Really? But how do you explain this?
M: What? Oh, nothing. She kissed me when I left.
W: She kissed you?
M: Yeah, why not? She is my sister.
R ole Play
选择题。
1. TV’s influence in terms of immediate change in behavior.
A. be measured B. would be measured
C. was going to measure D. would measure
2. If only the committee the regulations and put them into effect as soon as possible.
A. approve B. will approve C. can approve D. would approve
3. He told me that it something of a renaissance.
A. to experience B. is experiencing C. will experience D. was experiencing
4. Manager announced that he me to Paris the next year.
A. took B. would take C. takes D. will take
5. We could not assume that they in affairs of corruption.
A. are going to involve B. were going to involve
C. will involve D. have involved
6. She when the doorbell suddenly rang.
A. is telephoning B. will telephone
C. was about to telephone D. is to telephone
44
7. As soon as the baby saw her mother, she .
A. was going to cry B. cried
C. began to cry D. was crying
8. Mrs. Bliss kept the door and the windows shut lest the noise outside her son’s sleep.
A. would interfere with B. should interfere with
C. interfered with D. had interfered with
Self-evaluation
45
Unit 现在完成时
The Present
Perfect Tense
什么样的事情既是发生在现在，又是完成的动作？现在完成时用于一些相对于现在
这个参照点已经完成或未完成但对现在有影响的事件。现在完成时到底应该如何使用
呢？让我们一起来学习一下吧!
7.1 现在完成时概述
1. 定义
现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，或从过去已经开
始，持续到现在的动作或状态。
2. 构成
动词的现在完成式由 has/have 加过去分词构成，即：
has/have + past participle
现在完成时各句式的基本句型如表 7-1 所示。
表 7-1 现在完成时各句式的基本句型
肯定句 I have seen the movie.
否定句 I have not seen the movie.
Have you seen the movie?
一般疑问句
回答：Yes, I have./No, I haven’t.
特殊疑问句 What have you seen?
46
规则动词的过去分词一般是由动词或动词变化后加 ed 构成，例如：work→worked, hope→
hoped, stop→stopped, try→tried。
不规则动词过去式及过去分词如下。
（1）A-A-A 型，即动词原形、过去式和过去分词同形，如表 7-2 所示。
表 7-2 动词原形、过去式和过去分词同形
动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义
cost cost cost 花费
cut cut cut 割，切
hurt hurt hurt 受伤
hit hit hit 打，撞
let let let 让
put put put 放下
read read read 读
set set set 安排，安置
spread spread spread 展开，传播，涂
spit spit/spat spit/spat 吐痰
shut shut shut 关上，闭起，停止营业
（2）A-A-B 型，即动词原形和过去式同形，如表 7-3 所示。
表 7-3 动词原形和过去式同形
beat beat beaten 打败
（3）A-B-A 型，即动词原形和过去分词同形，如表 7-4 所示。
表 7-4 动词原形和过去分词同形
become became become 变成
come came come 来
run ran run 跑
47
（4）A-B-B 型，具体包括以下几种情况。
① 在动词原形后加一个辅音字母 d, t 或 ed 构成过去式或过去分词，如表 7-5 所示。
表 7-5 在动词原形后加辅音字母 d, t 或 ed 构成过去式或过去分词
burn burnt burnt 燃烧
deal dealt dealt 解决
dream dreamed/dreamt dreamed/dreamt 做梦
hear heard heard 听见
hang hanged/ hung hanged/ hung 绞死，悬挂
learn learned/learnt learned/learnt 学习
mean meant meant 意思
shine shone/shined shone/shined 使照耀，使发光
show showed showed/shown 展示，给……看
smell smelled/smelt smelled/smelt 闻，嗅
speed sped/speeded sped/speeded 加速
spell spelled/spelt spelled/spelt 拼写
wake waked/woke waked/woken 醒来，叫醒，激发
② 把动词原形的最后一个辅音字母“d”改为“t”构成过去式或过去分词，如表 7-6 所
示。
表 7-6 把动词原形的最后一个辅音字母“d”改为“t”构成过去式或过去分词
build built built 建筑
lend lent lent 借给
rebuild rebuilt rebuilt 改建，重建
send sent sent 送
spend spent spent 花费
48
③ 原形→ought→ought，如表 7-7 所示。
表 7-7 原形→ought→ought
bring brought brought 带来
buy bought bought 买
fight fought fought 打仗
think thought thought 思考，想
④ 原形→aught→aught，如表 7-8 所示。
表 7-8 原形→aught→aught
catch caught caught 捉，抓
teach taught taught 教
⑤ 通过改变动词原形中的一个元音字母构成过去式和过去分词，如表 7-9 所示。
表 7-9 通过改变动词原形中的一个元音字母构成过去式和过去分词
dig dug dug 掘（土）

，挖（洞、沟等）
feed fed fed 喂
find found found 发现，找到
get got got/gotten 得到
hold held held 拥有，握住，支持
lead led led 引导，带领，领导
meet met met 遇见
sit sat sat 坐
shoot shot shot 射击
stick stuck stuck 插进，刺入，粘住
win won won 赢
49
⑥ 原形→lt/pt/ft→lt/pt/ft，如表 7-10 所示。
表 7-10 原形→lt/pt/ft→lt/pt/ft
feel felt felt 感到
keep kept kept 保持
leave left left 离开
sleep slept slept 睡觉
sweep swept swept 扫
⑦ 其他构成过去式和过去分词的情况，如表 7-11 所示。
表 7-11 其他构成过去式和过去分词的情况
lay laid laid 下蛋，放置
pay paid paid 支付
say said said 说
stand stood stood 站立
understand understood understood 明白
lose lost lost 失去
have had had 有
make made made 制造
sell sold sold 卖
tell told told 告诉
retell retold retold 重讲，重复，复述
（5）A-B-C 型，具体包括以下几种情况。
① 原形→过去式→原形+(e)n，如表 7-12 所示。
表 7-12 原形→过去式→原形+(e)n
blow blew blown 吹
50
续表
drive drove driven 驾驶
draw drew drawn 画画
eat ate eaten 吃
fall fell fallen 落下
give gave given 给
grow grew grown 生长
forgive forgave forgiven 原谅，饶恕
know knew known 知道
mistake mistook mistaken 弄错，误解
overeat overate overeaten （使）吃过量
prove proved proven/proved 证明，证实，试验
take took taken 拿
throw threw thrown 抛，扔
ride rode ridden 骑
see saw seen 看见
show showed showed/shown 展示
write wrote written 写
② 原形→过去式→过去式+(e)n，如表 7-13 所示。
表 7-13 原形→过去式→过去式+(e)n

break broke broken 打破
choose chose chosen 选择
get got got/gotten 得到
hide hid hidden 隐藏
forget forgot forgotten 忘记
freeze froze frozen 冷冻，结冰，感到严寒
speak spoke spoken 说
steal stole stolen 偷
51
③ 通过变动词原形在重读音节中的元音字母“i”为“a”和“u”分别构成过去式和过
去分词，如表 7-14 所示。
表 7-14 变动词原形在重读音节中的元音字母“i”分别为“a”
（过去式）和“u”
（过去分词）
begin began begun 开始
drink drank drunk 喝
sing sang sung 唱
sink sank sunk 下沉，沉没
swim swam swum 游泳
ring rang rung 打电话
④ 其他构成过去式和过去分词的情况，如表 7-15 所示。
表 7-15 其他构成过去式和过去分词的情况
be (am, is, are) was/were been 是
bear bore born/borne 负担，忍受
do did done 做
fly flew flown 飞
go went gone 去
lie lay lain 躺
wear wore worn 穿
Task 1
I. 除了上述各表中所列举的动词之外，你还能增加哪些词？
II. 写出下列动词的过去分词形式。
become come give learn
put stand begin drink
hear leave read take
care break eat hold
52
let say tell fall
keep make shut think
bring forget know pay
sit write
III. 用下列单词组成一个完整的句子。
novel, yet, I, the, read, haven’t, no
No, .
7.2 使用现在完成时的几种情况
（1）过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，着眼于现在。例如：
She has lost her books.
她丢失了她的书。（现在的状态是她丢了书，仍然没有书。）
Some examples of language have survived in written form and then been revived by later
generations.
已经有例子表明，有些语言通过文字记录被保存下来，而且还在后代中得以复兴。（过去
的状态是一些语言有书面形式，完成的动作是使其保存下来并得以复兴，现在的状态是
有了原先的语言。）
I have already lost the key.
我把钥匙弄丢了。（过去丢了钥匙，现在的状态是没有钥匙。）
I haven’t read that book yet.
我还没有读那本书呢。（过去没读那本书，现在的状态是不了解该书的内容。）
注意：现在完成时常与 already（已经），yet（已经），just（刚刚），ever（曾经）等词连
用——already 用于肯定句，yet 常用于否定句或疑问句句尾。
如图 7-1 所示，现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，
强调对现在的影响。
图 7-1 现在完成时的时间示意图
（2）表示一个从过去某个时间开始，延续到现在，并可能延续下去的动作。常与表示频度
的时间状语连用，如 ever, never, before, up to now, still, so far, since last year, for a long time, up to
53
present, up till now, all along, all these years, for ages, during the past/last ten years，等等。例如：
It’s the longest I’ve ever had to write.
这次我写的时间最长。
I haven’t seen her for a long time.
我很久没见到她了。
注意：现在完成时常与 for, since 引导的时间短语或从句连用。
① since+时间点，例如：
He has stayed here since 5 o’clock.
② since+时间段+ ago，例如：
He has stayed here since 5 hours ago.
③ since+从句，例如：
She has taught English since he came here.
since 表示的时间范围如图 7-2 所示。
图 7-2 since 表示的时间范围
④ for+时间段，例如：
He has kept the book for two weeks.
for 表示的时间范围如图 7-3 所示。
图 7-3 for 表示的时间范围
（3）现在完成时属于现在时态范畴，不能和表示过去的时间状语连用，如 yesterday, last

week, a day ago 等。但可以和 never, ever, already, yet, just（刚刚），for …, since …, in the past
three years, so far（到目前为止），by now, before（以前）等连用。例如：
Have you finished your painting yet?
你已经完成你的画了吗？
I have never heard of him before.
过去我从未听说过他。
（4）在现在完成时中，某些短暂性动词（表示动作一开始便结束的动词）不能与表示一
段时间的副词状语连用，如 arrive, come, drive, fly, go, leave, meet, move, stay, start 等表示位置
转移的动词及 reach, join, end, die, find, lose, fall, jump, knock, marry, begin 等。为了表述这种
54
意思，常用相应的延续性动词 have, keep, learn, live, serve, work 等（表示状态的动词）或短语
“be+名词/形容词/位置副词/介词短语”来代替短暂性动词。例如：
The meeting has been began for half an hour.（错误）
The meeting has been on for half an hour.（正确）
会议进行了半小时。
He has been joined the army for three years.（错误）
He has been in the army for three years.（正确）
他参军三年了。
与段时间连用时，常见的短暂性动词搭配及其变化（延续性动词）如表 7-16 所示。
表 7-16 常见的短暂性动词搭配及其变化（延续性动词）
短暂性动词（表动作）延续性动词（表状态）
leave be away from
buy have
die be dead
borrow/lend keep
join be in/be a member of/be a soldier
open be open
close be closed
come/go to be at/in
start/begin be on
become be
make friend be friend
fall asleep be asleep
catch a cold have a cold
reach/get/arrive stay/be
注意：短暂性动词除了可以改写为延续性动词用在现在完成时里，表示对现在造成的影
响或结果，还可以用“It is + 时间段+since+一般过去时句子”表示。例如：
It is three years since he joined the army.
（5）在 after, as soon as, if, till, when 等引导的状语从句中，用现在完成时代替将来完成
时。例如：
Let’s go home as soon as the rain has stopped.
雨一停我们就回家。
I shall go to see you when I have finished my assignment.
55
我写完作业就去看你。
（6） “It/This is/will be the first/last/second/third/ … time that …”结构中的从句要求用现在
完成时。例如：
This is the first time I have taken pictures with my own hands.
这是我第一次亲手拍照片。
This is the first time he has asked me to marry him.
这是他第一次向我求婚。
（7）要区分 have been in, have been to, have gone to 的用法。
① have been in 其实是用了延续性动词之后的变化（arrive in/get to/reach 相对应的延续性
动词是 be in），所以有时间段之类的词时要用它。例如：
He has been in New York for about three years.
他到纽约已经三年了。
② have been to 表示某人曾经去过某地，现在在本地，一般与短暂性动词搭配。例如：
He has already been to Tunisia, and is to go on to Morocco and Mauritania. I’ve been there
before.
他已经去过突尼斯，现在正前往摩洛哥和毛里塔尼亚。我过去到过那里。
③ have gone to 表示某人去了某地或在去某地的路上，现在不在本地，也是与短暂性动
词搭配。例如：
It can’t be John. He has gone to Shanghai.
那肯定不是约翰，他已经去了上海。
Task 2
I. 下列句子选自电台的新闻广播，用所给动词的适当形式填空。
arrive close die leave marry stop
1. England footballers back in Britain after their match in Rome.

2. Singer Alex Haverty his long-time girlfriend Katy Bowen.
3. Charles Black, member of Parliament for East Chilbury, at the age of 57.
4. Once again, bad weather the tennis final at Wimbledon.
5. The Foreign Minister London for a two-day visit to Berlin.
6. Heavy snow hundreds of roads in Scotland.
II. 完成下列句子并使其与原句意义相同。
1. The English professor arrived here about a week ago.
56
The English professor here for about a week.
2. Her husband started to work on the farm three hours ago.
Her husband on the farm for three hours.
3. The French musician came to China last month, and he is still here.
The French musician China for a month.
4. He joined the army in 1985.
He the army 1985.
5. He joined the League half a year ago.
He has been a League half a year.
III. 用“been”和“gone”完成下列句子。
1. Jim is on holiday. He has to Italy.
2. Hello! I have just to the shops. I have bought lots of things.
3. Alice is not here at the moment. She has to the shop to get a newspaper.
4. Tom has out. He will be back in about an hour.
5. — Are you going to the bank?
— No, I have already there.
7.3 现在完成时与一般过去时的比较
1. 概念的差异
现在完成时表示过去的动作（或状态）对现在产生的影响和结果；一般过去时表示在过
去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，也表示过去经常或反复发生的动作。例如：
We haven’t seen him since last year.
我们自从去年以来一直未见到他。（现在还未见到）
We didn’t see him last year.
我们去年没见到他。（现在不一定未见到）
2. 时间状语的差异
现在完成时表示从过去一直持续到现在的某个动作或状态，和与现在有关的时间状语连用；
一般过去时表示过去某一特定时间发生的动作或存在的状态，与具体的过去时间状语连用。例如：
I have lived in the country for the winter.
我整个冬天一直住在乡下。（持续到现在）
I lived in the country through/for the winter.
那整个冬天我都住在乡下。（过去一段时间）
57
3. 值得注意的问题
（1）动作发生在过去，一直持续到说话的时候，并且还在延续时，要用现在完成时。
例如：
We have learned English for eight years.
我们学英语八年了。
（2）指过去的经历，但没有表示过去的时间状语，要用现在完成时。例如：
I have been to Beijing twice.
我去过北京两次。
（3）以 when 开头的特殊疑问句，要用一般过去时。例如：
When did you lose your pen?
你什么时候丢了钢笔？
（4）just（刚刚）与现在完成时连用，just now（刚才）与一般过去时连用。例如：
The train has just gone.
火车刚刚离开。
I went to the supermarket just now.
我刚才去了超市。
（5）since 作介词，后面跟时间名词一起作状语时，句子要用现在完成时；since 作连词，
引导状语从句时，主句用现在完成时，从句用一般过去时。例如：
He has worked in this factory since 2003.
他自从 2003 年就在这家工厂工作。
I have known him since he was a child.
他还是孩子的时候，我就知道他。
（6）so far, in the last/past …与现在完成时连用。例如：
So far, we have received no news form her.
到目前为止，我们没有从她那里收到过消息。

Mom : Hi, I am home. It has been a long and tiring day today.（现在完成时表示到现
在为止已完成或仍在持续的动作、状态，强调对现在的影响和与现在的联
系。）
Tom: Where have you gone, mom? Oh, I mean where have you been, mom?［表示终
止的动词（如 die, go）不可用完成时表示从过去某时持续到现在的动作或状
态。］
58
Mom : I have been to the flower market. I bought a pot of flower.（本句用 have been to 表
示某人去过某地但现在已经回来了。不可用 have gone to。）
Tom: Mom, it has been a long day for me, too.（现在完成时表示到现在为止已完成或
仍在持续的动作、状态，强调对现在的影响和与现在的联系。）
Mom : Tell me what you have done today.
Tom: I have finished all my homework.（现在完成时表示到现在为止已完成的动作，
强调对现在的影响和与现在的联系，或表示经历、经验。）
Mom : Oh, good boy. And?
Tom: I have cleaned all the room.
Mom : Pretty good. And?
Tom: And I have eaten up all the food.
Mom : You must be very tired by now, I should say. Oh, my God. What have you
done!（现在完成时可用来表示某种感情色彩。本句表示对所做的事不满。）
You have eaten this?（现在完成时可用来表示某种感情色彩。本句表示一
种惊讶的感情。）You have ruined my precious flower.（现在完成时表示到
现在为止已完成或仍在持续的动作、状态，强调对现在的影响和与现在的
联系。）
Tom: But it has died（错误）for a couple of days.
Mom : What did you say?
Tom: I mean it has been dead（正确）for a couple of days. Furthermore, the flower you
have mentioned is nothing but a cabbage!（现在完成时表示到现在为止已完成
的动作，强调对现在的影响。）
R ole Play
59
I. 用括号内动词的适当形式完成下列句子。
1. — you clean) the room?
— Yes, we (do) that already.
— When you (do) it?
— We (do) it an hour ago.
2. — he (see) this film yet?
— Yes.
— When he (see) it?
— He (see) it last week.
3. How many times you (be) there?
4. I (read) the novel twice. It’s interesting.
5. — She (go) to Pairs, hasn’t she?
— Yes.
— How she (go) there?
— She (go) there by air.
6. So far, many countries (develop) their software programs.
7. Mr. Chen (give) up smoking last year.
8. Mr. Chen (give) up smoking since last year.
II. 改错题。
1. How long have you begun to study English?
2. I have borrowed this book for two weeks.
3. The river has become very dirty since last August.
4. Our manager is away today. He has been to Guangzhou on business.
5. He has gone out for two years.
60
Self-evaluation
61
Unit 过去完成时
The Past
Perfect Tense
过去完成时是个相对的时态，不能离开过去某个时刻或动作而“独闯天下”
，只能
早于过去某时或某个动作，或频频用于主句为一般过去时的宾语从句中。
8.1 过去完成时概述
1. 定义
过去完成时表示一个动作或状态在过去某一时间或动作之前已经完成或结束，也可能是
早已完成或结束，即“过去的过去”；也可以指过去的动作延续到过去的某个时刻。
2. 构成
过去完成时由“had +动词的过去分词”构成，had 通常用于任何人称。即：
had + past participle
各句式的基本句型如表 8-1 所示。
表 8-1 过去完成时各句式的基本句型
肯定句 They had listened to his music.
否定句 They hadn’t listened to his music.
Had they listened to his music?
一般疑问句
回答：Yes, they had./No, they hadn’t.
62
续表
特殊疑问句 What had they done?
被动语态 That music had been listened to by them.
3. 功能
（1）过去完成时表示在过去某时或某个动作之前发生的动作或存在的状态，或表示经历
或经验，即“过去的过去” ，可以用 by, before 等介词短语或一个时间状语从句来表示，也可
以用一个表示过去的动作来表示，还可能通过上下文来表示。例如：
The organization had broken no rules, but neither had it acted responsibly.
该组织没有违反规定，但也没有履行职责。
Until then, his family hadn’t heard from him for six months.
从那时起，他的家人已经六个月没有收到他的来信。
When I woke up, it had stopped raining.
我醒来时，雨已经停了。
如图 8-1 所示，过去完成时的动作或状态均发生在过去，并在过去的时间里动作或状态
已经完成。这时过去完成时的动作通常是短暂动作。
图 8-1 过去完成时的时间示意图（一）
（2）表示由过去的某一时刻开始，一直延续到过去另一时间的动作或状态，常和 for 及
since 构成的时间状语连用。例如：
I said mother had been angry about your laziness since we moved here.
我说自从你搬到这儿以来妈妈一直为你的懒惰而生气。
We hadn’t seen each other since he left Beijing Jiaotong University.
自从他离开北京交通大学我们就一直没有见过面。
Before she came to China, Linda had taught English in a middle school for about five years.
在来中国之前，琳达已经在一所中学教了五年英语。
如图 8-2 所示，过去完成时的动作或状态均发生在过去，并在过去一段时间内重复
发生。
63
图 8-2 过去完成时的时间示意图（二）
Task 1
1. When I got there, the windows (break).
2. By the time we got there, she (leave).
3. He (turn) off the light. We can leave now.
4. I (not realize) she wasn’t Chinese until she spoke.
5. He told us that he (give) the book to his brother.
8.2 使用过去进行时的几种情况
（1）用于上下文语义中，叙述过去发生的事情。在已叙述了过去发生的事情后，反过来
追述或补述以前发生的动作时，常使用过去完成时。例如：
Mr. Robert died yesterday. He had been a good family man.
罗伯特先生昨天去世了。他以前真是一个居家好男人。
She was very happy. Her whole family were pleased with her, too. She had just won the first in
the Spelling Bee.
她赢得了拼单词比赛第一名，她和她的家人都很高兴。
（2）在含有定语从句的主从复合句中，如果叙述的是过去的事，先发生的动作常用过去
完成时。例如：
I returned the book that I had borrowed.
我已归还了我借的书。
She found the key that she had lost.
她丢失的钥匙找到了。
（3）过去完成时常常用在 told, said, knew, heard, thought 等动词后的宾语从句（或间接引
语）中，这时从句中的动作发生在主句表示的过去的动作之前。例如：
I thought that I had seen him before.
64
我觉得我以前见过他。
Tom said he had kept the book for 2 weeks.
汤姆说他借了这本书两周了。
（4）过去完成时表示在某一动作之前已经完成的动作，过去的时间由 before, after, when,
as soon as, till/until 引导的时间状语从句表示出来。在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中，发生
在前的动作用过去完成时，发生在后的动作用一般过去时。例如：
The class had begun when I got to school.
当我赶到学校时，已经开始上课了。
He had left before I got home.
在我到家之前他已经走了。
注意：如果两个动作紧接着发生，则常常不用过去完成时，特别是在包含 before 和 after
的复合句中，因为这时从句的动作和主句的动作发生的先后顺序已经非常明确，
这时可以用一般过去时代替过去完成时。例如：
Where did you study before you came here?
你来这儿之前在哪里上学？
After he closed the door, he left the classroom.
他关上门后离开了教室。
（5）表示意向的动词，如 hope, wish, expect, think, mean, suppose 等，用过去完成时表示
“原本……，未能……”
。例如：
They had hoped to see you off at the airport, but they got there too late.
他们本打算去机场为你送行，但是去晚了。
The result was better than what we had expected.
结果比我们想象的要好。
（6）用在 hardly ... when ..., no sooner ... than ..., It was the first (second, etc.) time (that) ...等
固定句型中。例如：
Hardly had he begun to speak when the audience interrupted him.
他刚开始演讲，听众就打断了他。
No sooner had he arrived than he went away again.
他刚到就又走了。
It was the third time that he had been out of work that year.
这是他那一年第三次失业了。
65
W: Why did you get up so early?
H: I got up early to do some housework. Remember what you said to me before sleep last
night?
W: I said I had been angry about your laziness since we got married.（过去完成时表示在
过去某时或某个动作之前发生的动作、存在的状态或表示经历、经验。）
H: What you said is right. You had done housework for 2 months when I heard your
complaints.（过去完成时表示过去某一时间以前开始一直延续到那个时间并可能继续
下去的动作。）So I had finished ironing your shirt before you got up.（过去完成时表
示某一个动作之前已经完成的动作，过去的时间由 before 引导的时间状语从句表
示出来。）
W: Oh, I’m so happy about what you have done. I had hoped that you became an
industrious man.（过去完成时可表示过去未实现的希望或计划。）
H: I am an industrious man now. Here you are. It’s really hard to iron it for it’s full of
creases. What’s the matter, Jane?
W: Creases are what I want. But now you flatten it.
R ole Play
Task 2
1. We (paint) the house before we (move) in.
2. That rich old man (make) a will before he (die).
3. When I returned home, he (leave).
4. Paul (go) out with Jane after he (make) a phone call.
5. We (learn) about 4,000 English words by the end of last term.
66
6. I (wash) all the clothes. So I can have a rest.
7. They (stay) in China for a long time.
8. He (turn) off the light. We can leave now.
9. By the time we got to the cinema, the film (begin).
10. She (finish) her homework before I left school.
8.3 一般过去时和过去进行时的区别
（1）在主从复合句中的用法不同。
① 用在宾语从句中。在主句谓语为一般过去时的宾语从句中，既可用一般过去时，也可
用过去完成时，但两种时态的意义明显不同。试比较下列句子：
She said she was a teacher.
她说她是位老师。（说话时仍为老师）
She said she had been a teacher.
她说她曾当过老师。（说话时已不是）
She said she had been a teacher for twenty years.
她说她当过 20 年的老师。（主要强调说话时已当过 20 年老师，此状态可能在过去已经结
束，也可能还没有）
注意：如果从句中有表示具体时间的状语，则常用一般过去时。例如：
He said he was born in 1989.
他说他是 1989 年出生的。
② 用在含有 before 的主从复合句中，before 本身就能明确地表示时间的先后关系，故多
数主从句均使用一般过去时，而无需使用过去完成时。试比较下列句子：
We got to the station before the train had left.
火车尚未开动之前，我们就到了车站。
We had got to the station before the train left.
火车开出之前，我们就已经到了车站。
③ 用在含有 when 的主从复合句中，由于 when 本身不能明确表示时间的先后关系，谓
语动词动作发生的时间先后需依据上下文来判断，先发生的用过去完成时，后发生的用一般
过去时。例如：
When all his money had been used up, Peter had to turn to a friend for help.
当他的钱全都用光时，彼得只好转而求助于一个朋友。
注意：有时，主句和从句的谓语动词的先后关系十分明确，两个动作紧接着发生，前一
动作引发后一动作，这时两者均用一般过去时即可。例如：
When the meeting was over, we left the hall.
67
散会后，我们就离开了大厅。
（2）在叙述两个或两个以上接连发生的动作用 and, but, so 或 then 等连接并按时间发生的
先后顺序叙述时，只需用一般过去时。但有时为明确动作发生的先后顺序，先发生的动作就
得用过去完成时。例如：
The farmers were in high spirits because they had got another good harvest.
农民们兴高采烈，因为他们又获得了一次好收成。
（3）一些表示心理活动的动词，如 think，know，expect，mean，hope，want，suppose
等，用一般过去时可表示存在于过去的心理活动。而这些词的过去完成时则表示的是过去未
曾实现的愿望、打算、想法或意图等。例如：
I didn’t know you were here.
我不知道你在这儿。
We had hoped that you would be able to visit us.
我们原本希望你去看我们。
I. 选择题。
1. The police found that the house and a lot of things .
A. has broken into; has been stolen B. had broken into; had been stolen
C. has been broken into; stolen D. had been broken into; stolen
2. By the end of this century, we ours into a strong modern country.
A. will build B. had built C. have built D. will have built
3. We the work by six yesterday evening.
A. finished B. would finish C. had finished D. had been finished
4. I to help you but couldn’t get here in time.
A. want B. had wanted C. have wanted D. was wanting
5. Mrs. Wu told me that her sister .
A. left about two hours before B. would leave about two hours before
C. has left about two hours ago D. had left about two hours before
6. I lost the book I .
A. have bought B. bought C. had bought D. had been bought
7. The bus had gone when I at the bus stop.
A. have arrived B. arrived C. had arrived D. am arriving
8. Tom of visiting his grandmother, but the bad weather made him change his
68
schedule.
A. has thought B. thought C. had thought D. had been thought
9. — Did you meet Tom at the airport?
— No, he by the time I there.
A. has left; got B. had left; arrived C. left; arrived D. left; had got
10. — Why didn’t Tom attend the meeting yesterday?
— He in Beijing.
A. was B. am C. had been D. have been
II. 按要求改写下列句子。
1. She had written the book by the end of 1960.（对画线部分提问）
2. We cooked the dumplings. We ate them up.（用过去完成时连接两个句子）
3. Jim’s father mended the car. It was broken.（用过去完成时连接两个句子）
4. We had our tests. Then we had a long holiday.（用过去完成时连接两个句子）

After we ______________________________, we ___________________________________.
5. He showed us the picture. Then he showed us around the house.（用过去完成时连接两个句子）
Before he _____________________________, he_____________________________________.
Fun Time
The English Language
Have you ever wondered why foreigners have trouble with the English Language?
Let’s face it.
English is a stupid language.
There is no egg in the eggplant,
No ham in the hamburger.
And neither pine nor apple in the pineapple.
English muffins were not invented in England.
French fries were not invented in France.
69
We sometimes take English for granted.
But if we examine its paradoxes we find that
Quicksand takes you down slowly.
Boxing rings are square.
And a guinea pig is neither from Guinea nor is it a pig.
If writers write, how come fingers don’t fing.

If the plural of tooth is teeth
Shouldn’t the plural of phone booth be phone beeth.
If the teacher taught,
Why didn’t the preacher praught?
If a vegetarian eats vegetables

What the heck does a humanitarian eat?
Why do people recite at a play?
Yet play at a recital?
Park on driveways and
Drive on parkways.
You have to marvel at the unique lunacy

Of a language where a house can burn up as
It burns down.
And in which you fill in a form
By filling it out.
And a bell is only heard once it goes!
English was invented by people, not computers.

And it reflects the creativity of the human race.
(Which of course isn’t a race at all.)
That is why
When the stars are out they are visible.
But when the lights are out they are invisible.
70
And why it is that when I wind up my watch
It starts.
But when I wind up this observation,
It ends.
Self-evaluation
71
Unit 现在完成进行时
The Present Perfect
Progressive Tense
亲爱的同学们，到目前为止，你计算过自己已经参加过多少次考试了吗？是不是从
开始上学到现在就一直在被考试困扰着啊？那么在这一章，我们将系统地学习该怎样用
英语向老师描述“一直在被考试困扰”。Ready? Go!
9.1 现在完成进行时概述
现在完成进行时表示从过去某时开始到现在这一段时间内一直还在持续的动作。其时间
示意图如图 9-1 所示。
图 9-1 现在完成进行时的时间示意图
现在完成时侧重动作的结束或者完成，而现在完成进行时强调动作的未结束和继续性。例如：
He has finished his homework.
He has been doing his homework.
72
现在完成时的构成为：
have/has + done
现在完成进行时的构成为：
have/has + been doing

A: Hi, Peter. I haven’t seen you for months. What have you been doing lately?（现在完成
进行时表示“最近”一直在从事的工作或活动。）
B: Studying.
A: Studying what?
B: Japanese.
A: Oh? Really? But I have never heard of it.
B: I have been studying Japanese for five years.（现在完成进行时表示动作从过去某时
开始一直持续到现在。）
A: That’s great. Then you can be my interpreter when I go to Japan.
B: No problem.
A: Oh, I almost forget! I have a gift for you.
B: Thank you very much. For this nice walkman, I’ve been wanting for a long time.（现
在完成进行时表示从过去某时开始持续到现在的动作。）
A: Where’s Jane? Is she out?
B: No. She has been sitting in that room since 8’clock this morning.（现在完成进行时
表示动作从过去某时开始一直持续到现在的动作。）
A: What’s she doing?
B: She has been thinking.
A: Thinking what?
B: Which dress she should wear today?
R ole Play
73
9.2 现在完成进行时的基本用法
（1）强调动作还未结束。例如：
I’ve been joining in CET4 twice, but I haven’t passed it yet.
我已经参加过两次大学英语四级考试了，可是到现在还没通过呢。
（2）动词 live, learn, play, rain, snow, stand, study, teach, work, wait 等用于现在完成进行时，
强调动作持续时间很长或者带有感情色彩。例如：
We have always been waiting for John.
我们每次总得等约翰。
（3）现在完成进行时有时也表示在现在以前这个阶段反复发生的事情。例如：
He has been proposing to her. Hasn’t he married with her?
他一直在向她求婚。难道他还没跟她结婚吗？
（4）有些动词是不能用于现在完成进行时的。
① 表示状态的动词：be, have, exist 等。
② 表示感情的动词：love, like, hate, detest 等。
③ 表示感觉的动词：feel, sound, know, hear, see 等。
（5）用于现在完成进行时的时间状语基本与表示继续的现在完成时的时间状语是相同的，
主要有 since, these years, recently, all the time (day, week, month, year …), for+段时间，等等。
I. 改错题。
1. All these years they are contributing a lot to our college.
2. You have been drinking six cups of coffee this afternoon.
3. What have you been doing before you left Beijing?
4. Well done. Have you done it all by yourself?
5. It’s a long time since Tom comes to see me.
74
1. My dear manager, I (look) for a job for three months, and this is my first formal
interview.
2. Alice (stay) in Shanghai for three months last year.
3. Little Jone is dirty all over because he (play) in the mud all the morning.
4. I (wonder) if you were free this afternoon.
5. Here she comes! We (wait) anxiously for her since two o’clock in the afternoon.
III. 选择题。
1. — I’m sure Marry will win in the final.
— I think so. She for it for months.
A. is preparing B. was preparing
C. had been preparing D. has been preparing
2. By the time you realize you into a trap, it’ll be too late for you to do anything about it.
A. walk B. walked C. have walked D. had walked
3. So far this year we a fall in house prices by between 10 and 15 percent.
A. saw B. see C. had seen D. have seen
4. Celina is taking notes in class at Foreign College, where she English for a year.
A. studies B. studied C. is studying D. has been studying
5. Andrew hard for long to realize his dream and now he is a pop-star all over the world.
A. works B. is working C. has worked D. had worked
6. — I have got a headache.
— No wonder. You in front of that computer too long.
A. work B. are working
C. have been working D. worked
7. The unemployment rate in our country from 6% to 5% in the past two years.
A. has fallen B. had fallen C. is falling D. was falling
8. Now that she is out of job, I think Lily going back to school, but she hasn’t decided
yet.
A. had considered B. has been considering
C. considered D. is going to consider
9. — you him around our school yet?
— Yes. We had a great time there.
A. Have; shown B. Do; show C. Had; shown D. Did; show
10. — Hi, Lucy, you look pale.
75
— I am tired. I the house all day.
A. cleaned B. had cleaned
C. have been cleaning D. have cleaned
Fun Time
Patient: You say carrot is good for eyesight. Is that true?
病人：你说胡萝卜对视力有好处，是真的吗？
Doctor: Certainly. Have you ever seen rabbits wearing glasses?
医生：当然！你看见过兔子戴眼镜吗？
Self-evaluation
76
Unit 过去完成进行时
The Past Perfect
Progressive Tense
亲爱的同学们，是不是还记得小品《小崔说事》呢？想不想尝试用英文来模仿改编
呢? 宋丹丹要出书《月子》，本山大叔揭穿了她， “拉倒吧！憋了那么久，就憋出两字。”
怎样翻译本山大叔的话呢？“You had been writing for such a long time. Only two
words.”或许能把基本意思表达出来。那么，本单元我们就来学习一下过去完成进行
时这个时态吧。Ready? Go!
10.1 过去完成进行时概述
1. 定义
过去完成进行时与过去完成时的用法很相近，它通常表示某个过去正在进行的动作或状
态，持续到过去某个时刻还未完成，一直持续到之后的当前才结束。过去完成进行时的时间
示意图如图 10-1 所示。
图 10-1 过去完成进行时的时间示意图
77
例如：
He was twenty years old. He had been studying English since he was ten.
（He was still studying English at twenty.）
那时他已经 20 岁了。他自 10 岁起就一直学习英语。（他 20 岁的时候还在学习英语。）
2. 构成
过去完成进行时的基本构成形式如下：
had been + doing
例如：
I had been suffering from headache when I took the exam.
考试的时候我一直在头痛。
10.2 过去完成进行时的含义
（1）动作的尚未完成性。例如：
He had been writing a novel.
（2）未果性。例如：
The scientists had been studying what the UFO was.
(But they were not able to find out.)
（3）情绪性。例如：
What had she been complaining about?（表示一种不耐烦的情绪，但一般情况下不能单独
出现，必须与过去时间搭配。）
10.3 过去完成进行时的基本用法
（1）表示过去某一时间之前一直进行的动作。过去完成进行时表示动作在过去某一时间
之前开始，一直延续到这一过去时间。和过去完成时一样，过去完成进行时也必须以一过去
时间为前提。例如：
It had been raining for three days. The fields were all under water.
雨已经下了三天了。田野全都淹没在了水下。
Task 1
完成下列句子。
_________________ before I found it.
78
这本书我找了好多天才找着的。
（2）表示反复的动作。例如：
He had been mentioning your name to me.
他过去多次向我提到过你的名字。
Task 2
翻译下面的句子。
你对我真是有求必应。
（3）过去完成进行时还常用于间接引语中。例如：
The doctor asked what he had been eating.
医生问他吃了什么。
Task 3
找出下面句子的错误之处并改正。
I asked where they had stayed all those days.
我问他们那些天是待在哪儿的。
（4）过去完成进行时之后也可接具有“突然”之意的 when 分句。例如：

I had only been reading a few pages when he came in.
我刚看了几页书他就进来了。
Task 4
用所给动词的正确形式补全句子。
I ________________ (sleep) when my friend telephoned me that day.
那天我刚睡了一会儿，我的朋友就给我打来电话。
（5）过去完成进行时还可用在 said, supposed 等引起的间接引语中，代替现在完成进行

时。例如：
He said, “I have been speaking to John.” = He said that he had been speaking to John.
79
R ole Play
Make a free dialogue with your partner. Try to use the tense we have learned in this
unit as much as possible.
I. 选择题。
1. Mother was delighted with Tom’s new book which he for a long time.
A. was writing B. has wrote
C. has been writing D. had been writing
2. It was midnight and I was exhausted because I since dawn.
A. was working B. have worked
C. had been working D. have been working
3. He to finish the work on time, but he didn’t get through it.
A. has tried B. was trying
C. tries D. had been trying
4. He and after that he had a drink at a small cafe.
A. was watching TV B. has watched TV
C. had been watching TV D. has been watching TV
5. My father was a good football player. He it since he was ten.
A. had played B. played
C. had been playing D. was playing
6. The little girl there in the sun for such a long time and got her face burnt.
A. has stood B. was standing
C. had been standing D. is standing
7. My brother complained that he the composition and had not finished it yet.
A. is writing B. has written
C. writes D. had been writing
8. My mother kept asking me where I all these days.
80
A. have stayed B. stay
C. had been staying D. were staying
II. 翻译下列句子。
1. 最后他们收到了他们盼望的信件。
2. 这结束了我们过的悲惨的生活。
3. 没有人知道这个家伙（rascal）这些年来都在干些什么。
4. 在她喊我进去之前，我已经在房间里等了半个小时。
5. 那时正是 6 点，他因从一大早就干活而累了。
III. 填空题。
Sir Isaac Newton discovered gravity through the fall of an apple. Apples (fall) in
many places for centuries and thousands of people (see) them fall. But Newton for
years (be) curious about the cause of the orbital motion of the moon and planets. What
kept them in place? Why didn’t they fall out of the sky？The fact that the apple (fall)
down toward the earth and not up into the tree answered the question he (ask) himself
about those larger fruits of the heavens, the moon and the planets.
Fun Time
Blind Date
After being with her all evening, the man couldn’t take another minute with his blind date.
Earlier, he had secretly arranged to have a friend call him to the phone so he would have an
excuse to leave. When he returned to the table, he lowered his eyes, put on a grim expression
and said, “I have some bad news. My grandfather just died.” “Thank heavens,” his date replied.
“If yours hadn’t, mine would have had to!”
81
Self-evaluation
82
Unit 将来进行时
The Future
Continuous Tense
亲爱的同学们，每次临近学期末，你是否会边看着扁扁的钱包边吃着泡面，这样安
慰自己：忍一下吧，等放假回家，这时候在我面前的就该是满满的一桌美食了，哈哈！
那下面就让我们学习用英语来表述我们的心里安慰吧！
11.1 将来进行时概述
1. 定义
将来进行时主要表示将来某一时刻正在进行的动作。将来进行时的时间示意图如图 11-1
所示。
图 11-1 将来进行时的时间示意图
83
例如：
What will you be doing this time tomorrow?
明天这个时候你会在做什么呢？
2. 构成
将来进行时的基本构成形式如下：
shall (will) be + 现在分词
例如：
What will you be doing at six tomorrow evening?
明天晚上六点钟你会在做什么呢？
11.2 将来进行时的用法
（1）将来进行时表示将来某时刻正在进行的动作或者状态。例如：
I won’t be free Friday morning. I’ll be having the English exam.
星期五上午我没空，我要进行英语考试。
（2）在口语中，将来进行时常表示预计即将发生或者势必要发生的动作。例如：
Come on. We’ll be having English class in a minute.
快，英语课一会儿就要开始了。
（3）有些情况下，将来进行时可以与一般将来时换用，但将来进行时比较委婉。例如：
When will you come?
When will you be coming?
11.3 将来进行时与一般将来时的主要区别
（1）两者的基本意义不一样。将来进行时表示将来某时正在进行的动作，一般将来时表
示将来某时将要发生的动作。例如：
What will you be doing this time tomorrow?
明天这个时候你会在做什么呢？
What will you do tomorrow?
你明天干什么？
（2）两者均可表示将来，但用将来进行时语气更委婉。例如：
When will you pay back the money?
你什么时候还钱？（似乎在直接讨债）
84
When will you be paying back the money?
这钱你什么时候还呢？（委婉地商量）
（3）有时一般将来中的 will 含有“愿意”的意思，而用将来进行时则只是单纯地谈未来
的情况。例如：
Mary won’t pay this bill.
玛丽不肯付这笔钱。（表意愿）
Mary won’t be paying this bill.
不会由玛丽来付钱。（单纯谈未来的情况）
R ole Play
Let’s say together! The situation is like this: Now it approaches the end of the
semester. Little money is left. And we are busy with all kinds of tests. In order to
encourage each other, let’s talk about the beautiful life in the holiday. Try to use the
future continuous tense we’ve just learned together.
翻译下列句子。
1. 我希望你按时来。
2. 我不久就去度假了。
3. 抓住那个孩子，要不他会掉下去的。
4. 你还要读点儿什么吗？
5. 我们什么时候再见面？
85
Fun Time
Great Event
大事件
Teacher : What great event happened in 2003?

老师： 2003 年发生了什么重大事件？
Little Willy : I was born.
小威利：我出生了。
Teacher : Er … The USA invaded Iraq. And what will be the great event for the Chinese
in 2008?
老师：呃……美国入侵伊拉克。那么 2008 年对中国人来说，将会发生重要事件呢？
Little Willy : My family will be celebrating my fifth birthday.
小威利：那时我的家人肯定在庆祝我的五岁生日。
Self-evaluation
86
Unit 将来完成时
The Future
Perfect Tense
亲爱的同学们，你们肯定跟室友卧谈吧？是不是也跟同伴这样说，十年后的今天我
都已经成为了 boss，开着 BMW 了？你的卧谈不经意间与你的室友温习了有关英语的
一个时态呢。Yes！那就是将来完成时。下面让我们一起来学习一下吧！
12.1 将来完成时概述
1. 定义
将来完成时用来表示在将来某一时间以前已经完成或一直持续的动作，或是发生在某个
将来时间，但对其后的另一个将来时间有影响的动作或状态。
将来完成时就如同把现在完成时平移到时间轴的将来时时段一样，其用法从与过去及现
在有关，变成了与将来及将来的将来有关，如图 12-1 所示。
图 12-1 将来完成时的时间示意图
87
2. 构成
将来完成时的基本构成形式如下：
(shall) will + have+ 动词的过去分词
例如：
We will have studied English for 10 years by the end of this year.
将来完成时经常与“before+将来时间”或“by+将来时间”连用，也可与 before 或者 by the
time 或 by the end of 引导的现在时的从句连用。

M: Go ahead and go for a walk. Don’t worry about this housework. By the time you get
back I shall have finished it.（将来完成时表示在将来某时刻前已完成的动作，常与
by，before 引导的表示将来的时间副词短语连用。）
W: But I really worry about my dishes. If you break one more plate, you will have broken
twenty dishes.（将来完成时表示将来的经历或对其后的影响。）By the end of this
month you will have broken all our dishes. You’re not to stop until all of them have
been broken.（在时间状语从句中，可用现在完成时代替将来完成时，表示将来某
一时刻以前已完成的动作。）
M: Darling, we can buy new ones.
W: No, unless all these old dishes have been broken. I shall not buy those new ones.
M: Darling, I will be more careful from now on.
注意：will 是情态助动词，有“大概”或“我想”的含义。例如：
You will have been wondering all the time how my invention works.
12.2 将来完成时的用法
（1）表示在将来某一时间之前已完成的动作，并往往对将来某一时间产生影响。
例如：
We shall have learned 12 units by the end of this term.
到这个学期末，我们将学完 12 个单元。
（2）表示推测，相当于“must have done”结构。例如：
You will have heard of this news, I guess.
我想你已经听说过这一消息了。
88
（3）在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中，用现在完成时代替将来完成时来表示将来某一
时刻以前已完成的动作。例如：
Tell me what you think about the movie when you have finished it.
你看完这部电影之后告诉我你对它的意见。
R ole Play
Talk about your future plans and dreams with your partners with the tense we have
learned in this unit. Imagine the beautiful future and the achievement after you graduate
ten or more years later.
I. 选择题。
1. By the end of this year, I enough money for a holiday.
A. will save B. will be saving
C. will have saved D. have saved
2. I have been studying here for four years, by next summer I .
A. shall graduate B. shall be graduated
C. shall be graduating D. shall have graduated
3. I hope her health greatly by the time we come back next year.
A. improves B. improved
C. will be improved D. will have improved
4. — Are you going to Richard’s birthday party?
— Yes. By then I my homework.
A. had finished B. will have finished
C. would have finished D. finished
5. I suppose by the time I come back in ten years’ time all these old houses down.
A. will have been pulled B. will be pulling
C. will have pulled D. will be pulled
6. I hope that they the road by the time we come back.
89
A. will have repaired B. would have repaired
C. have repaired D. had repaired
7. By the time you arrive in London, we in Europe for two weeks.
A. shall stay B. will have stayed
C. have stayed D. have been staying
8. By the year 2015, scientists probably a cure for cancer.
A. will be discovering B. are discovering
C. will have discovered D. have discovered
9. Before long, he all about the matter.
A. will have forgotten B. forget
C. have forgotten D. forgot
10. I am sure he the difficulties before you arrive there.
A. will have settled B. settled
C. had settled D. settle
1. 到下个月你们就结婚 10 年了吧。
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. 你到家之前我将把房子彻底打扫了一遍。
_____________________________________________________________________________
Fun Time
How Much Donated Money in All
A: Hello, Reverend Harriddin? This is the tax office. Is David Jones a member of your
congregation?
B: Yes, he is.
A: Did he donate $ 50,000？
B: Yes. He will have donated $50,000 if he donates $ 50,000 more.
90
Self-evaluation
91
Unit 被动语态
The Passive
Voice
亲爱的同学们，在生活中被动语态无处不在，并且在很多时候，被动语态比主动语
态更能准确地传达出我们的想法。但是，有很多同学就是栽在了这一“被”字（一辈子）
上。那么，在这一单元，我们将系统地学习被动语态的构成和用法，你准备好了吗？
OK, let’s go!
13.1 被动语态的基本用法
当谓语表示一个动作时，主语和它可以有两种不同的关系，即主动关系或被动关系。
主动关系被动关系
They treated him well. He was well treated.
他们待他很好。他受到很好的对待。
在表示主动关系时（即主语为动作的执行者时），谓语的形式称为主动语态（Active
Voice）；在表示被动关系时（即主语为动作的承受者时），谓语要用另一种形式，称为被动语
态（Passive Voice）。在被动结构的句子中，动作执行者可以由介词 by 引起的短语表示。
被动语态由助动词 be 加过去分词构成，时态通过 be 表现出来，即：
be + Past Participle
各个时态的被动形式如下。
92
（1）一般现在时，例如：
History is made by the people.
历史是人民创造的。
You’re wanted on the phone.
有人给你打电话。
（2）一般过去时，例如：
The conference was held in August.
这次会议是八月召开的。
When was the building completed？
这座大楼是什么时候建成的？
（3）一般将来时，例如：
You won’t be allowed to take so much luggage with you.
不会让你带这么多行李的。
What materials will be needed in the work?
工作中需要什么材料？
（4）现在进行时和过去进行时，例如：
A new railway is being built.
一条新铁路正在修建。
This road was being widened.
路那时正在加宽。
（5）现在完成时和过去完成时，例如：
The book has been translated into many languages.
这本书已被译成多种语言。
Production costs had been greatly reduced.
生产成本早已大大降低了。
各个时态的被动形式大致可归纳为表 13-1。
表 13-1 各个时态的被动形式
一般时状态进行时态完成时态

am am has
现在 is given is being given been given
are are have
was was
过去 given being given had been given
were were
93
续表
一般时状态进行时态完成时态
shall shall
将来 be given have been given
* * *
will will
should should
过去
be given have been given
将来 * * *
would would

M: I wasn’t invited, I wish I didn’t disturb you.［过去时：主语+was (were) +过去分词+
by+动作或行为的执行者。］
W: Absolutely not. Excuse the mess, the house is being painted.［现在进行时：主语+
am/is/are +being+过去分词+by+动作或行为的执行者。］
M: What makes you paint the house?
W: We are going to have a party here. Some old friends of mine will be invited by me.［将
来时：主语+shall (will) +be+过去分词+by+动作或行为的执行者。］
M: This house must have a long history. So it is difficult to paint.
W: The house had been built by my grandfather by 1960.［过去完成时：主语+had+
been+过去分词+by+动作或行为的执行者。］
W: It is not an easy job. But everything will have been done by the end of the week.［将来
完成时：主语+shall（will）+have+ been+过去分词+by+动作或行为的执行者。］
M: House painting is always done by me at home.（现在时：主语+am/is/are+过去分词+
by+动作或行为的执行者。）I would like to help you if you need.
W: Oh, great. Take this.
(After a while)
W: OK, let’s go. I will treat you to dinner!
M: Oh, that’s great!
W: Where is the door?
M: Oh, it is terrible!
W: You have painted the door!
94
Task 1
用正确的动词时态把下列句子补充完整。
1. The building (build) last year.（一般过去时的被动语态形式）
2. The Olympic Games (hold) every four years.（一般现在时的被动语态形式）
3. The project (discuss) at the meeting now.（现在进行时的被动语态形式）
4. Her new book (publish) next month.（一般将来时的被动语态形式）
5. Your room (not clean) yet.（现在完成时的被动语态形式）
6. She said the report (type) by her secretary for two weeks.（过去完成时的被动语态
形式）
7. Miss Li said the composition (give) to the students the next morning.（过去将来时的被
动语态形式）
8. By the end of next term two thousand English words (learn).（将来完成时的被动语
态形式）
13.2 使用被动语态的几种情况
（1）不知道或没有必要说明动作的执行者是谁（这时都不带由 by 引起的短语）。例如：

Such books are written for children.
这种书是为儿童写的。
When will the road be opened to traffic?
这条路什么时候通车？
（2）动作的承受者是谈话的中心（这时可带由 by 引起的短语）。例如：
The store is run by the trade union.
这家商店是工会办的。
The song was composed by a student.
这首歌曲是一个学生谱写的。
（3）出于礼貌措辞等方面的考虑不愿意说出动作的执行者是谁。例如：
You are requested to give a performance.
请你给我们表演一个节目。
It is generally considered not advisable to act that way.
这样做一般认为是不妥当的。
（4）被动结构能使句子得到更好的安排。例如：
He appeared on the stage and was warmly applauded by the audience.
他在台上出现，观众给予热烈鼓掌。
95
They are going to build an apartment house here next year. It is going to be built right beside
the Office Building.
我们明年在这里要修建一座住宅楼，就修在办公楼旁边。（如果两句都用“they”作主语
就会显得呆板。）
The plan was especially supported by those who wished to have more chance to speak English.
这个计划特别受到愿多有机会说英语的人的支持。（如果用“those”作主语，主语和谓
语的距离就会太远。）
（5）主动形式表被动的意义。
① 系动词：look, sound, feel, smell, taste, appear, seem, prove, become, get。例如：
The steel feels cold.
His plan proved (to be) practical.
② 表示某种属性特征的动词：read, write, act, cut, draw, sell, wash, wear, open。例如：
Nylon cleans easily.
尼龙容易洗干净。
The coat dries easily.
这种外衣容易干。

W: It is no fun standing here. What shall we do next? Suggestions will be heartily
appreciated.（为使语气委婉，有意不说出动作“appreciate”的发出者时用被动语态。）
M1: Tom, when were you born?
M2: I was born in 1979.（不知道或不用指明动作“bear”的发出者时用被动语态。）
M1: You are two years older than I am. You say first.
M2: Let’s go to the observatory.
M1: What for?
M2: To learn about the origin of universe.
M1: The origin of the universe will never be explained.（不知道或不必指明动作“explain”
的发出者时用被动语态。）
W: Peter is right. The plan was canceled.（要强调或者突出动作“cancel”的承受者时
用被动语态。）Let’s go to see a new movie.
M2: What is the movie about?
W: It is about a king who loved his people and was loved by them.（为了修辞的需要，避
免变换主语或主语过长时用被动语态。）
96
M1:No big fun.
M2:No big fun.
W: Peter, do you have any good suggestion?
M1:Yes. Let’s look at a picture together. The picture was drawn by my cousin.（“was
drawn”为“be + 过去分词”结构，是被动语态，表动作。）
W: The picture is well drawn.（“is drawn”为“系动词+表语”结构，表主语的特
征或状态。）
Task 2
按要求翻译下列句子。
类型 1：不知道动作的执行者，或是不必要提出执行者时，使用被动语态。
造纸术是由中国传入欧洲的。
类型 2：出于礼貌避免说出动作的执行者时，使用被动语态。
怎么能联系上你？
类型 3：被动语态有时可用“get+过去分词”结构来表示，强调动作的结果。
我计划夏天结婚。
类型 4：不及物动词或不及物短语动词没有被动语态，如 happen（发生），take place（发

生），come about（发生），break out（爆发），appear（出现），disappear（消失），
last（持续），arise（出现，发生），break down（中途抛锚）等。
他拐向另一条街，然后就消失了。
这个地方在过去 20 年间发生了巨大的变化。
类型 5：某些连系动词用主动表被动：一些感官动词，如 look（看上去），taste（尝起来），
sound（听起来），feel（摸上去），smell（闻起来）等，用主动语态表示被动意
义。
花闻起来很香。
97
他的理论被证明是正确的。
类型 6：一些由及物动词转换为不及物动词的词，如 sell（销售），wash（洗），burn（燃

烧）等，当它们与 well，easily 等副词连用时，通常用主动形式表示被动意义，
说明主语的某种属性（特征、性质或状态等）。
那本书很畅销。
我的上衣很容易洗。
13.3 特殊的被动结构
除了上面谈及的被动结构，被动语态还有下面两类特殊结构。
（1）带情态动词的被动结构。例如：
In this sense, bad things can be turned into good things.
从这一点上来说，坏事也可以转换成好事。
This instrument must be handled with great care.
这种仪器操作要非常细心。
（2）带不定式的被动结构。例如：
The whole plan has to be revised.
整个计划都得修改。
These debts will have to be paid.
这些债务是不得不偿还的。
除了单一的及物动词可用于被动结构外，一些相当于及物动词的短语动词也可用于被动
结构。常可这样用的短语动词有下面几类。
① 动词+介词，例如：
Has the doctor been sent for?
去请大夫了吗？
Such a thing has never been heard of before.
这种事从未听说过。
② 动词+副词，例如：
The idea was put forward by Lao Yang.
这个主意是老杨提出来的。
He was brought up by his aunt.
他是他姑给带大的。
98
③ 其他短语动词，例如：
The children are well taken care of in the nurseries.
孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。
Such people are looked down upon in society.
这种人在社会上是被人看不起的。
13.4 被动语态与系表结构的区别
（1）从过去分词的功能上来讲，被动语态中的过去分词是动词，多强调动作；系表结
构中的过去分词相当于形容词，说明主语的特点、性质或状态。前者通常可用“by +人”或
“by + 抽象名词”表动作的执行者，而后者则不用，有时也间或使用“by + 物”的形式。例
如：
She was not badly injured but she could not speak.（系表结构）
She was injured by a wild horse.（被动结构）
The tree was uprooted when we saw it.（系表结构）
The tree was uprooted by the wind.（被动结构）
（2）从过去分词的修饰语来看，系表结构中的过去分词可被 very, too, so 来修饰，被动
语态中的过去分词多用 much, so much, very much 等来修饰。例如：
He was very agitated.（系表结构）
He was much agitated by the news.（被动结构）
The man was too frightened to stand up.（系表结构）
（3）从修饰的过去分词本身的形式而言，一般地，以不规则形式的分词或-ed 结尾的分词
构成被动语态，以-en 结尾的分词构成系表结构。例如：
Father was clean shaven.（系表结构）
Father gets shaved every other day.（被动结构）
She was stricken with fever.（系表结构）
She was struck by a snake.（被动结构）
（4）从谓语动词的特征上来讲， “be + 不及物动词的过去分词”通常是系表结构，如 be
gone, be learned, be ashamed 等，这些动词通常是表示状态、智力活动或心态的动词； “be +
延续性动词的过去分词”通常是被动语态，如 be loved, be encouraged, be praised 等。例
如：
She is too reserved to become a ballet dancer.（系表结构）
The little girl is beloved by her parents.（被动结构）
The way was lost between the trees.（系表结构）
We students are encouraged to take the Public English Test.（被动结构）
99
（5）从时态特征上分析，系表结构没有进行时态，一般只用于一般现在时、一般过去时、
现在完成时和过去完成时这四种时态，而被动语态的时态范围较广。例如：
The composition has been written.（系表结构）
The composition is being written.（被动语态）
The house seemed occupied.（系表结构）
The house is being occupied by a group of teenagers.（被动语态）
（6）“地点主语+be+表示占据、充满意义的过去分词+with”为系表结构，常用的这类
动词有 overgrown, packed, crowded, overrun, overcrowded, dotted, marked, stained, filled, stuffed,
jammed, loaded, coated, decorated, ornamented, spotted, splashed, sprinkled, crowned, piled,
heaped, sheeted, littered 等。例如：
The Fuji mountain was crowned with heavy snow.
The meeting room is now decorated with colorful papers and balloons.

Sentence 1: All the criminals got shot in the crossfire.（“主语+get+过去分词”在多数情
况下不接 by+动作或行为的执行者。）
Sentence 2: Serve them right! Your vice has to be paid for.（带有不定词的被动结
构。）
Sentence 3: The man hasn’t had his fingernails cut for ten years.［have 无被动语态，但可
用于“主语+have（or get）+动作或行为的承受者+过去分词”的结构，表
示动作或行为的承受者被……，多用于叫人或雇人做某事。］
Sentence 4: This has never been heard of before.（ “动词+介词或动词+副词”用于被动
结构时，动词之后的介词或副词不可拆开或丢掉。）
Sentence 5: Your coffee smells great.（对于有些连系动词，如 fell, prove, smell, sound,
taste 等，若主词指事物时，用主动形式表被动意义。）
Sentence 6: Want to drink? If only you can enter. The key is in the room. The door blew
shut.［可用于“主语+动词+主语补语（形容词或过去分词）”结构的不及
物动词，如 blow, wear 等，用主动形式表被动意义。］
Sentence 7: I have no key at hand. The door won’t open.（不及物动词，如 lock, move,
open, shut 等与 can’t, won’t 连用而主语又指物时，用主动形式表被动意
义。）
Sentence 8: I see, it is only a piece of cake.
100
R ole Play
选择题。
1. The new suspension bridge by the end of last month.
A. has been designed B. had been designed
C. was designed D. would be designed
2. — David and Vicky married?
— For about three years.
A. How long were; being B. How long have; got
C. How long have; been D. How long did; get
3. Rainforests and burned at such a speed that they will disappear from the earth in the
near future.
A. cut B. are cut C. are being cut D. had been cut
4. My uncle until he was forty-five.
A. married B. didn’t marry
C. was not marrying D. would marry
5. When and where to go for the on-salary holiday yet.
A. are not decided B. have not been decided
C. is not being decided D. has not been decided
6. blood if you can and many lives will be saved.
A. Giving B. Give C. Given D. To give
7. — Put these glasses away before they .
— OK. I’ll put them in the cupboard.
A. have broken B. are breaking
C. get broken D. will be broken
101
Fun Time
老师，您这一“被”字（一辈子）真害人
有一天，一英语老师在课堂里给他的学生出了下面这样两道完成句子的题目：
（1）I knew that the price of pork （降了价）.（bring down）
（2）At last this book （被出版了）.（come out）
大家知道：第一道题的正确答案应该为：had been brought down。虽然这道题目的汉
语提示中没有“被”字，但我们却应该采用被动语态的形式来完成句子，因为 bring down
是个及物动词词组。
第二道题的正确答案应该是 came out，而不是 was come out。这是因为：虽然汉语提
示中有个“被”字，但 come out 是个不及物动词词组，所以它不能用于被动语态。
当英语老师发现很多同学做这两道题都犯了语态方面的错误时，他似乎有点儿得意。
他说：“没想到我这两道题设计得这么好。第一道题汉语提示中没有‘被’字而我们应该
用被动语态；第二道题汉语提示中有“被”字我们却不能用被动语态。我这个“被”字
的使用设计得多妙啊！我真为我这一“被”字得意呀！ ”
英语老师的“牛”刚吹完，有个做第二道题出错的学生站起来一板一眼地大声说： “老
师，刚才您说您为您这一‘被’字（一辈子）得意，可您知道吗？您这一‘被’子（一
辈子）把我给害苦啦！（开始有人笑，因为一‘被’字和一辈子的发音一模一样。英语老
师开始感到尴尬。）我讨厌您这一‘被’字（一辈子）！您不该有您这一“被”子（一辈
子）呀！”
听完这位同学的话，大家全都笑得前仰后合。
Self-evaluation
102
Unit 直接引语和间接引语
The Direct
Speech and the
Indirect Speech
我们在小时候学习说话时，父母时常教导我们要学会“学舌”，有时候还会笑话我
们“学不清舌”。我们现在用汉语学舌肯定没问题，但是如果用英语有把握吗？那么就
让我们看看在英语中是如何“学舌”的。
14.1 基本概念
引述别人的话语一般采用两种方式。
（1）原封不动地引用原话，把它放在引号内，称为直接引语（The Direct Speech）。
（2）用自己的话加以转述，称为间接引语（The Indirect Speech）。
14.2 基本原则
直接引语必须放在引号内，间接引语则不用引号。直接引语改为间接引语时，不仅句
式上要有变化，还必须对直接引语中的人称、时态、指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等进
行改变。
103
1. 引语转换时的句式变化
不同的直接引语句式，如陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句，转换成间接引语时要遵循
一定的句式转换规则，还要注意根据句意使用适当的引述动词。
1）陈述句的间接引语
将陈述句转换为间接引语，通常用 that 引导的宾语从句来表达。连词 that 在不引起歧义
的情况下可以省略。引述分句的动词常见的有 say，tell 等。例如：
He said, “I caught a cold yesterday.”
他说：“我昨天感冒了。 ”
→ He said (that) he had caught a cold the day before.
他说他前天感冒了。
Helen said to me, “I’m tired of taking such exams.”
海伦说： “我讨厌参加这种考试。 ”
→ Helen told me (that) she was tired of taking such exams.
海伦说她讨厌参加这种考试。
2）疑问句的间接引语
直接引语如果是疑问句，变成间接引语后，称为间接问句。引述的动词常用 ask, inquire,
wonder, want to know 等。间接问句的词序一般都用正常词序，句末不用问号，用句号。
（1）一般疑问句的间接引语：直接引语为一般疑问句时，用连词 whether 或 if 引导，某
些表示请求的疑问句也可以转换成间接祈使句。例如：
I asked him, “Are you satisfied with the results?”
我问他：“你对这样的结果满意吗？”
→ I asked him whether he was satisfied with the results.
我问他对这样的结果是否满意。
“Did you go to the British Museum yesterday?” asked Kate.
凯特问： “你昨天有没有去大英博物馆？”
Kate asked me if I had gone to the British Museum the day before.
→ 凯特问我前天有没有去大英博物馆。
The old man said to a passer-by, “Will you tell me the way to get to the Great Wall Hotel?”
那位老人跟一位过路人说： “请问到长城饭店的路怎么走。”
→ The old man asked a passer-by to tell him the way to the Great Wall Hotel.
那位老人请一位过路人告诉他去长城饭店的路。
（2）选择疑问句的间接引语：直接引语为选择疑问句时，用连词 whether … or … 引导。
例如：
He asked, “Are you interested in English or not?”
104
他问：“你是否对英语感兴趣？”
→ He asked (me) whether I was interested in English or not.
他问我是否对英语感兴趣。
“Do you like Chinese food or Japanese food?” he asked.
他问：“你喜欢中国食物还是日本食物？”
→ He asked whether I liked Chinese food or Japanese food.
他问我喜欢中国食物还是日本食物。
（3）特殊疑问句的间接引语：直接引语为特殊疑问句，转换为间接引语时，仍用原来的
疑问词引导。例如：
“What do you do in your free time?” he asked me.
他问我：“你业余时间干什么？”
→ He asked me what I did in my free time.
他问我业余时间做什么。
“Why did she go to America?” Paul asked.
保罗问： “她为什么去了美国？”
→ Paul asked why she had gone to America.
保罗问她为什么去了美国。
3）祈使句的间接引语
直接引语如果是祈使句，变成间接引语后，叫做间接祈使句。
（1）祈使句表示命令时，要把直接引语的动词 say 变成 command, order, tell 等动词，被
转述的部分改为动词不定式。否定祈使句要改为 not to do 结构。例如：
“Stay where you are,” she said.
她说：“待在原地。”
→ She told me to stay where I was.
她告诉我待在原地。
“Don’t smoke in the room,” he said.
他说：“别在房间里抽烟。”
→ He told me not to smoke in the room.
她让我别在房间里抽烟。
（2）祈使句表示请求时，常把直接引语的动词 say 变成 ask, beg, request, urge 等动词，
并去掉 please。例如：
She said to me, “Please wait till I return, will you?”
她说：“请你一直等到我回来，好吗？”
→ She begged me to wait till she returned.
105
她请求我一直要等到她回来。
（3）以 Let’s 开头的祈使句，通常将引述动词改为 suggest，然后再接 that 从句。例如：
John said to Bill, “Let’s go hiking tomorrow.”
约翰对比尔说，“我们明天去徒步旅行吧。 ”
→ John suggested to Bill that they (should) go hiking the next day.
约翰向比尔提议第二天去徒步旅行。
4）感叹句的间接引语
直接引语是感叹句，变成间接引语后，叫做间接感叹句。间接感叹句多采用宾语从句结
构，既可用 what 或 how 引导，也可用 that 引导，还可以根据句子表达的不同感情选用适当
的动词和状语来转换。例如：
He said, “What a beautiful view it is!”
他说：“多么漂亮的景色！”
→ He said that it was a very beautiful view.
他说景色非常漂亮。
→ He cried out what a beautiful view it was.
他大声说这景色是多么的漂亮。
She often says, “What a great country China is!”
她常说： “中国是一个多么伟大的国家啊！ ”
→ She often says that China is a very great country.
她常说中国是一个非常伟大的国家。
→ She often remarks with admiration (that) China is a great country.
她常常赞赏地说中国多么伟大。
5）并列句和复合句的间接引语
当转述的内容为并列句或复合句，或有两种以上的句子时，应根据不同的句式来选择不
同的引述动词和连接词。例如：
He said, “I told her to wait, but she went away.”
他说：“我告诉她等一下，但她还是走了。 ”
→ He said (that) he had told her to wait but that she went away.
他说他已经告诉她等一下，但她还是走了。
She said, “It is cold here. Is the window shut?”
她说：“这儿很冷。窗户关了吗？”
→ She said that it was cold there and asked if the window was shut.
她说那儿很冷，并问窗户是否关了。
Fenwick said to me, “Go and see Robin. He will tell you everything you want to know.”
106
芬威克对我说：“去看看罗宾吧，他会告诉你你想要知道的事情。”
→ Fenwick advised me to go and see Robin, and said that he would tell me everything I
wanted to know.
芬威克建议我去看看罗宾，因为他会告诉我我想要知道的事情。
2. 引语转换时的各种相应变化
直接引语转换成间接引语除了有句式的变化外，还要掌握动词时态、人称代词、指示代
词、时间状语、地点状语和词序的变化。
1）动词时态的变化
（1）如果引述动词为现在时态，间接引语的动词可以保持原来的时态。例如：
He says, “I have been writing a novel.”
他说：“我一直在写一本小说。”
→ He says that he has been writing a novel.
他说他一直在写一本小说。
（2）如果引述动词为过去时态，间接引语中的时间就要往后推，即现在时间推至过去时
间，过去时间推至过去的过去，将来时间推至过去将来时间。具体变化如表 14-1 所示。
表 14-1 引述动词为过去时态时动词时态的具体变化
直接引语时态间接引语时态
一般现在时一般过去时
现在进行时过去进行时
现在完成时过去完成时
现在完成进行时过去完成进行时
一般过去时过去完成时
过去完成时过去完成时
一般将来时过去将来时
将来进行时过去将来进行时
例如：
The teacher said, “You are doing OK.”
老师说： “你们干得很不错。 ”
→ The teacher said we were doing OK.
老师说我们干得很不错。（现在进行时变为过去进行时）
107
I asked her, “Where have you spent your holiday?”
我问她：“你去哪里度假了？”
→ I asked her where she had spent her holiday.
我问她去哪里度假了。（现在完成时变为过去完成时）
She said, “I went to Shanghai.”
她说：“我去过上海。”
→ She said that she had gone to Shanghai.
她说她去过上海。（一般过去时变为过去完成时）
He said, “I had finished my work before 10 o’clock.”
他说：“我在十点钟前就完成工作了。 ”
→ He said that he had finished his work before 10 o’clock.
他说他在十点钟前就完成工作了。（保持过去完成时不变）
The mayor said: “The people of Beijing will be preparing to light the Olympic torch to
welcome athletes and fans from all over the world.”
市长说： “北京人民将准备点燃奥运火炬来迎接来自全世界的运动员和运动迷。 ”
→ The mayor said that the people of Beijing would be preparing to light the Olympic torch to
welcome athletes and fans from all over the world.
市长说北京人民将准备点燃奥运火炬来迎接来自全世界的运动员和运动迷。（将来进行
时变为过去将来进行时）
需要注意的是，在以下几种情况下，直接引语变为间接引语时，时态一般不变化。
（1）直接引语是客观真理。例如：
“The earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth”, the teacher told me.
→ The teacher told me the earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth.
（2）直接引语是过去进行时，时态不变。例如：
Jack said, “John, where were you going when I met you in the street?”
→ Jack asked John where he was going when he met him in the street.
（3）直接引语中有具体的过去某年、某月、某日作状语，变为间接引语时，时态不变。
例如：
Xiao Wang said, “I was born on April 20, 1980.”
→ Xiao Wang said he was born on April 20, 1980.
（4）如果直接引语中的情态动词没有过去时的形式（如 ought to, had better, used to）和已
经是过去时的形式时（如 could, should, would, might），时态不再变。例如：
Peter said, “You had better come have today.”
→ Peter said I had better go there that day.
108
2）情态动词的变化
在直接引语中，有些情态动词没有过去式，转换为间接引语时仍用原来的形式，或用其
他表示法。直接引语变为间接引语时情态动词的变化如表 14-2 所示。
表 14-2 直接引语变为间接引语时情态动词的变化
直接引语间接引语
（推测）
must（必然） must
mustn’t（禁止） mustn’t
must（必须） had to/would have to
shall should
should should
will would
would would
may might
might might
can could
could could
dare dared
need need
ought to ought to
He said, “I really must go.”

他说：“我真的必须走了。”
→ He said that he really must go.
他说他真的必须走了。
“Must we hand in our exercise this afternoon?” he asked.
他问：“我们必须得今天下午交作业吗？”
→ He asked if they had to hand in the exercise that afternoon.
他问他们是否必须得那天下午要交作业。
“You need not take an umbrella with you,” he said.
他说：“你不用带雨伞。 ”
→ He said that I need not take an umbrella with me.
他说我不用带雨伞。
109
3）人称代词的变化
直接引语变为间接引语时人称代词的变化可以遵循如下顺口溜： “一随主，二随宾，第三
人称不更新。 ”
“一随主”是指在直接引语变间接引语时，如果从句中的主语是第一人称或被第一人称所
修饰，从句中的人称要按照主句中主语的人称变化。例如：
She said, “My brother wants to go with me.”
她说：“我哥哥想跟我一起去。”
→ She said her brother wanted to go with her.
她说她哥哥想跟她一起去。
“二随宾”是指直接引语变间接引语时，若从句中的主语及宾语是第二人称，或被第二人
称所修饰，从句中的人称要跟引号外的主句的宾语一致。如果引号外的主句没有宾语，也可
以用第一人称。例如：
He said to Kate，“How is your sister now?”
→ He asked Kate how her sister was then.
“第三人称不更新”是指直接引语变间接引语时，如果从句中的主语及宾语是第三人称或
被第三人称所修饰，从句中的人称一般不需要变化。例如：
Mr. Smith said, “Jack is a good worker.”
史密斯先生说：“杰克是名优秀的工人。”
→ Mr. Smith said Jack was a good worker.
史密斯先生说杰克是名优秀的工人。
4）指示代词的变化
在间接引语中，指示代词 this 转换成 that，these 转换成 those。例如：
He said, “Please show me this one.”
他说：“请拿这个给我看一下。”
→ He asked me to show him that one.
他要我拿那个给他看一下。
He said, “I’d like to see these sunglasses.”
他说：“我想看看这些太阳镜”
→ He said that he wanted to see those sunglasses.
他说他想看看那些太阳镜。
5）时间状语和地点状语的变化
根据转述的时间和地点不同，时间状语和地点状语存在着较多的变化，如表 14-3 所
示。
110
表 14-3 时间状语和地点状语的变化
直接引语间接引语
today that day
this morning/afternoon/evening that morning/afternoon/evening
yesterday the day before, the previous day
the previous morning/afternoon, etc.

yesterday morning/afternoon etc.
the morning before, the afternoon before
the day before yesterday two days before
tomorrow the next day, the following day
the day after tomorrow in two days’ time, two days after
the next week/month/year, etc.

next week/month/year, etc.
the following week/month/year, etc.
last night/month/year, etc. the previous night/month/year, etc.

the night before, the month before, etc.
two weeks/months/years ago the weeks before, two months before
now then
so far by then
in 1990 in 1990
here there
“We’ll leave here tomorrow,” he said.

他说：“我们明天离开这里。 ”
→ He said that they would leave there the next day.
他说他们将在第二天离开那里。
“I met him the day before yesterday,” she said.
她说：“我前天遇见过他。”
→ She said that she had met him two days before.
她说她前两天遇见过他。
6）词序的变化
直接引语为疑问句时，间接引语要把倒装词序变为正常词序。例如：
111
He asked, “How did these differences come about?”
他问：“这些不同之处是如何产生的？”
→ He asked how those differences had come about.
他问那些不同之处是如何产生的。
“What is adventure travel?” he asked.
他问：“冒险旅游是什么？”
→ He asked what adventure travel was.
他问什么是冒险旅游。
将直接引语变为间接引语，每空一词。
1. “I never eat meat.” he said.
He said that never meat.
2. “I have found my wallet.” he said to me.
He me that he wallet.
3. “I took it home with me.” she said.
She said that it home with her.
4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”
The teacher said that the sun in the east and down in the west.
5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.
He me that he met her the day .
6. “You must come here before five.” he said.
He said that I to go before five.
7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.
He said that he bought the house 10 years .
8. “Did you see her last week?” he said.
He I had seen her the week .
9. He said, “You can sit here, Jim.”
He Jim that he sit there
10. He asked, “How did you find it, mother?”
He asked her mother found it.
11. “Where have you been these days?” he asked.
He asked me been days.
112
12. “Do you know where she lives?” he asked.
He asked knew where she .
13. “Stop making so much noise, children.” he said.
He the children making so much noise.
14. “Don’t tell him the news.” she said.
She told me him the news.
15. “Are you interested in this?” he said.
He I was interested in .
Fun Time
让我们通过顺口溜来学习直接引语和间接引语的一些要点。
直接引语为祈使句，变成间接引语的“顺口溜”是：
去掉引号要加 to，
ask/tell 须记住，
直接引语是否定，
not 加在 to 前部。
直接引语为陈述句，变成间接引语的“顺口溜”是：
去掉引号加 that，
人称时态要灵活。
直接引语为特殊疑问句，变成间接引语的“顺口溜”是：
直接去引号，
陈述莫忘掉，
小心助动词，
丢它最重要。
直接引语为一般疑问句，变成间接引语的“顺口溜”是：
去掉引号加 whether/if，
陈述语序要记住，
时态人称和状语，
小心变化别马虎。
113
Self-evaluation
114
Unit 宾语从句
The Object
Clause
无论在汉语里面还是在英语里面，宾语都是句子里面动作的承受者，总是处于
可怜的被动地位，即使形状变成一个句子，也还是宾语从句，始终摆脱不了被动的
命运。可是虽然被动，地位却不容小觑。今天我们就来看看宾语从句是如何在英语
句子里面发挥功效的。
15.1 定义
在复合句中用作宾语的从句称为宾语从句。宾语从句的位置与陈述句基本结构中的宾语
相同。宾语从句可以用作谓语动词的宾语，也可以作介词和非限定动词（动词不定式、动名
词、分词）和某些形容词的宾语。
15.2 语序
无论主句是陈述句还是疑问句，宾语从句都必须使用陈述语序，即“主句+连词+宾语从句（主
语+谓语+……）
”句式。根据关联词在从句中所担任的不同成分，其语序可分为以下 4 种。
1. 关联词+谓语
关联词在从句中作主语。常见的连接词有 who，what，which 等。例如：
115
Could you tell me who wrote the letter, please？
你能告诉我谁写的这封信吗？
The little girl don’t know what is in her schoolbag.
这个小女孩不知道书包里有什么东西。
2. 关联词+名词+谓语
关联词在从句中作主语的定语。常见的连接词有 whose, what, which, how many, how much
等。例如：
He asked whose handwriting was the best in our class.
他问我们班上谁的书法最好。
The teacher asked us how many people there were in the room.
老师问我们房间里有多少人。
3. 关联词+主语+谓语
关联词在从句中作宾语、状语或表语。常见的连接词有 who（m），what, which, how many,
how much, when, why, how, where, if/whether（在句中不充当任何成分）等。例如：
He hasn’t decided if he’ll go on a trip to Shanghai.
他还没决定是否去上海旅行。
Could you tell me where I should go with the money?
你能告诉我拿着这钱去哪儿吗？
4. 关联词+名词+主语+谓语
关联词在从句中作宾语或表语的定语。常见的连接词有 what, which, how many, how much,
how 等。例如：
Do you know which class he is in?
你知道他在哪个班吗？
She asked me if I knew whose book it was.
她问我是否知道这是谁的书。
15.3 关联词
（1）当由陈述句充当宾语从句时，用 that 引导，that 无词义，在口语或非正式文体中常

省略。例如：
He said that he could drive to Beijing by himself.
他说他会自己开车去北京。
116
（2）当由一般疑问句充当宾语从句时，用 if 或 whether 引导，意为“是否”。例如：
I don’t know if/whether he will marry Lucy.
我不知道他是否会和露西结婚。
但在下列情况下只能用 whether。
① 在具有选择意义，又有 or 或 or not 时，尤其是直接与 or not 连用时，往往用 whether
（if … or not 也可以使用）。例如：
Let me know whether/if he will come or not.（=Let me know whether or not he will come.）
让我知道他是否能来。
I don’t know whether/if he does any shopping or not.（=I don’t know whether or not he does
any shopping.）
我不知道他去不去购物。
I wonder whether we stay or whether we go.
我不知道我们是去还是留。
② 在介词之后用 whether。例如：
I’m interested in whether he likes history.
我关心的是他是否喜欢历史。
We’re thinking about whether we can finish the work on time.
我们正在考虑是否能按时完成这项工作。
I worry about whether I hurt her feelings.
我担心是否伤了她的感情。
③ 在不定式前用 whether。例如；
He hasn’t decided whether to visit the old man.
他尚未决定是否去拜访那位老人。
I don’t know whether to go.
我不知去否。
He hasn’t decided whether to go by bus or by train.
他还未决定是乘公共汽车去还是坐火车去。
④ whether 置于句首时，不能换为 if。例如：
Whether this is true or not, I can’t say.
这是否是真的我说不上来。
⑤ 引导主语从句和表语从句时宜用 whether。例如：
Whether she will come or not is still a question.
她是否能来还是个问题。
The question is whether we can catch the bus.
问题是我们能否赶上公共汽车。
117
⑥ 若用 if 会引起歧义时，则用 whether。例如：
Please let me know if you like the book.
这句话可理解为：
a. Please let me know whether you like the book.
请告诉我你是否喜欢这本书。
b. If you like the book, please let me know.
你如果喜欢这本书，请告诉我。
（3）如果宾语从句原来是特殊疑问句，只需用原来的特殊疑问词引导。例如：
Could you tell me why you were late for the meeting this morning?
你能告诉我今天早上你为什么开会迟到吗？
Lyrics & Analysis（此处有视频学习资料）

Sing: When the thorn bush turns white, that’s when I’ll come home
I am going out to see what I can sow（what I can sow 作 see 的宾语从句，在句中
充当宾语。）
And I don’t know where I’ll go（where I’ll go 作 know 的宾语从句，在句中充当宾
语。）
And I don’t know what I’ll see（what I’ll see 作 know 的宾语从句，在句中充当宾
语。）
15.4 时态
含宾语从句的复合句，主、从句谓语动词的时态呼应应包括以下 3 点内容。
（1）如果主句的谓语动词是一般现在时，从句的谓语动词可根据需要选用相应的任何时
态。例如：
I don’t know when he will come back.
我不知道他将何时回来。
He tells me that his sister came back yesterday.
他告诉我他姐姐昨天回来了。
（2）如果主句的谓语动词是过去时，宾语从句的谓语动词只可根据需要选用过去时态，
即一般过去时、过去进行时、过去将来时或过去完成时的某一种形式。例如：
The children didn’t know who he was.
118
孩子们不知道他是谁。
He asked his father how it happened.
他问他父亲这件事是如何发生的。
（3）如果宾语从句所表示的是客观事实、普遍真理、自然现象或习惯性动作等，不管主
句用什么时态，从句时态都用一般现在时。例如：
The teacher said that the earth goes round the sun.
老师说地球绕着太阳转。
注意：if 和 when 既可以引导宾语从句，也可以引导状语从句，应注意它们在两种从句中
意思和用法的不同。if 和 when 引导宾语从句时，分别意为“是否”和“何时” ，
其时态应和主句时态相呼应；if 和 when 引导状语从句时，意思分别为“如果，假
如”和“当……时候” ，当主句时态是一般将来时时，其时态用一般现在时。if 和
when 常常被放在含有状语从句和宾语从句的题干中进行综合考查。例如：
Do you know when he will come back tomorrow?
你知道他明天什么时候回来吗？
Sorry, I don’t know. When he comes back, I’ll tell you.
对不起，不知道。当他回来时，我会告诉你。
I don’t know if he will come.
我不知道他是否会来。
He will come if it doesn’t rain.
如果不下雨，他会来的。
I. 选择题。
1. The girls asked if they some food and drink with them.
A. took B. take C. takes D. will take
2. Catherine said that she to Guangzhou.
A. has never gone B. had never gone C. has never been D. had never been
3. The students want to know whether they dictation today.
A. had B. has C. will have D. are
4. She asked Linda if go and get some.
A. could she B. she could C. she can D. she may
5. Linda said the moon round the earth.
A. traveled B. has traveled C. travels D. had traveled
119
II. 选择题。
1. Can you tell me you were born, Jessica?
A. who B. what C. when D. that
2. I don’t know they have been to Chongqing last week.
A. what B. if C. when D. where
3. I hardly understand. he has told me.
A. that B. what C. which D. who
4. She didn’t know back soon.
A. whether he would be B. if would he be
C. he will be D. he is going to
5. I don’t know he still lives here after so many years.
A. whether B. where C. what D. when
6. Do you know they listened to yesterday evening
A. what B. when C. why D. how
7. He asked me told me the accident.
A. whom B. which C. who D. whose
Fun Time（此处有音频学习资料）
Full Moon
When the full moons turns white, that’s when I’ll come home
I am going out to see what I can sow
And I don’t know where I’ll go
And I don’t know what I’ll see
But I’ll try not to bring it back home with me
Like the morning sun your eyes will follow me
As you watch me wander, curse the powers that be
Cause all I want is here and now but its already been and gone
Our intentions always last that bit too long
Far far away, no voices sounding

No one around me and you’re still there
Far far away, no choices passing
120
No time confounds me and you’re still there
In the full moons light I listen to the stream
And in between the silence hear you calling me
But I don’t know where I am and I don’t trust who I’ve been
And if I come home how will I ever leave
Self-evaluation
121
Unit 时间状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Time
亲爱的同学们，时间状语从句是英语中使用非常广泛的语法项目，也是英语四、
六级考试中的高频语法项目。因此，理解和掌握时间状语从句是英语学习中必不可
少的。
16.1 状语从句的基本概念和类型
1. 状语从句的基本概念
在句中作状语的从句叫做状语从句，一般由从属连词来引导，它相当于副词或副词短语，
可以用来修饰动词、定语或状语，或者整个句子。例如：
By the time I got home, she had already gone to bed.
我到家时她已经睡觉了。
I have learned many things since I left my hometown.
自从我离开家后，我学到了很多东西。
Providing/provided that you give me a hand, I will finish that more quickly.
假如你能帮我，我会完成得更快。
It is so hot that we can not keep on the work.
天气这么热，以至于我们不能坚持工作。
122
2. 状语从句的基本类型
状语从句根据连接词或连接短语的意义，可以分为时间状语从句、地点状语从句、条件
状语从句、方式状语从句、让步状语从句、原因状语从句、结果状语从句、目的状语从句、
伴随状语从句、对比状语从句等。
16.2 时间状语从句的基本用法
在复合句中，由时间连接词引导的状语从句叫做时间状语从句。引导时间状语从句的连
接词有 when, as, while, since, whenever, before, after, till, until, once, as soon as, the moment,
immediately, no sooner … than, hardly (scarcely) … when, the instant, instantly, the minute,
directly, each time, the second，等等。例如：
As soon as I reach Canada, I will ring you up.
我一到加拿大，就给你来电话。
When you think you know nothing, then you begin to know something.
当你以为自己一无所知的时候，你就开始知道一些事物了。
1. 表示某个时刻或某段时间（when, as, while, by the time, in the very times when,

whenever, the + 表示一段时间的词或短语）
1）when
（1）when 引导时间状语从句时表示“当……的时候” ，when 既可以指时间段，也可以指
时间点。从句中的谓语动词既可以是延续性动词，也可以是非延续性动词；从句的动作可以
和主句的动作同时发生，也可以先于主句的动作发生，此时相当于 after；当 when 引导的时
间状语从句的谓语动词是延续性动词时，有时可与 while 互换。例如：
I often missed my home a lot when I was abroad.（可与 while 互换）
我在国外时，常常很想家。
When I came home, my wife was cooking dinner.（不能用 while）
我回家时，妻子正在做晚饭。
When the film ended, people rushed out of the hall.（相当于 after）
电影结束后，人们冲出了播放大厅。
（2）when 引导的时间状语从句置于主句后面，同时从句中谓语动词又是短暂性动词时，
常表示“此时突然……”。例如：
My mind and car were in auto pilot, ready to go when suddenly my trance was broken by an
unforgettable sight.
我的心仿佛和汽车一样都挂在自动挡，随时准备开动，突然一幕令人难忘的情景让我从
123
神思恍惚中惊醒。
（3）如果 when 引导的时间状语从句的主语与主句的主语相同，而从句的谓语又是 be 动
词时，那么从句中的主语和 be 可以省略。例如：
When (you are) in trouble, ask her for help.
当你遭遇麻烦的时候去向她求助。
（4）当 when 引导的时间状语从句的主语与主句的主语相同时，往往还可以用“when+
分词”的形式替代该状语从句。例如：
When I came into the room, I found him lying there asleep.
When coming into the room, I found him lying there asleep.
当我进入房间的时候，我发现他躺在那儿睡着了。
2）while
while 引导时间状语从句时表示“当……的时候”，它强调主句的动作与从句的动作同时、
持续地进行。用于这一用法时，while 引导的时间状语从句和主句中的谓语动词必须是延续性
动词，或者主句的动作发生在从句动作的进行过程中，主句中的谓语动词通常是非延续性动
词。例如：
Study while you study; play while you play.
该学习的时候就学习，该玩的时候就玩。
I met her while I was at school.
当我在学校的时候我遇见了她。
3）as
（1）as 常可与 when, while 通用，译作“当……的时候” 。例如：
As I watched from the front line of traffic, I saw a miracle unfold before my eyes.
当我从停车线前方看时，一幕奇迹展现在我眼前。
（2）as 表示主句和从句的动作同时发生，常译作“一边……一边” 。例如：
He sang happily as he walked along the path.
他沿着那条路一边走一边哼着小曲。
（3）as 常用来说明两种正在发展和变化的情况，此时常译作“随着……”。例如：
As families move away from their stable community, their friends of many years, their
extended family relationships and the informal flow of information are cut off.
随着家庭从稳定的社区搬迁，他们多年的朋友、他们各家的亲属关系和非正规的信息渠
道都被切断了。
4）the + 表示一段时间的词或短语
The four years I was at university, I was very happy.
124
大学的四年，我非常快乐。
The while I was reading, they were eating melon seeds, watching TV and chatting.
在我读书的时候他们在吃瓜子、看电视、闲聊。
2. 表示频度（as often as, each time, every time, whenever, no matter when, any time）
例如：
The line was engaged as often as I tried to phone him.
每次我给他打电话都占线。
Each time I spelt the word, I made the same mistake.
我每次拼写这个词，总是犯同样的错误。
Whenever (Any time, No matter when) they are free, they play football.
不论什么时候有时间，他们都去踢足球。
3. 表示“立即” 、 “一……就……” ［once, as soon as (directly, immediately, the moment, the

instant), scarcely (hardly, not, barely, only just) … when …, no sooner … than …］
例如：
Once you understood this question, you would understand that one.
一旦你理解了这个问题，你也就理解了那个问题。
I had hardly (scarcely, barely, only just) gone to bed when the doorbell rang.
我刚要上床睡觉，门铃就响了。
As soon as he saw the policeman, he ran away.
Hardly had he seen the policeman when he ran away.
No sooner had he seen the policeman than he ran away.
He ran away immediately/directly/instantly he saw the policeman.
He ran away the moment/the minute/the instant he saw the policeman.
他一看见警察就跑了。
4. 表示“在……之前，在……之后”（before, after）
（1）before 引导时间状语从句时表示主句的动作发生在从句动作之前，after 引导时间状
语从句时表示主句的动作发生在从句动作之后。例如：
See me before you leave.
在你离开之前来见我。
I found his pen after he has left.
在他走后，我找到了他的笔。
（2）before 有时可译为“还没……就……” 。例如：
He had measured me before I could say a word.
125
我还没来得及说话他就给我量好了尺寸。
I slipped out before the lecture started.
还没等讲座开始我就溜了出去。
（3）before 可用于 it 结构，其结构通常是“It will be + some time + before sb. does sth.”或
“It was + some time + before sb. did sth.” ，可表示将来或过去两个概念，常译作“……才……” 。
例如：
He is leaving for Australia and it will be three years before he comes back.
他要去澳大利亚了，三年后才会回来。
During the war he joined the army and it was ten years before he came back.
战争期间他参了军，十年后才回来。
5. 表示“直到”（till, until）
（1）在肯定句中，主句谓语动词为延续性动词时，意为“一直到”，表示主句动作一直延
续到 until/till 从句表示的时间才终止；在否定句中，主句谓语动词为非延续性动词时，意思
是“一直到……才……”，表示主句动作到 until/till 从句表示的时间才开始。例如：
He worked until/till it was dark.
他工作一直到天黑。
He didn’t work until/till it was dark.
他一直到天黑才工作。
（2）until 和 till 意义相同，意思都是“直到……”，用法也相近，通常可换用，但在强调
结构、倒装句或句首，一般用 until。例如：
I didn’t know about it until/till he told me.
It was not until he told me that I knew about it.
Not until he told me did I know about it.
直到他告诉我，我才知道这件事。
Task 1
选择题。
1. Mother was worried because little Alice was ill, especially Father was away in
France.
A. as B. that C. during D. if
2. It seemed only seconds the boy finished washing his face.
A. when B. before C. after D. even if
3. Hardly had he reached the school gate the bell rang.
126
A. while B. when C. as D. as soon as
4. you begin, I think you must continue.
A. When B. Whenever C. Once D. Even if
5. I recognized you I saw you at the airport.
A. the moment B. while C. after D. once
6. Not until I began to work how much time I had wasted.
A. didn’t I realize B. did I realize C. I didn’t realize D. I realized
7. the classroom, we at once perceived him to be a man of taste.
A. As going into B. On going into C. While going into D. After going into
8. The new secretary is supposed to report to the manager as soon as she .
A. will arrive B. arrives C. is arriving D. is going to arrive
9. It was a long time I went to sleep again.
A. when B. while C. before D. until
10. Remember to send me a photo of your son next time you to me.
A. write B. will write C. are writing D. would write
16.3 时间状语从句的相当物
（1）相当于时间状语的名词词组。名词词组 each time, every time, the first time, the last
time, the instant, the instance, the moment, the minute 可以引导时间状语从句。例如：
The next time we met him, he was singing a nice song.
第二次见到他时，他正在唱一首动听的歌。
The bride and bridegroom quarrelled the instant the wedding ended.
婚礼一结束，新娘和新郎便吵了起来。
（2）相当于时间状语的形容词及形容词短语。例如：
Glad, I play the guitar.
When I am glad, I play the guitar.
我高兴时就弹吉他。
Hungry, you only have to point at your stomach and they will lead you to the restaurant; tired,
you put both your hands behind your head and they will take you to the hotel.
When you are hungry, you only have to point at your stomach and they will lead you to the
restaurant; when you are tired, you put both your hands behind your head and they will take
you to the hotel.
当你饿了的时候，你只需要指指你的胃，他们就会带你去饭馆；当你感到累了，你就把
你的手放在你的头后面，他们就会带你去宾馆。
127
（3）相当于时间状语从句的分词短语。例如：
Asked what had happened, he lowered his head.
When he was asked what had happened, he lowered his head.
当他被问及发生了什么事的时候，他低下了头。
Having graduated from Stanford with a degree in biochemistry, I started to study law at the
Northeastern University.
After I had graduated from Stanford with a degree in biochemistry, I started to study law at the
Northeastern University.
从斯坦福大学毕业拿到生物化学学位后，我开始在东北大学学习法律。
（4）相当于时间状语从句的介词短语。例如：
in doing something = when/while doing something
In attempting to save the child from drowning, she nearly lost her own life.
When/while attempting to save the child from drowning, she nearly lost her own life.
她在抢救落水儿童的时候，自己差点儿丧命。
on doing something = as soon as
On arriving home I discovered they had gone.
As soon as I arrived home, I discovered they had gone.
我一到家就发现他们已经离开了。
（5）其他形式。例如：
I went to school after taking my breakfast.
我吃过早餐后就去上学。
I lost my passport and a lot of money during my visit in Canada.
我在加拿大参观的时候丢掉了护照和许多钱。
Task 2
用时间状语从句的相当物来补全下列句子。
1. It is .
这是我第一次和妈妈说谎。
2. , I sing the song.
高兴时，我就唱这首歌。
3. , they all jumped with joy.
听到这个消息，他们都高兴得跳了起来。
4. , he handed it in.
他一完成作业，就交了上去。
128
5. , I started to study
law at China University of Political Science and Law.
我毕业于北京交通大学英语专业，然后在中国政法大学学习法律。
16.4 时间状语从句的翻译
（1）译成条件句，例如：
Turn off the switch when anything goes wrong with the machine.
如果机器发生故障，就关闭开关。
（2）译成并列结构，例如：
She sang as she prepared the experiment.
她一边唱着歌，一边准备实验。
（3）译成“一……就……” ，例如：
He had scarcely handed me the letter when he asked me to read it.
他把信一交给我，就叫我念给他听。
Task 3
1. A body at rest will not move till a force is exerted on it.
2. They set him free when his ransom had not yet been paid.
3. While she spoke, the tears were running down.
4. Please turn off the light when you leave the room.
5. I was about to speak, when Mr. Smith cut in.
I. 用适当的连词填空。
1. We’ll go to the country at the beginning of June the summer harvest will start.
2. He learned to speak German he was in Berlin.
129
3. I listen to the recorder I have time.
4. He had learned Chinese he came to China.
5. the work was done, we sat down to sum up experience.
6. I haven’t seen him he moved to the other side of the town.
7. I waited he came back.
8. It was not he took off his eyeglasses that I recognized him.
9. The thieves ran away they caught sight of the police.
10. she grew older, she became more responsible.
II. 选择题。
1. We had hardly got to the station it began to rain.
A. until B. since C. while D. when
2. I usually watch TV in the evening I have to study for an examination.
A. because B. unless C. while D. the moment
3. They waited it was dark before leaving, they didn’t want anyone to see
them leave.
A. since; because B. until; as C. unless; for D. so; because
4. I often visited Tian’an Men Square I was staying in Beijing.
A. until B. during C. while D. throughout
5. I saw the computer, I showed great interest in it.
A. At first B. For the first time C. Until D. The first time
6. It is ten years I left home.
A. when B. after C. since D. as
7. Not until all the fish died in the river how serious the pollution was.
A. did the villagers realize B. the villagers realized
C. the villagers did realize D. didn’t the villagers realize
8. As she the newspaper, Granny asleep.
A. read; was falling B. was reading; fell
C. was reading; was falling D. read; fell
9. Why do you want a new job you have got such a good one already?
A. that B. where C. which D. when
10. Few people paid full attention to their health conditions they were seriously ill.
A. when B. if C. until D. before
11. Glass-making was practiced thousands of years ago by Egyptians though it was many
centuries men discovered how to make glass transparent.
130
A. when B. after C. before D. since
12. to speak when the audience interrupted him.
A. Hardly had he begun B. No sooner had he begun
C. Not until he began D. Scarcely did he begin
13. A man escaped from the prison last week. It was a long time the guards discovered
what had happened.
A. before B. until C. since D. then
14. I had just started back for the room to change my box I overheard voices.
A. as B. while C. after D. when
15. We had sooner go out than I heard a sharp cry.
A. not B. no C. though D. yet
Fun Time
“not say uncle”
“not say uncle”起源于儿童游戏。据说，孩子们打闹时，占上风的一方把另一方骑在

身子底下，让被压在下面的孩子管他叫 uncle，如果他不叫 uncle，就会面临一顿暴打。如
果他叫 uncle，这就意味着他“认输”了。所以， “not say uncle”常用来指“不认输”
。例如：
I don’t know when he has ever said uncle to anyone.
我还真不知道他什么时候向人认输过。
Self-evaluation
131
Unit 地点状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Place
俗话说做事情要占“天时地利” ，可见做事地点的重要性，今天就让我们占据有利
地点，向成功迈进。OK, let’s go!
17.1 地点状语从句的基本用法
地点状语从句表示地点、方位，一般由 where, wherever, everywhere, anywhere, no matter

where 引导。
1. where 引导的地点状语从句
例如：
Put the book where you got it.
把书放到你拿书的地方。
Where there is a will, there is a way.
有志者，事竟成。
Where there is water, there is life.
有水的地方，就有生命。
132
2. wherever 引导的地点状语从句
例如：
Wherever there is smoke, there is fire.
无风不起浪。
You can go wherever you want to go.
你想去哪儿，就可以去哪儿。
We can’t camp wherever we like these days.
如今我们可不能随便在哪儿宿营。
3. everywhere 引导的地点状语从句
例如：
Everywhere he went, he was kindly received.
他所到之处，都受到热情招待。
The little boy follows his mother everywhere she goes.
无论妈妈走到哪儿，小男孩都跟着。
4. anywhere 引导的地点状语从句
例如：
Now that they are having a holiday, they can go anywhere they like.
既然他们在度假，他们可以去他们喜欢的任何地方。
You can go anywhere you want.
你想去哪儿去哪儿吧。
5. no matter where 引导的地点状语从句

例如：
No matter where he goes, he helps the poor.
无论他走到哪儿，他都帮助穷人。
No matter where you go, the grass is always green.
无论你去哪儿，草总是绿的。

M: You sing terribly as my sister (does).（as 引导方式状语从句。）And you like singing
more than she does.（more than 引导比较状语从句。）
133
W: I won’t stop singing unless I sing this song well.（unless 引导条件状语从句。）
M: Then I will go out in order that I don’t disturb you.（in order that 引导目的状语从句。）
Before it gets dark, I’ll come back.（before 引导时间状语从句。）
W: Stay where you are.（where 引导地点状语从句。）
M: Why?
W: Because I need a listener, you can’t leave now.（because 引导原因状语从句。）
M: I don’t need a singer now.
W: I shut the door so heavily that it fell on my head.（so that 引导结果状语从句。）I have
to stop singing now.
17.2 运用地点状语从句应注意的事项
（1）where 引导的地点状语从句与 where 引导的定语从句的区别：主要区别在于分句在

句中作什么成分——作状语，则是状语从句；作定语修饰名词，则是定语从句。where 引导
定语从句时，从句前应有一个表示地点的名词作先行词，而状语从句前则无需先行词。例如：
Where there is a will, there is a way.（where 引导地点状语从句）
Go back where you came from.（where 引导地点状语从句）
你从何处来就到何处去。
Go back to the village where you came from.（where 引导定语从句）
回到你来的那个村子里去。
（2）wherever 引导地点强调“在……地方”，引导让步强调“无论在哪里” 。例如：
I can find him wherever he goes.（wherever 引导让步状语从句）
无论他去哪儿，我都能找到他。
You can put the book wherever you like.（wherever 引导地点状语从句）
你爱把书放哪儿就放哪儿吧。
I. 选择题。
1. The expert advised me to live the air is fresher.
A. in where B. in which C. the place where D. where
134
2. They are expected to send help there is human suffering.
A. whoever B. however C. whatever D. wherever
3. When traveling the customs are really foreign to our own, we should do as the
Romans do.
A. in which B. what C. when D. where
4. When he reads the book, he makes a mark he has any questions.
A. at which B. at where C. the place where D. where
5. After the disaster, a new hospital was put up there had once been a theatre.
6. They make it a rule to leave things they can find them again.
A. when B. where C. then D. there
7. She found her computer she lost it.
A. where B. when C. in which D. that
8. They will work they are needed.
A. whenever B. because C. since D. wherever
9. you go, you shouldn’t forget your people.
A. Whenever B. However C. Wherever D. Whichever
10. They’ve got themselves into a dangerous situation they are likely to lose control
over the ship.
A. where B. which C. while D. why
11. He is sure he’ll meet a kind-hearted man he goes.
A. where B. to the place where
C. wherever D. the place
12. Will you go our people need you most after graduation?
A. that B. where C. in which D. to the place which
13. you go, you should bear learning new knowledge in your mind.
A. Where B. Wherever C. Whatever D. However
14. Poor it may be, there is no place like home, you may go.
A. as; wherever B. though; whenever C. in spite of; when D. that; wherever
1. 留得青山在，不怕没柴烧。
2. 有爱，就有希望。
135
3. 哪里有真爱，哪里就有奇迹。
4. 有志者，事竟成。
5. 哪个方案能给予肯定的答案，我们就推进哪个方案。
Yesterday Once More

昨日重现
When I was young 当我还年轻的时候
I’d listen to the radio 就喜欢收听电台广播
Waiting for my favorite songs 等待我最喜爱的歌
When they played I’d sing along 当他们演奏时我会跟着唱
It made me smile 令我笑容满面
Those were such happy times 那段多么快乐的时光
And not so long ago 并不遥远
How I wondered where they’d gone 我是多么想知道它们去了哪儿
But they’re back again 但是它们又回来了
Just like a long lost friend 像一位久未谋面的朋友
All the songs I loved so well 那些歌我依旧喜欢
Every Sha-la-la-la 每一声 Sha-la-la-la
Every Wo-o-wo-o 每一声 Wo-o-wo-o
Still shines 仍然闪亮
Every shing-a-ling-a-ling 每一声 shing-a-ling-a-ling
That they’re starting to sing 当他们开始唱时
So fine 如此欢畅
When they get to the part 当他们唱到
Where he’s breaking her heart 他让她伤心的那一段时
It can really make me cry 我真的哭了
Just like before 一如往昔
136
It’s yesterday once more 这是昨日的重现
(Shoobie do lang lang) （无比惆怅）
(Shoobie do lang lang) （无比惆怅）
Looking back on how it was in years gone by 回首过去的那些时光
And the good times that I had 我曾有过的欢乐时光
Makes today seem rather sad 今天似乎更加悲伤
So much has changed 一切都变了
It was songs of love that I would sing to them 这就是那些跟着唱过的旧情歌
And I memorize each word 我会记住每个字眼
Those old melodies 那些古老的旋律
Still sound so good to me 对我仍然那么地动听
As they melt the years away 可以把岁月融化
Still shines 依然闪亮
Every shing-a-ling-a-ling 每一个 shing-a-ling-a-ling
All my best memories 我所有的美好回忆
Come back clearly to me 清晰地浮现在眼前
Some can even make me cry 有些甚至让我泪流满面
Just like before 一如往昔
It’s yesterday once more 这是昨日的重现
137
Self-evaluation
138
Unit 条件状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of
Condition
亲爱的同学们，条件状语从句是大学英语四、六级考试中考得非常多的语法项目，
所以理解和掌握条件状语从句至关重要。条件状语从句分为真实条件句和非真实条件
句，非真实条件句将在虚拟语气中讲解，在这里我们主要讲解真实条件句。
18.1 条件状语从句的基本用法
引导条件状语从句的连接词有 if, unless, as long as, so long as, providing that, provided that,
suppose that, supposing that, in case, only if, if only, on the condition that 等。
1. if
引导条件状语从句最常用的连词是 if，由 if 引导的条件状语从句表示在某种条件下某事
很可能发生。例如：
If you fail in the exam, you will let him down.
如果你考试不及格，你会让他失望的。
if 从句还表示不可实现的条件或根本不可能存在的条件，也就是一种虚拟的条件或假设。
例如：
If I were you, I would certainly have not done such a silly thing.
139
如果我是你，我肯定不会做那样的蠢事。
2. unless
unless 为连词，意为“除非” 、“若不” 、“除非在……的时候” 。例如：
You will fail to arrive there in time unless you start earlier.
如果你不早点动身，你就不能及时赶到那儿。
Unless you give up that bad habit, I will not marry you.
除非你放弃坏习惯，否则我不跟你结婚。
3. on condition that
on condition (that) ... 意为“在……条件下”，on condition (that) ...引导的条件从句是主句
事件发生的前提条件或唯一条件。例如：
I can tell you the truth on condition that you promise to keep a secret.
我可以告诉你真相，条件是你答应保守秘密。
You can go swimming on condition (that) you don’t go too far from the river bank.
你只有在不远离河岸的条件下才可以下水游泳。
4. suppose/supposing that
suppose/supposing 为连词，意为“如果”、 “假如” ，supposing 引导的条件从句表示一种
假设条件。例如：
Suppose/Supposing it rains, shall we continue the sports meeting?
倘若下雨，我们的运动会还要继续举行吗?
Suppose/Supposing anything should go wrong, what would you do then?
假如出了什么问题，你准备怎么对付?
5. providing/provided that
provided 为连词，意为“假如”、 “除非” 、“以……为条件” ，“provided (that) +从句”表
示一种假设条件。例如：
He will sign the contract provided we offer more favorable terms.
如果我们提出更优惠的条件，他就会在合同上签字。
He won’t be against us in the meeting provided that we ask for his advice in advance.
如果我们提前征求一下他的意见，他就不会在会上反对我们。
6. as/so long as
as long as 和 so long as 均可用于引导条件状语从句，表示“如果”、“只要”。例如：
140
So long as you are happy, it doesn’t matter what you do.
只要你高兴，你做什么都没关系。
You may borrow my book as long as you keep it clean.
只要你保持书的清洁，你就可以把我的书借去。
7. “only if” 和 “if only”

only if 和 if only 不仅仅是词序的颠倒，意义也有很大的不同。
（1）only if 引导的从句用陈述语气，意为“只要……”。例如：
Only if we keep up with it, we will necessarily be successful.
只要我们坚持，我们必然会成功。
（2）if only 引导的从句要用虚拟语气，可以不要主句，意为“但愿……”、“要是……就
好了”。例如：
If only I had understood that question, I would not have asked you.
要是我理解了那个问题，我就不问你了。
Task 1
补全下列句子。
1. ________________________________，no one feels like exercising.
除非睡眠充足，否则谁也不想锻炼。
2. ________________________________，what shall we do?
如果下雨怎么办？
3. ________________________________，please remind me about it.
如果我忘了，请提醒我一下。
4. She did’t mind anything ________________________________.
只要能和吉米在一起她什么也不在意。
5. I’ll come _______________________________.
我可以来，条件是也要邀请艾米。
18.2 条件状语从句的相当物
（1）相当于条件状语从句的介词短语。例如：
She is able to protect herself in the event of being attacked.
她能在受攻击的时候保护自己。
There will be no living things without water.
141
没有水就没有生物。
（2）相当于条件状语从句的不定式短语。例如：
To look at him, you would like him.
要是看到他，你就会喜欢他。
When you are a guest in a western home, it will make you feel more comfortable to know
something of foreign customs within the home.
当你在西方人家里作客的时候，如果你知道一些在外国人家中作客的习俗，你会感到更
舒适一些。
（3）相当于条件状语从句的分词结构。例如：
Grown in rich soil, these seeds can grow fast.
If these seeds are grown in rich soil, they can grow fast.
如果种在肥沃的土壤里，这些种子能长得很快。
Taking the path that leads out of the town, you will come to a dense wood.
If you take the path that leads out of the town, you will come to a dense wood.
如果你沿着通向郊外的小道前进，就会走到一片密林处。
（4）相当于条件状语从句的被动结构。英语中“主语+被动谓语+by 短语”结构的句子有
时还可以表示：如果发生了 by 后面的事情，就可能出现前面的情况。例如：
This heart’s desire of all the people could easily have been gained by steadfastness in righteous
convictions, and by reasonable.
各国人民的这种衷心热望，如果大家恪守正义的信念，根据常理来处理事情，本来是很
容易实现的。
Holding it in her hand, she had suddenly remembered that in the bottom of the box there was a
secret compartment which could be opened by sliding the thin wooden base outward.
她手中拿着木匣子，忽然想到匣子下边有一个秘密的夹层，只要把匣底的薄木板抽出，
就可以打开。
（5）相当于“祈使句+and/or+简单句”的结构。例如：
Take some hot water and you will feel more comfortable.
If you take some hot water, you will feel more comfortable.
如果你喝些热水，你就会感觉舒服些。
Turn the heat down or your cake will burn.
If you don’t turn the heat down, your cake will burn.
如果你不把温度调低，你的蛋糕会烤焦的。
Check your composition carefully and you will avoid some spelling mistakes.
If you check your composition carefully, you will avoid some spelling mistakes.
如果你仔细检查作文，你就会避免很多拼写方面的错误。
142
（6）相当于由 and 或 or 连接的并列分句。例如：
All you need to do is to dial 114 and a computerized voice will give you their phone number.
只要拔 114，电脑就会自动给你电话号码。
Attack next Monday or you will be replaced.
下星期一要是不出击，就撤你的职。
（7）相当于条件状语从句的主谓宾结构。在英语中，“主语+谓语+宾语”结构的句子可
表示：如果发生这个动作或出现这个状态就会产生后面的结果。例如：
The failure to observe the safety regulation brought an accident of the machine.
如果没有遵守安全规则，机器就出故障。
But the gradual opening of capital accounts must be accompanied by a further strengthening of
macroeconomic policies, the development of a system of risk management robust enough to
respond to the needs of a more flexible exchange rate and capital account.
如果资本项目逐步开放，必须进一步加强宏观经济政策，大力发展风险管理体制以应对
汇率和资本项目频繁波动的需要。
（8）相当于定语从句和一些其他的状语从句。例如：
A nation which stopped working would be dead in a fortnight.
一个国家要是停止运转，不出两周就灭亡了。
“Finally,” she said, “we knew that we could never find peace as long as we were filled with
hatred. So we came here to see.”
“最后， ”她说， “我们明白了，如果我们心里总是充满了怨恨，就永远也安宁不下来，所
以我们就到这里来看看。”
His whistling can be heard even farther away when conditions are favorable — when there is
little or no wind.
倘若条件好些——风力很小或根本没风的时候——他发出的哨声还能传得更远。
（9）相当于条件状语从句的其他表达法。例如：
Where there is a will, there is a way.
But for your help, we should not have finished in time.
要不是你帮忙，我们肯定不能及时完成任务。
He worked very hard, otherwise he might have failed.
他刻苦工作，不然他就失败了。
We could have done better under more favorable conditions.
假设有更有利的条件，我们还会做得更好。
注意：有时假设的情况并不以条件从句表示出来，而是通过一个介词短语来表示，或通
过上下文或其他方式表示出来，把条件隐含在句子当中。如以上句中的 but for, but
143
that …, in case of, otherwise, supposing, under more favourable condition, without 等
表示让步假设状语从句。
Task 2
用条件状语从句的相当物来补全下列句子。
1. , he will be fined.
如果不能及时归还这本书，他就要被罚款。
2. You must be very angry .
没能去那儿，你一定非常生气。
3. , we could do it better.
如果给我们更多的时间，我们可以做得更好。
4. _____________________, you must change at Leeds.
如果你往北走，你一定要在利兹市换乘。
5. _____________________, I’ll go there on foot.
如果时间允许，我会步行去那儿。
18.3 条件状语从句的翻译
（1）条件状语从句译成假设句。例如：
If something has the ability to adjust itself to the environment, we say it has intelligence.
如果某物具有适应环境的能力，我们就说它具有智力。
（2）条件状语从句译成补充句。例如：
We will set out tonight if you are ready.
如果你准备好，我们今晚就可以出发。
Task 3
1. Granted that this is true, what conclusion can you draw?
2. Anybody above the earth will fall unless it is supported by an upward force equal to its weight.
3. Should there be an urgent situation, press the red button to switch off the electricity.
144
4. Aluminum remained unknown until the 19th century, because nowhere in nature is it found free,
owing to its always being combined with elements, most commonly with oxygen, for which it
has a strong affinity.
5. The assertion that it was difficult, if not impossible, for a people to enjoy its basic rights unless it
was able to determine freely its political status and to ensure freely its economic, social and
cultural development was now scarcely contested.
Laughter
Patient: Doctor, I need a liver transplant, a heart transplant, a cornea transplant, a spleen
transplant, and a pancreas transplant.
病人：医生，我需要做肝脏移植、肾脏移植、心脏移植、角膜移植、脾脏移植和胰腺
移植。
Doctor: What makes you think you need all these?
医生：你为什么认为你需要做这么多移植手术？
Patient: My boss said if I wanted to keep my job I needed to get reorganized!
病人：我的老板说如果我这个人不重新组装的话，就别想保住我的工作！
I. 仿照例句改写下列句子。
Example: If you make one more effort, you will succeed.
Make one more effort and you will succeed.
1. If you try some of this juice, perhaps you’ll like it.
2. If you check your composition carefully, you will avoid some spelling mistakes.
3. If you take some hot water, you will feel more comfortable.
145
4. If you put the documents in a neat file, you will never waste a lot of time finding them.
5. If you do this, you will realize that this moment is all there is, more importantly, this moment is
all that you have to make a difference in life.
II. 选择题。
1. You will catch a cold put on more clothes.
A. if you B. if you will not C. unless you D. until you
2. If city noises from increasing, people shout to be heard even at the
dinner table in 20 years from now.
A. are not kept; will have to B. are not kept; have to
C. do not deep; will have to D. do not deep; have to
3. You will be late you leave immediately.
A. unless B. until C. if D. or
4. the English examination I would have gone to the concert last Saturday.
A. In spite of B. But for C. Because of D. As for
5. they invite you to speak, remain silent.
A. If B. Although C. Unless D. Even though
6. If you to the party, you’ll have a great time.
A. will go B. went C. go D. going
7. Provided that you with us, the leader would not criticise you.
A. work B. will work C. worked D. have worked
8. both sides accept the agreement a lasting peace be established in this
region.
A. only if, will B. if only, would C. should, will D. Unless, would.
9. You will be late you leave immediately.
A. unless B. until C. if D. or
10. I her the answer if she me.
A. can tell; will ask B. will tell; will ask
C. would tell; ask D. will tell; asks
11. there will be a charge in administration.
A. In she wins B. She wins
C. In the event she wins D. She wins the event
146
12. — What are you going to do tomorrow?
— We’ll go to the library tomorrow if it .
A. isn’t rain B. rain C. won’t rain D. doesn’t rain
13. If you to the party, you’ll have a great time.
A. will go B. went C. go D. going
14. It will be a long time Peter his work.
A. since, has finished B. after, finishes
C. when, will finish D. before, finishes.
15. I’ll give the book to him if he here next Sunday.
A. will come B. comes C. is coming D. came
500 Miles
五百英里
If you miss the train I am on 如果你错过了我乘的那班火车
You will know that I am gone 你会明白我已离开
You can hear the whistle blow a hundred miles 你会听到一百英里外飘来的汽笛声
A hundred miles 一百英里
Lord, I’m one 上帝，我离开家已经一百英里

Lord, I’m two 上帝，我离开家已经两百英里
Lord, I’m three 上帝，我离开家已经三百英里
Lord, I’m four 上帝，我离开家已经四百英里
Lord, I’m five hundred miles from my home 上帝，我离开家已经五百英里
Away from home 离开家
Lord, I’m five hundred miles away from home 上帝，我离开家已经五百英里
147
Not a shirt on my back 我衣不遮体
Not a penny to my name 我身无分文
Lord, I can’t go a-home this a-way 上帝，这条路不能让我回家

This a-way 这条路
Lord, I can’t go a-home this a-way 上帝，这条路不能让我回家
If you miss the train I’m on 如果你错过了我乘的那班火车

You will know that I am gone 你会明白我已离开
Self-evaluation
148
Unit 目的状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Purpose
亲爱的同学们，人们做任何事情都有一定的目的。俗话说理解万岁，为了让他人理
解我们的意图，我们无时无刻不在阐述自己的目的所在。生活中目的状语从句无处不在，
你会正确运用吗？今天就让我们走进目的状语从句，向目的进军。OK, let’s go!
19.1 目的状语从句的基本用法
目的状语从句是用以补充说明主句中谓语动词发生的目的的，不能单独成句。
引导目的状语从句常用的连词有 so that（以便），in order that（为了，以便），that（以便），
lest（免得，唯恐），for fear that（生怕，以免），in case（以免）。目的状语从句的谓语常含有
may, might, can, could, should, would 等情态动词。
19.2 so that, in order that 等引导的目的状语从句
so that, in order that 常与 may, might, can, could, should, would 等情态动词连用，引导目的
状语从句，多放在主句之后，但如果为了强调，也可以放在主句之前。例如：
I must speak louder so that/in order that I can be heard by all.
我必须大声说话，以便大家都能听到我说话。
Write clearly (so) that everyone can read it.
149
写清楚点儿，以便大家都能看。
She takes notes carefully in class so that/in order that she may use them when she reviews her
lessons after class.
她在课堂上认真记笔记，以便她能在课后很好地复习功课。
My father works hard in order that he may support us.
我父亲为了养家辛苦地工作。
He raised his hand in order that the taxi may stop.
他举起手以便使出租车停下来。

A: What are we going to do next?
B: Shopping.
A: Shopping? It seems you and I together can do nothing but shopping.（并列连词 and 是
把所连接的部分通过累加的方式连接在一起的连词。）
B: Neither you nor I like going shopping. （并列连词 neither … nor 的作用是将若干语法
相同的部分连接在一起，在其中选择一个。）
A: But why must you do things which you don’t like?（从属连词 which 引导定语从句。）
B: All my skirts are out of fashion. Therefore, I should go and buy a new one. Come on.
（连词 therefore 连接前后两个句子，表示因果、推理的意义；and 是并列连词。）
A: I wonder whether (if) this fits me.（从属连词 whether 引导的名词从句做动词的宾语
时，在不会引起歧义时可用 if 代替。）
B: Oh, that one which has red dots on it looks better. What do you think?
A: I really don’t know what you like. Why don’t you go inside and have a try?（从属连词
what 引导宾语从句，相当于 that which。）
A: Hi, can I talk to you for a few minutes?
C: Why?
A: My girlfriend will leave here if she finds me talking to a girl.（从属连词 if 引导条件状
语从句，类似的用法还有 unless, only if 等。）
C: Why do you want her to leave?
A: I want to leave here so that I don’t have to pay for the skirt.（从属连词 so that 引导目的
状语从句，类似的用法还有 in order that, in case 等。）
B: OK, there’s nothing good here. Let’s go.
150
19.3 lest, for fear that, in case 引导的目的状语从句
lest（免得，唯恐），for fear that（生怕，以免），in case（以免）引导的目的状语从句，

一般采用虚拟语气结构，其谓语部分用“should+动词原形”，should 可以省略。这三个短语
或词都相当于“in order that not”或“so that not” 。例如：
Tom is telling her that lest she (should) make a mistake.
汤姆告诉她这一点，以免她搞错。
The teacher emphasized it again and again, lest we (should) forget.
老师反复强调这一点，免得我们忘了。
He pushed open the door gently and went out of the room quietly for fear that he (should)
awake his wife.
为了不惊醒妻子，他轻轻地推开房门，悄悄地走了出去。
I hid the money for fear that he should see it.
我把钱藏了起来，以防被他看见。
Take your umbrella in case it rains.
带上雨伞，以防下雨。
Take a taxi in case you are late for the wonderful film.
坐出租车去，以免去看这部精彩的电影迟到了。
Task 1
挑错。
1. Mary sits in the front row in case she can hear better.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. He ran away quickly so that he could be seen.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. His parents sent him abroad for fear that he could learn English well.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. Bring a thick coat with you so that it should be very cold.
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. The city government is going to build another park in case the citizens can better entertain
themselves.
_____________________________________________________________________________
151
19.4 学习目的状语从句应注意的事项
（1）目的状语从句中常含有 can, could, may, might, should 等情态动词。例如：

I went there early so that I could get a good seat.
我去得很早，目的是坐到好的座位。
（2）引导目的状语从句的 so that 有时可以省略 so 或 that，即单独用 so 或 that 来引
导目的状语从句。例如：
The building will be repainted so it can be more beautiful.
要重新粉刷那座大楼，以使它更加漂亮。
Read more carefully, so any spelling mistake will be found.
要仔细阅读，以便检查出所有拼写错误。
Please speak more slowly that we can better understand you.
请说慢点儿，以使我们更好地理解你说的话。
（3）in order that 与 in order to 的意思相同，只不过表达方式各异。例如：
in order that+从句（目的状语从句）
in order to+动词原形（目的状语）
We work hard in order that we can learn more knowledge.
We work hard in order to learn more knowledge.
我们努力学习，以便学会更多的知识。
（4）lest（唯恐，以免，为不使）用在 fear, be afraid, be anxious 等之后。例如：
I am afraid lest I should fail my final exam.
我怕我期末考试会挂科。
They are anxious lest they’ve been cheated into buying the fake diamond ring.
他们怕被骗买了假钻戒。
19.5 so that 引导目的状语从句与引导结果状语从句的辨别
so that 引导的目的状语从句通常放在主句之前，也可放在主句之后，而 so that 引导的结

果状语从句只能放在主句之后。
（1）so that 引导状语从句时与情态动词 can, could, may, might 等连用；当从句里没有情态
动词，且谓语动词是一般现在时（过去时）、现在完成时等时态时，是结果状语从句。例如：
I sent him a thick coat so that he can survive the cold winter.
我寄给他一件厚外套，以使他度过严冬。（目的状语从句）
My students have been working very hard, so that they all have achieved good performance.
152
我的学生学习很努力，所以他们都取得了优良的成绩。（结果状语从句）
I have consulted him about the matter, so that I know what to do.
我就这件事情请教过他，所以我知道怎么做。（结果状语从句）
（2）当表达的含义是“为了”、 “以便”时，为目的状语从句；当表达的含义是“以至于” 、
“因此”时，为结果状语从句。例如：
Jenny does a part-time job at weekends so that she can be independent financially.
詹妮周末做兼职工作，以便能够在经济上独立。（目的状语从句）
Jenny does a part-time job at weekends, so that she is independent financially.
詹妮周末做兼职工作，因此能够在经济上独立。（结果状语从句）
It was terribly hot yesterday morning, so that we had to stay at home.
昨天上午非常热，因此我们只好待在家里。（结果状语从句）
（3）so that 引导目的状语从句无需用逗号跟主语隔开，反之是结果状语从句。例如：
I do much English reading and listening so that I can learn English well.
我做大量阅读和听力，以便学好英语。
I do much English reading and listening, so that I’m good at English.
我做了大量阅读和听力，所以很擅长英语。
（4）当从句之前的 so that 可用 in order that 代替时，是目的状语从句；反之，是结果状语
从句。例如：
I followed immediately at her heels so that I could tell her the news in time.
（=I followed immediately at her heels in order that I could tell her the news in time.）
我紧随其后，以便能及时告诉她那个消息。（目的状语从句）
I followed immediately at her heels, so that I told her the news in time.
我紧随其后，所以及时告诉了她那个消息。（结果状语从句）
Task 2
用 so (that) 合并下列句子。
1. Yesterday morning I got up at five. I wanted to run in the park.
2. I turned on the TV. I wanted to see the film I like best.
3. My grandfather learned to drive a car at a very old age. He wanted to drive by himself when he
traveled.
153
4. Be sure to put the meat in the oven at 11. You want to be sure that it will be ready to eat by 12.
5. Put the drink in the refrigerator. We want to make sure it won’t spoil.
6. Last month Mary hired a baby-sitter. She wanted to be able to go out with some friends.
7. Next month Mary will hire a baby-sitter. She wants to be able to go out with some friends.
8. I switched off my telephone. I didn’t want to be interrupted while I was working.
9. I’ll switch off my cell phone. I don’t want to be interrupted while I’m working.
选择题。
1. I’d like to arrive an hour early I can have time to chat with her.
A. although B. even C. in case D. so that
2. The birds need special care they can live through winter.
A. why B. so that C. even if D. how
3. Leave your key with a neighbor you lock yourself out one day.
A. ever since B. even though C. as soon as D. in case
4. We’ll spend our vacation in the small village we can enjoy the beautiful scene there.
A. in case B. so that C. in any case D. although
154
5. They left early they were late for the meeting.
A. in case B. so that C. in any case D. although
6. Please speak loudly all of us can hear you.
A. so that B. if C. when D. although
7. She was tired she could not walk any more.
A. very; that B. such; that C. so; that D. so; as
8. I went to school in a hurry I wouldn’t be late for class.
A. since B. so that C. as if D. unless
9. The child was early in the morning.
A. enough excited to get up B. too excited to get up
C. so excited that he got up D. very excited, he got up
10. It was that she couldn’t finish it by herself.
A. so difficult a work B. such a difficult work
C. so difficult work D. such difficult work
11. I arrived there late I didn’t meet him.
A. too; to B. such; that C. so; that D. so; as
12. It is hot in the room we have to use the fans.
A. such; that B. so; that C. as; as D. such; as
13. Lift it up I may see it.
A. though B. so that C. as D. than
14. I think we should go by plane we can get there earlier.
A. as soon as B. where C. in order that D. as
15. You must improve your study method you may make progress in your studies.
A. so as to B. in order to C. so D. in order that
16. I arranged my family for insurance we needed medical treatment.
A. even though B. though C. so that D. in case
17. I didn’t have a rest last weekend I could finish the task on time.
A. in case B. so that C. since D. whenever
18. I listened carefully I might figure out what she meant.
A. in case B. providing C. so that D. such that
19. He didn’t want his daughter to go abroad she couldn’t take care of herself.
A. so that B. in case C. for fear that D. in order that
20. Do come back earlier and go to bed before ten you’ll get up late.
A. so that B. in order that C. in case D. although
155
Fun Time
Why Doctors Wear Masks
Once a small child asked his father, “Father, why do doctors always have to wear masks in
the operating room?” And the father replied, “In case something goes wrong, no one will know
who they are.”
Self-evaluation
156
Unit 结果状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Result
亲爱的同学们，在生活中结果状语从句的使用随处可见，在大学英语四、六级
考试中，结果状语从句的命题频率也比较高。在这一单元，我们将系统地学习结果
状语从句的基本用法及哪些词、短语和句子相当于结果状语从句。Are you ready?
OK, let’s go!
20.1 结果状语从句的基本用法
结果状语从句的从句部分是补充说明主句中谓语动词发生的结果的，通常位于主句之
后。引导结果状语从句的常用连接词有 so … that …, such … that …, (so) that, as much as, to
such degree, to such an extent, so much so that, in order that, and therefore, hence, 等等。
1. so … that 和 such … that

“so ... that ...”和“such ... that ...”译成“如此……，以致……”、
“结果……”。二者均可
引导结果状语从句，也可直接翻译，其中 such 是形容词，修饰名词；so 是副词，修饰形容词
或副词，so 还可与表示数量的形容词 many, few, much, little 连用，形成固定搭配。具体搭配
形式如表 20-1 所示。
157
表 20-1 so 和 such 的搭配形式
so+adj./adv.+that
搭配形式 such(+a/an)(+adj.)+n.+that
so+adj.(+a/an)+n.+that
so handsome a boy such a handsome boy
so many/few boys such handsome boys

示例
so much/little water such rapid progress
so many students such a lot of students
She is so beautiful a girl that so many boys want to run after her.
She is such a beautiful girl that so many boys want to run after her.
她是如此漂亮的一个女孩，以至于许多男孩都想追求她。
The shop sells so expensive goods that I want to buy nothing in it.
这家商店出售的货物价格昂贵，以致我在里面不想购买任何东西。
The difference is such that all will perceive it.
差别这么大，所有的人都看得出来。（可以省略连接词而不翻译）
2. so that
so that 引导的状语从句既可以表结果，又可以表目的，要注意二者的区别。
（1）so that 可以用来引导目的状语从句，译成“为了……”、”以便……”，相当于 in
order that，目的状语从句里常用情态动词 may, can, might 或 could 表示目的。在现代英语中，
so that 引导目的状语从句时，so that 中的 so 还可以省略。例如：
We climbed higher so that we might get a better view.
We climbed higher in order that we might get a better view.
We climbed higher that we might get a better view.
我们爬得更高以便能够看得更清楚。
（2）so that 也可以用来引导结果状语从句，译成“结果……”、 “所以……”，so that 引
导的结果状语从句一般要用逗号和主句隔开，从句里没有表目的的情态动词 may, can, might
或 could。但无论 so that 引导目的状语从句，还是引导结果状语从句，通常都位于句中，而
不置于句首。例如：
She spoke at the top of her voice so that the students at the back could hear her.
她说话声音很高，为的是后面的同学能听见。（目的状语从句）
She spoke at the top of her voice, so that the students at the back heard her.
她说话声音很高，结果后面的同学都听见了。（结果状语从句）
158
3. never (not) so … but that (what) …
有时候，如果在主句中含有 never, never so, not so, not such 等否定词，而且 but that 和 but
what 也可以连接结果状语从句，构成双重否定。翻译的时候，可以翻译为“没有……不”。
例如：
You never come but you borrow.
你不借东西不来。
There is no so friendless but what he can find a friend.
没有连一个朋友都交不到的人。
She is not so old but that she can read.
她并没有老到不能读书。
4. 其他表达法
例如：
He was tired to such a degree that he fainted.
他疲乏得昏了过去。
He himself believed in freedom, so much so that he would rather die than live without it.
他本人信仰自由，以至于他宁愿死去也不愿毫无自由地活着。
He worked very fast and efficiently, insomuch that he was through in an hour.
他工作得很快，效率很高，以致一小时内就干完了。
The complexity increases to such an extent that taxation becomes a specialized legal field with
many intrigues and pitfalls.
税法如此复杂使得税法成为一个特别的法律领域，其中涉及很多复杂的问题和陷阱。
Over the years, a large number of overseas students have studied at that university with the
result that it has acquired substantial experience in dealing with them.
多年来，许多海外学子在这所大学里学习，结果这所学校在处理这些事情方面已获得非
常丰富的经验。
Task 1
选择题。
1. She was tired she could not move an inch.
A. so; that B. such; that C. very; that D. so; as
2. Tom is so clever a boy that we all like him. Tom is that we all like him.
A. such clever boy B. such a clever boy
C. a such clever boy D. a clever such boy
159
3. Lily has sheep that she always pays much attention to it.
A. so little B. such a little C. so little a D. such little
4. He made a wrong decision half of his lifetime was wasted.
A. so that B. such that C. in that D. for that
5. No man is so old that he may learn.
A. such B. insomuch C. but D. so
Laughter
Man: Why did you make women so beautiful?
男子：你为什么让女人生得那么美？
God: So that you will love them.
上帝：这样你才会爱上她们呀！
Man: But why did you make them so dumb?
男子：可你为什么又让女人那么笨呀？
God: So that they will love you.
上帝：这样她们才会爱上你呀！
20.2 结果状语从句的相当物
1. 相当于结果状语从句的不定式短语
不定式作结果状语时，往往仅限于 learn（得知），find（发现），see（看见），hear（听见），
to be told（被告知），make（使得）等几个具有终止含义的动词。例如：
I woke up to find everybody gone.
我醒了过来，结果发现大家都走了。
A few years later they came to our home to find that their home town had greatly changed.
几年后他们回到家里，发现家乡的面貌大大地改变了。
不定式的特殊句型如下。
1）too … to …
（1）too … to 太……以至于……
例如：
He is too excited to speak.
他太激动了，以至于说不出话来。
Uncle Tom was too ill to attend the meeting.
160
汤姆叔叔病得很重，无法出席会议。
The boy is too short to reach the top of the shelf.
那男孩太矮了，够不着书架的顶层。
（2）某些形容词在“too … to …”结构中没有否定的含义，而是表示肯定，这类形容词
有 anxious, apt, delighted, eager, easy, glad, kind, pleased, ready, surprised, willing 等。例如：
He is too ready to find fault.
他老是爱挑毛病。
She was too surprised to see how angry her father was.
看到爸爸那么生气，她非常吃惊。
（3）如在 too 前有否定词，则整个句子用否定词表达肯定，too 后的那个词表达一种委婉
的含义，意为“不太” 。例如：
It’s never too late to mend.
（谚语）改过不嫌晚。
It’s never too late to learn.
（谚语）活到老，学到老。
（4）当 too 前面有 only, all, but 时，意为“非常……”，相当于 very。例如：
I’m only too pleased to be able to help you.
我非常高兴能帮助你。
He was but too eager to get home.
他非常想回家。
2）enough … to …
例如：
John is old enough to join the army.
约翰够参军年龄了。
Wang Dan was lucky enough to receive many books from Project Hope.
王丹足够幸运，得到了希望工程的很多赠书。
3）only to …（常表示未预料到的结果）
例如：
She returned only to find that no one was at home.
她回到家，才发现家里没有一个人。
He survived the crash only to die in the desert.
他幸存于坠机事故，结果却死在沙漠里。
4）so … as to
例如：
161
Would you be so kind as to do me a favour?
请你帮我一下好吗？
The house is so high and narrow as to resemble a tower.
这房子又高又窄，像一座塔。
5）such … as to
例如：
His indifference is such as to make one despair.
他如此冷淡，令人感到绝望。
Baker can’t have done such a terrible thing as to keep you waiting for so long.
贝克不可能做出这么糟糕的事，让你等了这么久。
2. 相当于结果状语从句的分词短语
现在分词短语可以用作结果状语，通常相当于一个结果状语从句。例如：
I thought he was making fun of me, and ran faster than ever, reaching the school yard quite out
of breath.
I thought he was making fun of me, and ran faster than ever, so that I reached the school yard
quite out of breath.
我想他在拿我开玩笑，就越发跑得快了，到达校园时已经上气不接下气。
Her husband died ten years ago, leaving her with three children to look after.
Her husband died ten years ago, so that he left her with three children to look after.
她丈夫十年前去世了，撇下她和三个孩子。
3. 相当于结果状语从句的被动结构
在英语中， “主语+被动谓语+by 短语”结构的句子有时可以表示：由于 by 后面的这个（无
生命的）事物而造成了前面所说的结果。例如：
The overseas visitor must not be disappointed by this apparent lack of interest and
involvement.
海外旅游者千万不要由于这种表面上看来缺乏兴致和含蓄的态度而感到扫兴。
And 19th century literature was transformed by Anne’s Agnes Grey, Emily’s Wuthering
Heights, and Charlotte’s Jane Eyre.
于是，19 世纪文学就因安妮的《安格尼斯·格雷》、艾米莉的《呼啸山庄》和夏洛特的
《简·爱》而改观了。
4. 相当于结果状语从句的由 and 连接的词、短语或句子

Most of the military knew that future resistance was impossible and quietly complied.
162
大多数士兵知道，进一步抵抗是于事无补了，所以就默默地顺从了。
We are none of us exactly like everyone else, only rather like, and it would be unreasonable to
suppose that the books that have meant a great deal to me should be precisely those that will
mean a great deal to you.
我们没有一个和另外一个人完全相像，只是有些相像而已。因此，认为那些对我很有意
义的书应该也正是对你很有意义的书，这是不合情理的。
5. 相当于结果状语从句的主谓宾结构
在英语中，“主语+谓语+宾语”结构的句子可表示：某个（无生命的）事物导致了后面
的情况。例如：
Here great disturbances at the heart of the earth caused mountains and volcanoes to rise above
the water.
在那里，由于地心的剧烈活动，使山脉和火山升出水面。
The establishment of a solid manufacturing and mining industry has kept Victoria’s unemployment
rate the lowest in the country.
由于建立了经济实力雄厚的制造业和采矿业，维多利亚州失业率一直是全国最低的。
Task 2
用结果状语从句的相当物来补全下列句子。
1. You are old enough to .
你年纪不小了，现在足可以照料你自己了。
2. I went to see my friend .
我去看望我的朋友，不料得知他住院了。
3. He came to school late, .
他上学迟到了，结果老师生气了。
4. He heard an explosion and .
他听到爆炸声，因此报了警。
5. Ignorance and superstition .
由于无知和迷信，他们不能从现代科学中受益。
I. 选择题。
1. I hurried I wouldn’t be late for class.
163
A. so B. so that C. if D. unless
2. Lift it up I may see it.
A. though B. so that C. as D. than
3. The dictionary is so expensive I can’t buy it.
A. because B. when C. that D. if
4. I got there late I didn’t see him.
A. too; to B. such; that C. so; that D. so; as
5. It is hot in the room we have to go out for a walk.
A. such; that B. so; that C. as; as D. such; as
6. He has an interesting book that we want to read it.
A. so B. such C. the same D. as
7. Father was busy in working he often forgot rest or meals.
A. very; that B. so; that C. such; as D. enough; as
8. I took an early bus, there in time.
A. getting B. get C. got D. to get
9. He is glad get to sleep.
A. so; that B. enough; to C. such; that D. too; to
10. I’m tall to reach the top of the tree.
A. enough B. too C. only D. as
II. 将下列句子改写为不定式的特殊结构。
1. The room is so large that it can hold one hundred people.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. The room is so small that it can not hold one hundred people.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Mary drove all the way to Maine and found that her friends had moved to Florida.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. The test is so difficult that a child can not understand it.
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. The test is so easy that a child can understand it.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. I rushed to the door and discovered that it was locked and barred.
_____________________________________________________________________________
7. Would you be so kind that you lend me your bicycle?
_____________________________________________________________________________
164
8. He is such a fool that he thinks that his strange behaviour can inflect others.
_____________________________________________________________________________
III. 补全下列句子。
1. The Canadian instructor spoke so fast （翻译跟不上他）.
2. It was （如此美好的一天）that all of the students
went out.
It was （如此美好的一天）that all of the students
went out.
3. He took my shoes （以便我不能离开那所房子）.
4. He went to the station hurriedly （却发现火车已经离开了）.
5. Sam returned home （才知道他的儿子已去了乡下）.
Fun Time（此处有视频学习资料）
Jingle Bells
铃儿响叮当
Dashing through the snow 冲破大风雪
In a one-horse open sleigh 我们坐在雪橇上
Over the fields we go 奔驰过田野
Laughing all the way 欢笑又歌唱
Bells on bobtail ring 铃声响叮当

Making spirits bright 令人精神多欢畅
What fun it is to ride and sing 今晚滑雪真快乐
A sleighing song tonight 把滑雪歌儿唱
Jingle bells, jingle bells 叮叮当，叮叮当

Jingle all the way 铃儿响叮当
Oh, what fun it is to ride 我们滑雪多快乐

165


Self-evaluation
166
Unit 原因状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Reason
事出有因，没有无因之果，也没有无果之因。生活中我们总在分析与表达事物产生
的原因，今天就让我们追随“原因”，去认识发现结果的源泉。OK, let’s go!
21.1 原因状语从句的基本用法
原因状语从句表原因，常用的连接词有 because（因为），since（既然，由于），as（因为），
for（因为），now that（既然），seeing that（既然），considering that（考虑到，因为），in that
（在某方面）等。在翻译的时候，大多数原因状语从句可以放在主句之前翻译。
21.2 because, since, as 和 for 引导的原因状语从句
这四个词都可以引导原因状语从句，其中 because 语气最强，一般位于主句之后，用来

说明人所不知的原因，用于回答 why 提出的问题；since 引导的原因状语从句一般放在主句之
前表示已知的、显然的理由（通常被翻译成“既然”），较为正式，语气比 because 弱；as 引
导原因状语从句时表示附带说明的双方已知的原因，语气比 since 弱，较为正式，位置较为灵
活（常放于主句之前）
；for 引导的是并列从句，是对前面的从句加以解释，说明推断的理由，
只能后置，并且必须用逗号将其与主句隔开。
167
1. because 引导的原因状语从句
例如：
He didn’t go to Mary’s birthday party because he was not invited.
他没去参加玛丽的生日晚会，因为他没有被邀请。
I went to bed early yesterday evening because I was very sleepy.
昨天晚上我睡得很早，因为我太困了。
— Why do you look so sad?
你为什么这么难过？
— Because I failed my math exam.
因为我数学考试不及格。
2. since 引导的原因状语从句
例如：
Since this method doesn’t work, let’s try another one.
既然这个方法行不通，我们就试试另一个吧。
The football match was delayed, since it was raining heavily.
因为雨下得很大，足球赛延期了。
Since he has no license, he is not allowed to drive.
因为他没有驾照，所以不可以开车。
Since I’m not interested in classical music, I’ve decided not to go to the concert.
因为我对古典音乐不感兴趣，所以我决定不去参加音乐会了。
3. as 引导的原因状语从句
例如：
As I didn’t know how to do it, I asked the teacher.
由于我不知道怎样做，就问了老师。
As she had nothing in particular to do, she turned on the TV and saw a movie.
由于没什么具体的事儿做，她打开电视看电影。
4. for 引导的原因状语从句
例如：
Helen could not have seen me, for I was not there.
海伦不可能见过我，因为我不在那里。
It must have rained last night, for the ground was quite wet this morning.
昨夜一定下雨了，因为今天早上地面很湿。
168
It must be morning now, for the birds are singing.
天一定亮了，鸟儿在唱歌。
A: Hey, my sweetheart, time to get up for school.

B: Daddy, I want to stay at home, for I didn’t feel well today.（for 引导原因状语从句，只
可放在主句之后，for 之前需加逗号。）
A: You look very sick. You’d better take some medicine.
B: I want neither medicine nor water.（neither … nor …, either … or …, not only … but
also …等并列连词所连接的部分应是相同词性或起相同作用的结构，不可说“I
neither want medicine nor water.” 。）
A: But you’re sick, my dear.
B: I don’t want water or medicine.（在否定句中，并列连词一般不用 and，而用 or。）
A: OK, either you or I am to obey.（在含有 either … or … 的句子中，谓语动词的数由
较近的主语决定。）I obey you this time, but with one condition.
B: What is it?
A: Although you are sick, you should study.（though 或 although 本身就有“虽然……但
是……”的意思，不可再和 but 连用。）
B: I will study here in bed. No problem.
A: Because I have to go out, I can’t stay with you now.（because 本身就有“因为……所
以……”的意思，不可再和 so 连用。）
B: I won’t get out of bed until you come back.（not until 表示“到……时候才” 。在此句
中，get out of bed 的动作要等到爸爸回来时才发生。）
A: I’ll come back soon. Be a good boy! Bye!
B: Bye-bye, daddy. ... You’re back so soon. Anything wrong?
A: I just forget my something. Oh, you look terrible. Are you OK?
B: I, I just don’t feel quite well. That’s all.
21.3 now that, seeing that, in that, considering that 等引导的原因状语从句
now that, seeing that, in that, considering that 这几个词与 since 引导的原因状语从句意思相
近，都表示“因为，既然”。例如：
169
Now that you have graduated from college, you should be financially independent.
既然你已经大学毕业了，就应该在经济上独立了。
Now that he is free, he can help you solve the problem.
既然他现在有空了，就能够帮你解决那个问题了。
Seeing that it’s very cold outside, let’s stay inside this afternoon.
因为外面很冷，今天下午咱们待在室内吧。
Seeing that he’s terribly ill, he is unlikely to attend the meeting.
他病得很重，不可能来开会了。
He is quite different from other students in that he speaks three foreign languages.
他跟其他学生不同，因为他说三种外语。
This is not a good book for children in that its content is unhealthy.
这本书不适合儿童阅读，因为它的内容不健康。
Considering that he is only ten, he skates pretty well.
他仅仅十岁，从这一点看，他滑冰滑得真不错。
Considering that there’s no enough money for a new bike, he decided to buy a second-hand one.
因为没有足够的钱买新自行车，所以他决定买辆二手的。
21.4 使用原因状语从句时的注意事项
（1）英语中的“因为”不跟 so 连用。例如：
Because his bike was broken halfway, so he was late. (Chinglish)
Because his bike was broken halfway, he was late. (English)
因为自行车半道儿坏了，所以他迟到了。
（2）回答疑问句 why 时，或用在强调结构中，或有 just, all, only, part, but 等词修饰时，
都只能用 because。例如：
It was because she was too lazy that she failed.
她因为太懒惰而失败。
（3）because 引导的原因状语从句中如果主句为否定句，主句和后面的从句没有逗号隔
开，这时 not 修饰的是后面的从句。例如：
You should not despise them because they are poor.
你不能因为他们穷就看不起他们。
（4）表示双方都知道的原因时用 as, since, now that 引导，且一般放在句首。例如：
Now that the semester is over, I’m going to do what I like in my spare time.
这学期结束了，我要用课余时间做我喜欢做的事情了。
（5）由 for 引导的表示原因的分句，位于主句后面，对主句加以说明。例如：
170
Mary shook her head, for she had a different idea.
玛丽摇了摇头，因为她有不同的观点。
I. 选择题。
1. I don’t know what decision was taken at the conference the representative hasn’t
told me yet.
A. as B. because C. for D. provided
2. Criticism and self-criticism is necessary it helps us to correct our mistakes.
A. but that B. in that C. except that D. now that
3. The ship changed its course there was a storm.
A. on account of B. due to C. thanks to D. because
4. He married he loved her but because he was indebted to her.
A. because not B. not because C. because D. though
5. It must have rained last night, the ground is still wet.
A. as B. for C. because D. since
6. Many experts are strongly opposed to opening up a coal mine there it will cause a
great deal of damage to the environment.
A. since B. while C. in that case D. as long as
7. you have finished reading the book, you should start doing some exercises.
A. For now B. Since that C. Now that D. Since now
8. He found it increasingly difficult to read, his eyesight was beginning to fail.
A. and B. for C. but D. or
9. he’s got a chance, he might as well make full use of it.
A. Now that B. After C. Although D. As soon as
10. nobody was very enthusiastic about it, they decided to cancel the match.
A. Considering that B. So
C. Provided D. For
II. 根据所提供的信息，用 now that 造句。

1. We have to wear warm clothes. It’s winter now.
171
2. Mary used to live in the dorm, but a month ago she bought an apartment. Now she can cook her
own food.
3. I’ve learned Japanese quite well now. I can get a job as a bilingual teacher.
4. You can go shopping with me. It is weekend now.
5. He is sixteen. He can get a driver’s license.
III. 用适当的连词填空（每空一词）。
1. Jenny was the eldest, she looked after the others.
2. you know it, I won’t repeat it.
3. Ann didn’t hear the knock at the door she was listening to the radio.
4. — Why didn’t Tom come?
— his father wouldn’t let him.
5. everybody is here, let’s begin the meeting.
Fun Time
状语从句小笑话
我们在学习英语状语从句的时候，如果混淆了生活中的一些逻辑关系，会经常闹出
笑话来。请看：
时间状语从句
正：The sky was very dark before the sun came out.
误：The sun came out before the sky was very dark.（原来天空变黑暗了是因为太阳出
来了！？）
条件状语从句
正：If you don’t work hard, you won’t pass the exam.
误：If you don’t pass the exam, you won’t work hard.（如果你通不过考试，你就不会努
力学习！？）
目的状语从句
正：I work hard so that I can go to a university.
172
误：I go to a university so that I can work hard.（原来上大学是为了更努力地学习
啊！？）
让步状语从句
正：Although it was raining hard, we still had the sports meeting.
误：Although we still had the sports meeting, it was raining hard.（原来老天爷尽管看到
我们在开运动会还是要下雨啊!？）
原因状语从句
正：We didn’t go out because it was raining heavily.
误：It was raining heavily because we didn’t go out.（老天爷见我们没有出门，就赶紧
下雨了，挺人性化的！）
语言就是这么精彩，同样的词汇，不管用什么语言，都可以组合成不同的意思，所
以，在使用状语从句的时候，不可忽视自己理解能力和逻辑思维能力的提高。
Self-evaluation
173
Unit 让步状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of
Concession
“退一步海阔天空”
，让我们去体验“让步”的快乐吧。OK, let’s go!
22.1 让步状语从句的基本用法
让步状语从句表示条件退让一步，因其引出较差的条件或状态而得名，让步状语从句表
示“虽然”、 “尽管” 、“即使”等概念。引导让步状语从句的连接词通常有 though, although, as,
while, whether, no matter, whatever, whoever, whichever, even if, even though 等。
22.2 although, though, as, even if 和 even though 引导的让步状语从句
（1）though 与 although 都可以引导让步状语从句，二者一般可以互换，但 although 比

though 语气重。though 可与 even 连用，表示强调，意思是“即使”，但通常不能说 even
although。though 可以放在句子的末尾，表示“然而” ，而 although 却不可以。有时可用副词
yet, still, nevertheless（但不能用连词 but) 来配合连接词 though 或 although，以加强语气。例
如：
Though（Although）we may not succeed, we will still try.
即使我们可能不会成功，但我们仍努力尝试。
174
Although Tom may have told you, I still think he is not to be trusted.
尽管汤姆告诉你了，但我仍然觉得他不可信。
I won’t work with him though he is quite a capable man.
他即使是个能干的人，我也不想跟他一起共事。
Although (Though) I gave the student some advice, he didn’t take it.
尽管我给这个学生提了些建议，但他并不接受。
Dad continued to work hard even if (even though) he felt sick.
尽管爸爸感到不舒服，他仍然继续努力工作。
Though the sore be healed, yet a scar may remain.
伤口虽愈合，但伤疤留下了。（谚语）
（2）though 引导的让步状语从句也可采用倒装语序，这与 as 引导让步状语从句的用法相
同，即把被强调的词放在 though 或 as 之前，语序为：被强调的词+though/as+句子的其他部
分（在倒装结构中，前面不能再加冠词）。例如：
Poor though (as) his family was, he would never ask for help.
他家虽然贫穷，但他从不伸手求助。
Child as/though he was, he knew what was the right thing to do.
= Though he was a small child, he knew what was the right thing to do.
尽管他是小孩，但他知道做什么才是对的。
Hard as he tries, he never seems able to do the work satisfactorily.
= Though he tries hard, he never seems able to do the work satisfactorily.
虽然他尽了努力，但他的工作总做得不尽如人意。
Tired as the workers were, they did not stop.
尽管工人们很累了，他们还是没有停下来。
（3）注意 even if 和 even though 的区别。even if 引导的情况往往是假设性的，意思是
“即使……”、 “哪怕……” 、“就算……”。even though 引导的情况往往是是真实的，意思是“尽
管……” 、“虽然……” 。有时两者也可不加区别地混用。例如：
Even if they have to walk all the way, they’ll get there.
即使他们得一路走着去，他们也要到那里去。
I plan to go to the party even if my mother doesn’t agree.
即使妈妈不同意，我也会去参加晚会的。
Even if I saw him pick up the money, I can’t be sure he stole it.
就算我看见是他拾起的钱，我也不能肯定钱就是他偷的。
Even though I don’t like the job, I must do it well.
即使我不喜欢这份工作，我也必须做好它。
Even though I hadn’t seen him for many years, I recognized him immediately.
175
即使多年没见过他，我也马上认出了他。
Task 1
1. 他虽然很疲倦，但是仍然继续工作。
2. 他们虽然穷，但很快乐。
3. 即使下雨我也要去。
4. 即使你不成功，我也会支持你。
5. 尽管这次聚会上他们互相不认识，也玩得很愉快。
M: I’ll call you as soon as I get there. Bye! It’s Tom. I have to go to his house now. （as
soon as 引导时间状语从句，意思是“一……就……” 。）
W: As far as I know, his house is very far from here.（as far as 引导方式状语从句，强调
程度或范围，意思是“在……范围内”、 “就……来说”。）
M: I have to go no matter how far it is.（no matter how/what/where 引导让步状语从句，
意思是“不论……”。）He really needs my help.
W: I think it’s going to rain.
M: I’ll go even if it rains.（even if 引导让步状语从句，意思是“即使……” 。）
W: You’d better take an umbrella in case it rains.（in case 引导条件状语从句，意思是“假
使……” 、“免得……” 。）
W: Now that you decide to go, you’d better go at once.（now that 引导原因状语从句，意
思是“既然……” 。）
W: What’s the matter with you? You look as if you had run a hundred miles.（as if 引导虚
拟语气，意思是“好似”、 “犹如” 。）
M: I ran home after a bus.
W: Why? Are you crazy?
176
M: I don’t care as long as I can save half a dollar.（as long as 引导条件状语从句，意思是
“只要……”。）
W: Why don’t you run after a taxi instead of a bus?
M: What do you mean?
W: Then you can save $20 instead of half a dollar.
22.3 whether … or…引导的让步状语从句
这种从句也称“选择条件−让步状语从句”
，可位于主句之前或之后。例如：
Whether Peter drives or flies, he will be here on time.
不管彼得是开车来还是坐飞机来，他都会准时到这儿。
Whether you like it or not, you’ll have to do it.
不管你喜不喜欢，你都得做。
Whether or not it rains, we are having a party tomorrow.
不管下不下雨，明天我们都要举行晚会。
We hold that all countries, (whether they are) big or small, (whether they are) rich or poor,
should be equal.
我们认为，所有国家无论大小，贫穷还是富有，都是平等的。
Whether it rains or snows, they will leave tonight.
今晚无论下雨还是下雪，他们都要离开。
They had to go, whether or not they wanted it.
不管他们愿不愿意，他们都得走。
22.4 while 引导的让步状语从句
while (= although) 引导的让步状语从句只能前置，位于句首。例如：

While he may be right, we can’t altogether agree with him.
即使他说得对，我们也并不完全同意他。
While I admit that the problems are difficult, I don’t agree that they cannot be solved.
尽管我承认有问题存在，但我不同意说这些问题不能解决。
While (Although) she has some shortcomings, she also has some good points.
虽然她有一些缺点，但她也有一些优点。
177
22.5 wh-+ ever, no matter + wh- 等结构引导的让步状语从句
这类结构有后接名词的 whatever（无论什么），后接形容词和副词的 whoever（无论谁），

whomever（无论谁），whichever（无论哪个），whenever（无论何时），wherever（无论哪里），
however（无论怎样），以及 no matter (who, what, where, when, etc.)（无论……）。
no matter whom = whomever
no matter what = whatever
no matter who = whoever
no matter when = whenever
no matter where = wherever
no matter which = whichever
no matter how = however
例如：
Whomever (= no matter whom) you are dealing with, this method is no good.
无论你跟谁打交道，这个办法是行不通的。
Whatever (= no matter what) happens, keep calm.
无论发生什么事，都要保持冷静。
Whatever others may say, you are certainly right.
无论谁说什么，你无疑是正确的。
Whichever (= no matter which) you choose, we have no objection.
无论你选哪一个，我们都不反对。
However carefully she explained, I still didn’t understand.
无论她解释得多么仔细，我还是没弄懂。
However hard they may try, they will not attain their goal.
无论怎样努力，他们都达不到他们的目标。
Wherever I go, I will find the same thing.
无论到哪里，我都会发现同样的事情。
Task 2
用 whatever，whichever，whoever，whomever 填空。
1. happens, we must be calm.
2. she says, I won’t believe her.
3. wants the photo may have it.
178
4. I’ll give the book to wants it.
5. side wins, I shall be happy.
6. method I use, the result is much the same.

A: Who is it? Hi, Jack. Come in, please.
B: I just drop by.
A: Whoever comes is welcome.（复合关系代词是由关系代词+ever 构成的，是“无论”
的意思。whoever 相当于 anybody who。它在本句中引导名词从句，并在其中作主
语。）You can sit down wherever you like.（复合关系副词 wherever 引导表示地点的
状语从句，语气比 where 强，相当于 anywhere that 和 no matter where，意为“在任
何地方” 、“无论在哪里”。）Something to drink?
B: OK. I’ll drink whatever you have.（复合关系代词 whatever 引导名词从句，并在其中
作宾语，前面没有先行词。）
A: Here’s a cup of beer and a cup of whisky. You may choose whichever you want.（复合
关系代词 whichever 引导名词从句，并在其中作宾语，意为“无论哪一个” 。）
B: I feel sick. Can I use your bathroom?
A: Sure. You may use it however you like.（复合关系副词 however 引导让步状语从句，
意思是“怎么样都行” 。）Oh, my God.
B: Too slippery in there. Oh, my leg hurts badly.
A: Here, you can have this. Take it, or you can give it to whomever (whoever) you like.
（复合关系代词 whomever 是 whoever 的宾格。在口语中常用 whoever 代替
whomever。）
B: I really have to go now.
A: I will be very glad to see you whenever you like to come. Bye!（复合关系副词
whenever 引导表时间的状语从句，语气比 when 强，相当于 at any time，意思是“每
当” 、“无论何时” 。）
22.6 be 引导的让步状语从句
“be”有时用倒装结构来引导让步状语从句。例如：
Be it snowy or shiny, they must go.
179
不管下雪还是晴天，他们必须去。
Be she friend or enemy, the law regards her as a criminal.
不管她是朋友还是敌人，法院认定她是罪犯。
All magnets behave the same, be they large or small.
所有磁体，无论大小，性质都一样。
22.7 for all that, admitting that 等引导的让步状语从句
for all that（尽管），admitting that（纵使），granted that（就算），in spite of the fact that（尽
管），regardless of the fact that（即使）等结构也可以引导让步状语从句。例如：
Smith is a good person, for all that he is from a different country.
史密斯是个好人，尽管他来自另一个国家。
Admitting that she is quite clever, we do not think she will make much improvement, as she
pays no attention to her lessons.
即使她天资聪明，我们也不会认为她有多大长进，因为她不用心学功课。
Granted that he has enough money to buy the car, it doesn’t mean he’s going to buy it.
即使他有足够的钱买这辆车，但这并不说明他要买。
In spite of the fact that he was terribly ill, he still worked.
尽管他病得很厉害，但他仍然工作。
Regardless of the fact that he speaks little English, he gets on well with the American students.
即使他不会说英语，他也跟那些美国学生相处得很好。
I. 选择题。
1. Much hard he tried, he failed to catch up with the first runner.
A. although B. as C. while D. when
2. Hard-working though he was, there was never enough money to pay the bills.
A. / B. and C. but D. therefore
3. we gave them something to eat, they would save it up for their parents.
A. Whatever B. However C. Whenever D. Whichever
4. Mr. Saddam Hussein has to go with the American soldiers, .
A. no matter he likes or not B. no matter he should like it or not
C. no matter whether he likes or not D. no matter he may like it or not
180
5. , I have to put it away and focus my attention on study this week.
A. However the story is amusing B. No matter amusing the story is
C. However amusing the story is D. No matter how the story is amusing
6. he thought he was helping us with the work, he was actually in the way.
A. Although B. Unless C. Because D. When
7. Babies sleep l6 to l8 hours a day, and they sleep less they grow older.
A. while B. as C. when D. after
8. I would never speak to someone like that they said something unpleasant to me.
A. even if B. so that C. as if D. ever since
9. He never lost heart difficulty he met with.
A. what B. whatever C. how D. however
10. they are allowed , they can’t drink any beer.
A. As long as; to do B. If; to
C. Unless; to D. On condition that; doing so
11. How can he learn anything he spend all his spare time playing computer games?
A. where B. when C. while D. but
12. I admit that there are problems, I don’t agree that they cannot be solved.
A. While B. If C. As D. Unless
13. “ my feet remain standing above the water level, there is hope ...” said the man.
A. Where B. Even if C. While D. Although
14. she is young, she knows quite a lot.
A. When B. However C. Although D. Unless
15. most of the earth’s surface is covered by water, fresh water is very rare and precious.
A. As B. Once C. If D. Although
1. Boss as he was, he was unhappy.
2. Patient as she was, she didn’t like waiting that long.
3. Hard as I tried to persuade him, I couldn’t make Tom change his mind.
4. Hard as Mary might try, she couldn’t solve the problem.
181
5. Surrounded as the soldiers were by the enemy, they managed to break through.
Right Here Waiting

此情可待
Ocean apart day after day 远隔重洋，日复一日
And I slowly go insane 我一步步走向疯狂
I hear your voice on the line 电话里传来你的声音
But it doesn’t stop the pain 但这无法让伤痛停止
If I see you next to never 倘若此生再难相见
How can we say forever 又怎能说和你长相厮守
Wherever you go, whatever you do 无论你去哪里，无论你做什么
I will be right here waiting for you 我会一直在这里等你
Whatever it takes 无论命运怎样变迁
Or how my heart breaks 无论我多么心碎
I took for granted, all the times 我一直坚信

That I thought would last somehow 我们一定能坚持到最后
I hear the laughter. 我听到了你的笑声
I taste the tears 我尝尽苦涩的泪水
But I can’t get near you now 可是此刻却无法接近你
Oh, can’t you see it, baby 哦，你看不见吗，宝贝
You’ve got me going crazy 你让我陷入痴狂
I wonder how we can survive this romance 我想知道，我们如何才能拯救这段感情
But in the end if I’m with you 但只要最终能和你在一起
I’ll take the chance 我会奋不顾身
182
Oh, can’t you see it, baby 哦，你看不见吗，宝贝
You’ve got me going crazy 你让我陷入痴狂
Waiting for you ... 等候着你……
Self-evaluation
183
Unit 方式状语从句
The Adverbial
Clause of Manner
状语从句的最后一个分类是表示行为方式的状语从句——方式状语从句。下面就让
我们一起来学习吧！
23.1 方式状语从句的引导词
方式状语从句通常由 as if, as though 引导。其中，常用的引导词是 as, as if, as though，特

殊的引导词是 the way。
23.2 方式状语从句的基本用法
（1）as, (just) as … so …引导的方式状语从句通常位于主句之后，但在(just) as … so … 结

构中位于句首，这时 as 从句带有比喻的含义，意思是“正如……”、 “就像……”，多用于正
式文体。例如：
Always do to the others as you would be done by.
你希望别人怎样待你，你就要怎样待别人。
As water is to fish, so air is to man.
人类离不开空气，犹如鱼儿离不开水。
（2）as if 和 as though 的意义和用法相同，引出的状语从句的谓语多用虚拟语气，表示与
184
事实相反，有时也用陈述语气，表示所说情况是事实或实现的可能性较大。翻译时常译作“仿
佛……似的”
、“好像……似的”
。例如：
They completely ignore these facts as if (as though) they never existed.
他们完全忽略了这些事实，就仿佛它们不存在似的。（与事实相反，谓语用虚拟语气。）
It looks as if the weather may pick up very soon.
看来天气很快就会好起来。
（实现的可能性较大，谓语用陈述语气。）
as if 和 as though 也可以引导一个分词短语、不定式短语或无动词短语。例如：
He stared at me as if seeing me for the first time.
他目不转睛地看着我，就像第一次看见我似的。
He cleared his throat as if to say something.
他清了清嗓子，像要说什么似的。
（3）the way 的作用相当于 the manner，后面常用 that 引导方式状语，而且经常省略。例
如：
The people in the shop were greatly amazed at the way the shop assistant talked to an old lady.
那位营业员对老婆婆讲话的方式，商店里的顾客感到非常吃惊。
Task 1
1. 入乡随俗。
2. 她表现得就好像她是老板似的。
3. 有时我们教育子女用的是父母教育我们的方法。
选择题。
1. When a chopstick is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it .
A. breaks B. has broken C. were broken D. had been broken
2. Elle remembers everything exactly as if it yesterday.
A. was happening B. happens C. has happened D. happened
185
Fun Time
Read the tongue twister.
Mr. See owned a saw.
And Mr. Soar owned a seesaw.
Now, See’s saw sawed Soar’s seesaw before Soar saw See, which made Soar sore.
Had Soar seen See’s saw, before See sawed Soar’s seesaw, See’s saw would not have sawed
Soar’s seesaw.
So See’s saw sawed Soar’s seesaw. But it was sad to see Soar so sore, just because See’s saw
sawed Soar’s seesaw.
Self-evaluation
186
Unit 主谓一致
Subject-Verb
Agreement
穿衣服讲究搭配，语言也是如此。谓语要和自己的主语在人称与数上保持一致。即
主谓一致。
24.1 主谓一致的基本概念
主谓一致关系是英语中最主要的一致关系，是指主语与谓语动词之间的一致。主谓一致
遵循以下 3 个原则。
（1）语法一致：即主语和谓语在语法形式上的一致。例如：
The questions raised by Tom are very important.
汤姆提出的问题很重要。
Love has always been the most important business in my life.
爱始终是我生命中最重要的事。
（2）意义一致：即从意义或意念上处理主谓关系。例如：
Ten years is not a long time.
十年并不是很长的时间。
The number of books published on the subject is simply amazing.
有关这个学科的书出版的数量简直惊人。
（3）邻近一致：即谓语动词的人称和数与其临近的主语保持一致。例如：
187
Neither my husband nor I am able to persuade my son to change his mind.
我和我丈夫都没法说服我的儿子改变主意。
There is one eraser and two pencils in it.
里面有一块橡皮和两支铅笔。
24.2 语法一致的原则
（1）以单数名词或代词、不可数名词、动词不定式、动名词短语作主语时，谓语动词要
用单数；主语为复数时，谓语用复数。例如：
The content of these book is very good.
这些书的内容很好。
To work hard is necessary for a student.
学生有必要努力学习。
Growing vegetables needs constant watering.
种菜要经常浇水。
不可数名词前如果有表数量的复数名词，后面常跟复数动词作谓语。例如：
There are about 13 pints of blood in a man’s body.
人体内约有 13 品脱的血。
（2）由 and 或 both ... and ... 连接的并列成分作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：
To mean to do something and to actually do something are two separate things.
想干一件事和真干一件事是两回事。
Mr. Black and Mrs. Black have a son called Tom.
布莱克夫妇有一个儿子，叫汤姆。
但并列主语如果指的是同一人、同一事物或同一概念，谓语动词要用单数。例如：
All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.
只工作不玩耍，聪明杰克也变傻。
The poet and writer has come.
那位诗人兼作家来了。
（3）由 and 连接的并列单数主语之前如果分别由 each, every 修饰时，其谓语动词要用单
数形式。例如：
In our country every boy and every girl has the right to receive education.
在我们国家，每个男孩和女孩都有权利接受教育。
Each man and each woman is asked to help.
每个人都要来帮忙。
（4）主语是单数时，尽管后面跟有 but, except, besides, with, together with, as well as, no less
188
than 等介词短语，谓语动词仍用单数。例如：
The teacher with his students is going to visit the museum.
老师和学生们将要一起去参观博物馆。
Nobody but two boys was late for class.
只有两个男孩上课迟到了。
No one except my parents knows anything about it.
除了我父母谁也不知道这件事。
（5）一些只有复数形式的名词，如 people, police, cattle, clothes 等作主语时，谓语动词要
用复数。例如：
Cattle are gazing on the pasture.
牛在草场上吃草。
The police are looking for the lost boy.
警察正在寻找丢失的小男孩。
（6）由 each, some, any, no, every 构成的复合代词作主语时，谓语动词要用单数。例如：
Is everybody ready?
大家准备好了吗？
Somebody is using the phone.
有人正在用电话。
what, who, which, any, more, most, all 等代词引导的结构作主语时，谓语动词可以是单数，
也可以是复数，主要由意思决定。例如：
Are any of the students interested in going?
学生中有人有兴趣去吗？
Has any of you got a pen?
你们中间谁有笔？
（7）有两部分构成的物体的名词，如 glasses, shoes, trousers, chopsticks, scissors 等作主语
时，谓语动词用复数。例如：
Where are my shoes? I can’t find them.
我的鞋呢？我找不到了。
Your trousers are dirty. You’d better change them.
你的裤子脏了，你最好换下来。
如果这类名词前用了 a pair of 等，则往往用作单数，谓语动词的单复数形式往往取决于
pair 的单复数形式。例如：
Here are some new pairs of shoes.
这里有几双新鞋。
My new pair of socks is on the bed.
189
我的新袜子在床上。
Task 1
选择题。
1. Both the secretary and the manager agreed to attend the meeting.
A. has B. have C. are D. was
2. Mrs. Smith, together with her children， arrived.
A. are B. has C. is D. have
3. Mathematics the language of science.
A. are B. are going to be C. is D. is to be
4. Each of the students a Chinese dictionary.
A. have B. has C. there is D. there are
5. They each a beautiful dress.
A. have B. has C. there is D. there are
24.3 意义一致的原则
（1）表时间、距离、价格、度量衡等的名词作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。例如：
Three weeks was allowed for making the necessary preparations.
给了三个星期来做必要的准备。
One hundred li was covered in a single night.
一夜间就走了一百里路。
（2）有些集合名词，如 family, team 等作主语时，如作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数；
如指其中每个成员，则用复数。例如：
My family is a big one.
我家是一个大家庭。
His family are all movie lovers.
他家的人都喜爱看电影。
The audience was enormous.
观众人数很多。
The audience were greatly moved at the words.
听了这些话听众都很感动。
（3）不定代词 all, most, more, some, any 作主语时，也要依这些代词表示的意义来决定谓
语动词的单复数形式。如果代词代表复数可数名词，谓语动词用复数；如果代词代表单数可
190
数名词或不可数名词，谓语动词用单数。例如：
All of the work has been finished.
所有工作都做完了。
All of the people have gone.
所有人都走了。
（4）疑问代词作主语时，其谓语动词也有两种情况：主语表示复数意义，谓语动词用复
数；主语表示单数意义，谓语动词用单数。例如：
Who is the man standing over there?
站在那边的男人是谁？
Who are League members?
社团成员都是谁？
（5） “分数或百分数+of+名词”构成的词组作主语时，其谓语动词要以 of 后面的名词而
定：名词是复数，谓语动词用复数；名词是单数，谓语动词用单数。例如：
It is said that 35 per cent of the doctors are women.
据说 35%的医生是女性。
Three-fourths of the surface of the earth is sea.
地球表面的四分之三是海洋。
（6）half, the rest 等表示不定数量的名词作主语时，如果所指为复数意义，动词用复数；
如果所指为单数意义，动词用单数。例如：
I have read a large part of the book, the rest is more difficult.
我已经读了这本书的大部分，剩下的比较难。
Only ten students attended the class because all the rest were sick.
只有十个同学来上课，因为其余的都病了。
（7）由 what 引导的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数形式。但如果所指内容为
复数意义时，谓语动词用复数形式。例如：
What she said is correct.
她说的是正确的。
What she left me are a few old books.
她留给我的只是一些旧书。
（8）凡是以“定冠词+形容词（或分词）”作主语，往往根据意义一致的原则决定谓语动
词的单复数形式。如果这种主语指的是一类人，谓语动词用复数；如果指的是一个人或抽象
概念，谓语动词用单数形式。例如：
The sick have been cured and the lost have been found.
病人已经治愈，失踪者已经找到。
The dead is a famous person.
191
死者是一位名人。
（9）either, neither 通常作单数对待。例如：
Neither of us has gone through regular training.
我们两人都没受过正规训练。
Has either of them told you?
他们两个人中间有谁告诉过你吗？
none 作复数看待时较多，但有时也作单数看待，主要看说话人脑中联想到的是复数还是
单数概念。例如：
None are so deaf as those that will not hear.
只有不倾听别人意见的人耳朵最聋。（谚语）
None (= not a single one) of us has got a camera.
例如：我们中间没有一个人有照相机。
none 在代表不可数的东西时总是看作单数。例如：
None of this worries me.
我一点儿也不为这事着急。
S: How do you evaluate the portraits we have painted?

T: Many a student has passed.（ “many a+单数名词”虽然表示复数概念，但谓语动词
用单数。）Some students have done pretty well.（all, some, a lot of, most 等修饰可数
名词时，谓语动词用复数形式。）
S: What about me?
T: There is only one student who failed.（There be ... 句型中谓语动词的形式与紧接在
后面的名词或代词一致。）That’s you.
S: Me? But most of my spare time has been spent in painting it.（all, some, a lot of, most
等修饰不可数名词时，谓语动词用单数形式。）
T: OK, guys, here is his work.（Here be ...句型中谓语动词的形式与紧接在后面的名词
或代词一致。）
S1: So ugly! None of us has (have) ever seen such an ugly girl.（none of 后接复数名词或
代词时，谓语动词可用单数，也可用复数。）
S: But a number of my friends say it is good.（a number of 后接复数名词，谓语动词用
复数。）More than one of my friends tells me it is true to life.（“more than one of +复
数名词”虽然表示复数概念，但谓语动词用单数。）
192
T: True to life? Who is the girl in the portrait after all?
S: She is right outside playing. I’ll go and get her.
T: I have to admit it is true to life.
R ole Play
Task 2
选择题。
1. Most of my spare time spent in reading.
A. are B. were C. was D. have been
2. Ten thousand dollars quite a large sum.
A. are B. is C. were D. have
3. About 40 percent of the work done yesterday.
A. are B. is C. were D. was
4. When and where to build the new bridge yet.
A. is not decided B. are not decided C. has not decided D. have not decided
5. Although the first part of the book is easy, the rest .
A. are difficult B. has proved difficult
C. is supposed difficult D. have been found difficult
24.4 邻近一致的原则
（1）由连词 or, either … or, neither … nor, not only … but also 等连接的并列主语，如果一
个是单数，一个是复数，则谓语动词按就近一致原则，与最靠近它的主语一致。例如：
Not only you but (also) I am to blame.
不仅你，连我都要受责难。
Neither the children nor the teacher knows anything about it.
孩子们和老师都对此事一无所知。
193
（2）在“There be”句型中，谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。例如：
There are two apples and one pear in it.
里面有两个苹果和一个梨。
（3）as well as 和名词连用时，谓语动词和第一个名词相一致。例如：
He, as well as I, is responsible for it.
不但是我，他对这件事也有责任。
（4）以 here 开头的句子，其谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。例如：
Here is a letter and some books for you.
这里有你的一封信和一些书。
Task 3
选择题。
1. Tom as well as two of his friends invited to the birthday party.
A. was B. were C. have been D. had been
2. Either you or I going to the manager’s office.
A. am B. is C. are D. will
3. Not only Tom but also his wife fond of watching movies.
A. are B. were C. be D. is
4. There not only the earth but also eight other planets in the solar system.
A. are B. were C. is D. was
5. Here a pen, a few envelopes and some paper for you.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
Task 4
仿照例句用自己的话完成下列句子（只能用现在时态）。
Examples: One of my …
One of my teachers knows Chinese.
Some of my …
Some of my friends are coming to visit me.
1. All of the rooms in …
______________________________________________________________________________
2. In my country, there …
______________________________________________________________________________
194
3. The number of students …
______________________________________________________________________________
4. A number of students …
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Each of …
______________________________________________________________________________
6. One of my …
______________________________________________________________________________
7. Most of the food …
______________________________________________________________________________
8. Most of my classmates …
______________________________________________________________________________
I. 选择题。
1. This pair of shoes made in Nanjing.
A. is B. are C. have been D. had been
2. That they were wrong in this matter now clear to us all.
A. is B. was C. are D. were
3. The manager or his assistant going to attend the meeting.
A. were B. are C. is D. has
4. Two months enough for us to finish the task.
A. has B. are C. is D. were
5. Jack is the only one of the brightest students who from Yale University.
A. is graduated B. have graduated C. has graduated D. are graduated
6. Ten percent of the workers in this city now on strike.
A. is B. are C. is to be D. are to be
7. Bacon and scrambled eggs the standard American breakfast.
A. is B. are C. is to be D. are to be
8. Not only you and I but Peter, the top student in our grade not able to solve the problem.
A. are B. were C. is D. am
9. Plenty of fruits, eggs, and vegetables needed for health.
A. are B. is C. is being D. have
195
10. All the data once and again; still there are a lot of mistakes.
A. has been checked B. is checked
C. have been checked D. had been checked
II. 改错题。
1. Justice, as well as the law, demand that these bandits be severely punished.
A B C D
2. That intelligence tests actually give a measurement of the intelligence of individuals are
A B C
questioned by some famous experts.
D
3. The man assured me that a good set of tires were supposed to last at least a hundred miles.
A B C D
4. More often it is the President, and not the members of his cabinet, who appeal to the public.
A B C D
5. In the trunk were found a pen, a few suits of clothes and two books.
A B C D
III. 翻译下列句子。
1. 我们两个人都没有看这部电影。
2. 我的碗里没有汤了。
3. 不是他就是我要到那里去。
4. 工人们和老板都不知道这件丑闻。
5. 我们家正在一起度假。
Fun Time
Quick turn of mind.
1. What two words contain thousands of letters?
2. What’s the easiest way to catch a fish?
3. What kind of dog doesn’t bite or bark?
196
4. What will you break once you say it?
5. What always goes up and never goes down?
Self-evaluation
197
Unit 主语从句
The Subject
Clause
在句子中起名词性作用的各种从句统称为名词性从句。根据它们在句中所起的语
法作用，这类从句分别称为主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句。本单元，就
让我们先来学习一下在句子里面充当最重要的角色——主语成分的主语从句。
25.1 主语从句概述
用作主语的从句叫做主语从句，它的位置和作用与陈述句基本结构中的主语相同。例
如，在句子“Who will be our monitor hasn’t been decided yet.”中，主语从句是“Who will be
our monitor”，充当主语的成分；而在句子“The monitor’s position hasn’t been decided yet.”
中，主语是“The monitor’s position”，这和“Who will be our monitor”的作用是一样的。
25.2 主语从句的引导词
引导主语从句的关联词如表 25-1 所示。

1. 从属连词 that 或 whether 引导的主语从句
例如：
That the moon has no light of its own is a well-known fact.
月球自己不发光是一个众所周知的事实。
198
表 25-1 引导主语从句的关联词
分类词形词义做从句的成分
that — —
连接词
whether/if 是否 —
who（ever）（无论）谁，主格主语，表语
whom(ever) （无论）谁，宾格宾语
连接代词 whose(ever) （无论）谁的，所有格主语，宾语，表语，定语
which(ever) （无论）哪一个（些）主语，宾语，表语，定语
what(ever) （无论）什么，……东西主语，宾语，表语，定语
when 什么时间状语
where 什么地方状语
连接副词
how 怎样，如何状语
why 为什么状语
Whether he’ll come here is not clear.

他是否来还不清楚。
that 引导主语从句只起引导作用，本身无实际意义，在主语从句中不充当任何成分，但
不能省略。例如：
误：They should like each other is natural.
正：That they should like each other is natural.
It is natural that they should like each other.
他们互相喜欢是自然的。
由 whether 引导的主语从句放在句首或句后均可，whether 意为“是否” 。
注意：whether 能引导主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句，if 只能引导宾语
从句。
2. 关系代词 who (whoever), what (whatever), which (whichever), whom, whose 引导的主
语从句
例如：
Which side will win is not clear.
哪一方获胜还不清楚。
Who will write the article has not been decided yet.
谁来写这篇文章还没有决定。
199
Who killed the scientist remains a question.
谁谋杀了那位科学家还是个谜。
Whom she borrowed money from still puzzled him.
她从谁那里借的钱依然困扰着他。
3. 关系副词 when，where，how，why 等引导的主语从句

How this happened is not clear to anyone.
这件事是如何发生的对每一个人来说还不清楚。
When he will be back depends on the weather.
他何时返回取决于天气情况。
Where the test will be given is not yet decided.
在何处举行考试还未确定。
25.3 主语从句后置
（1）为了避免主语冗长，句子头重脚轻，经常用 it 作形式主语，将主语从句放在后面作
真正的主语。例如：
That we shall be late for the conference is certain.
→It is certain that we shall be late for the conference.
我们开会肯定要迟到了。
That the earth is round is known to all.
→It is known to all that the earth is round.
众所周知，地球是圆的。
When we’ll go to the restaurant has been discussed.
→It has been discussed when we’ll go to the restaurant.
我们何时去饭店已经讨论过了。
Which plan is better is clear now.
→It is clear now which plan is better.
哪一个计划更好现在已经很清楚了。
注意：what 引导的主语从句一般不用 it 做形式主语。
正：What he want is a book.
误：It is a book what he want.
他所需要的是一本书。
（2）用 it 作形式主语的结构。
① It + be + 形容词 + that 从句。例如：
200
It is certain that she will come here tomorrow.
她明天将要来这里是确定无疑的。
② It + be + 名词+ that 从句。例如：
It is a pity that we can’t go to Beijing with you.
很遗憾我们不能和你一起去北京。
③ It + be + 过去分词 + that 从句。例如：
It is said that Mr. Bill has arrived in Shanghai.
据说比尔先生已抵达上海。
④ It + 不及物动词或短语 + that 从句。例如：
It happened that I was out that day.
碰巧那天我出去了。
（3）主语从句中用陈述语序，后面的谓语动词用第三人称单数；“what”引导主语从句，
表示复数概念（常从表语可以看出）时，谓语动词常用复数形式。例如：
What we need is only water.
我们需要的仅仅是水。
What we need are useful books
我们需要的是有用的书籍。
（4）it 引导的强调句与 it 做形式主语的复合句不可以混淆。it 引导的强调句是用来对句
子中某一部分加以强调的，其结构为：“It is (was) + 强调部分 + that (或 who) ...”。如果被
强调的主语是人，则可用 who 或者 that；如果被强调的部分是其他成分时，必须用 that。例
如：
I met John in the street yesterday.
昨天我在街上碰到了约翰。
It was I that (或 who) met John in the street yesterday.（强调主语）
昨天是我在街上碰到了约翰。
It was John that I met in the street yesterday.（强调宾语）
我昨天在街上碰到的是约翰。
It was in the street that I met John yesterday.（强调地点状语，不可用 where）
我昨天是在街上碰到的约翰。
It was yesterday that I met John in the street.（强调时间状语，不可用 when）
我是昨天在街上碰到的约翰。
注意：强调主语时，从句谓语动词的人称和数要与被强调的部分一致（即与原主语一致）
。
例如：
It is I that (或 who) am your true friend.
201
只有我是你真正的朋友。
M1: Look, I, un, brought these for you to give to the kids when you have a chance.
M2: It’ll (it 作形式主语) take more than the occasional stuffed animal to convince those
children they still have a father.
M1: I’m just doing what I know. I’m doing what you taught me.
M2: I never taught you to be a thief.
M1: No, you taught me to navigate people’s minds. But after what happened there weren’t a
whole lot of legitimate ways for me to use that skill.
M2: What are you doing here, Dom?
M2: I think I found a way home. It’s a job for some very, very powerful people. People who
I believe can fix my charges permanently.
R ole Play
then, show your performance to the other classmates.
I. 选择题。
1. the house will be built will be discussed at tomorrow’s meeting.
A. If B. Where C. That D. What
2. you come or not is up to you.
A. What B. If C. Why D. Whether
3. makes mistakes must correct them.
A. Who B. Anyone C. Whoever D. Anybody
4. team will win the match is a matter of public concern.
A. Which B. That C. If D. How
202
5. leaves the room last ought to turn off the lights.
A. Anyone B. The person C. Whoever D. Who
II. 改错题。
1. Where shall we spend our holiday is not decided.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. You have made a mistake is a fact.
______________________________________________________________________________
3. That is a certain that we can win.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. If the policeman will come is not certain.
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Who leaves the room last should turn off the lights.
______________________________________________________________________________
Fun Time
Mother : Why are you jumping up and down?
妈妈：你为什么不停地跳上跳下的？
Tom : It was a pity that I’ve just taken some medicine and I forgot to shake the bottle.
汤姆：很遗憾，我刚吃完药，可我忘了先摇动瓶子了。
Self-evaluation
203
Unit 表语从句
The Predicative
Clause
我们都知道，在一个句子里面，每个词语都充当着重要的角色，如主语、宾语、补
足语等。我们还知道，在英语里面，除了单词可以充当这些成分，一些句子也有同样的
功效，它们被称为从句。那么今天，就让我们一起来看一下，表语从句是如何在句子里
发挥它作为表语的功效的。
26.1 表语从句概述
表语从句就是用一个句子作为表语，说明主语是什么或者怎么样，放在连系动词之后。
其结构是“主语+系动词+表语从句”。
26.2 表语从句的引导词
表语从句的引导词有以下几类。
（1）从属连词：that, whether, as though, as if。
（2）关系代词：who, what, which, whom, whose, whatever, whoever, whomever, whichever
等。
（3）关系副词：when, where, why, how, however, whenever, wherever 等。
可以接表语从句的连系动词有 be, look, remain, seem 等。
204
26.3 由从属连词引导的表语从句
that 在引导表语从句时无词义，也不充当成分。引导表语从句的 that 通常不省略，但在

口语或非正式文体中有时也可省略。而 whether 有词义，意为“是否”。这时主句的主语常
常是一些抽象名词，如 question（问题），trouble（麻烦），problem（问题），result（结果），
chance（可能性），suggestion（建议），idea（想法），reason（理由）等。表语从句对主句
的主语进行说明、解释，使主语的内容具体化。例如：
The trouble is (that) she has lost his money.
麻烦的事是他丢了钱。
My idea is (that) we should do the task right away.
我的意见是我们应该马上开始这个任务。
The question is whether we need more help.
问题是我们是否还需要更多的帮助。
The problem was that it was too valuable for everyday use.
问题是它作为日常之用太贵重了。
26.4 由关系代词引导的表语从句
关系代词 who, what, which, whom, whose, whatever, whoever, whomever, whichever 等引导
的表语从句，在句中作主语、宾语、表语，关系代词不能省略。例如：
The question is which of us should go.
问题是我们哪一个应该去。
That’s what he is worrying about.
那就是他在担心的事。
The problem is who we can get to replace her.
问题是我们能找到谁去替换她。
The question is who(m) we should trust.
问题是我们应当相信谁。
What I want to know is which road we should take.
我想知道的是我们应该走哪条路。
205
M: Most new fish come close to madness the first night. Somebody always breaks down
crying. Happens every time. The only question is who is it going to be?
26.5 由关系副词引导的表语从句
关系副词 when, where, why, how, however, whenever, wherever 等能够引导表语从句，而关

系副词 when, where, how, why 除在句子中起连接作用外，在从句中还充当时间、地点、方
式或原因状语，本身具有意义。例如：
Go and get your coat. It is where you left it.
去把外套拿来。就在你原来放的地方。
I had neither a raincoat nor an umbrella. That’s why I got wet through.
我们既没有伞，也没雨衣。这就是我们淋湿了的原因。
That is how mice ruin many stores of grain every year.
那就是老鼠如何每年损害大量粮食的。
That is what he is worried about.
那就是他所担心的。
26.6 由连词 because, as if/as though 等引导的表语从句
当然，除了上述词类之外，连词 because，as if/as though 等也可以引导表语从句。例如：

It looked as if it was going to snow.
看起来好像要下雪了。
That’s because we never thought of it.
这是因为我们从未想过此事。
It seems as if he didn’t know the answer.
好像他不知道答案。
206
I. 选择题。
1. The question is we will have our sports meet tomorrow.
A. that B. if C. when D. whether
2. The reason why he failed is he was too careless.
A. because B. that C. for D. because of
3. Go and get your coat. It’s you left it.
A. where B. there C. there where D. where there
4. The problem is to take the place of Ted.
A. who can we get B. what we can get
C. who we can get D. that we can get
5. What I want to know is he likes the book given by Mary.
A. that B. if C. whether D. /
6. The reason is I missed the train.
A. that B. when C. why D. what
7. That is we were late last time.
A. that B. when C. why D. what
8. He looked he were ten years younger.
A. that B. like C. as D. as though
9. — I feel sick!
— I think it is you are doing too much.
A. why B. when C. what D. because
10. The reason why he hasn’t come is .
A. because his mother is ill B. because of his mother’s being ill
C. that his mother is ill D. for his mother is ill
11. — He was born here.
— That is he likes the place so much.
A. that B. what C. why D. how
12. That is Lu Xun once lived.
A. what B. where C. that D. why
II. 选择题。（注意 that 和 what 的区别）

1. your mother wants to know is getting on with your studies.
207
A. What; how are you B. That；how you are
C. How；that you are D. What；how you are
2. The trouble is we are short of tools.
A. what B. that C. how D. why that
3. America was was first called “India” by Columbus.
A. what B. where C. the place D. there where
4. Nowadays, China is becoming stronger and stronger. It is no longer .
A. what it used to be B. what it was used to being
C. what it used to being D. what it was used to be
5. he really means is he disagrees with us.
A. What; that B. That; what C. What; what D. That; what
6. The energy is makes the cells able to do their work.
A. that B. which C. what D. such
Bloody Mary — Lady GaGa
Love is just a history that they may prove

And when you’re gone I’ll tell them my religion’s you
When Pontius comes to kill the king upon his throne
I am ready for their stones
I’ll dance, dance, dance

With my hands, hands, hands
Above my head, head, head
Like Jesus said
I’m gonna dance, dance, dance

Above my head
Dance together, forgive him before he’s dead because
I won’t cry for you
I won’t crucify the things you do
I won’t cry for you, see
208
When you’re gone I’ll still be Bloody Mary
We are not just art for Michelangelo to carve

He can’t rewrite the agro of my furied heart
I’ll wait on mountain tops in the Paris cold
Je be veux mourire tout seule
I’ll dance, dance, dance

Above my head, head, head
Like Jesus said
I’m gonna dance, dance, dance

Above my head
Dance together, forgive him before he’s dead because
When you’re gone I’ll still be Bloody Mary
GaGa, GaGa, GaGa, GaGa, GaGa, GaGa, GaGa, GaGa

Dum dum da da da
Dum dum da da da da da da
Dum dum da da da
Dum dum da da da
Dum dum da da da da da da
Dum dum da da da
When you’re gone I’ll still be bloody Mary
Oh, Liberaté, mi amor
209
Self-evaluation
210
Unit 同位语从句
The Appositive
Clause
27.1 同位语从句概述
同位语从句一般放在 fact, news, idea, truth, hope, problem, information, belief,

thought, doubt, promise, question 等名词的后面，对前面的名词作进一步的解释，说明
前面名词的具体含义。
27.2 同位语的表现形式
同位语的表现形式有以下几种。
（1）名词。例如：
Tom, our monitor, is a handsome boy.
我们的班长汤姆是一个帅气的男孩。
（2）代词。例如：
I myself will do the experiment.
我将自己做这个实验。
（3）数词。例如：
She is the oldest among them six.
她是他们六个人中年纪最大的。
（4）从句。例如：
He told me the news that the plane had exploded.
他告诉我飞机爆炸的消息。
211
27.3 同位语的引导形式
同位语的引导形式有以下几种。
（1）由 such as, that is 引导。例如：
Some subjects, such as math and physics, are very difficult to learn.
某些学科，例如数学和物理，是很难学的。
（2）由 of 引导。例如：
Great changes have taken place in the city of Beijing since 2000.
自从 2000 年以来北京市发生了很大的变化。
（3）由 or 引导。例如：
The freezing temperature, or freezing point, is the temperature at which water freezes under
ordinary pressure.
结冰温度即冰点，是水在常压下结冰时的温度。
（4）由连词 that，whether 及连接副词 how, when, where 等引导。（注：if, which 不能引
导同位语从句。）例如：
The hope that he may recover is not gone yet.
他可以康复的希望依然存在。
The problem whether we should continue to do the experiment has been solved.
我们是否继续做这个实验的问题已经解决。
I have no idea when he will come back.
我不知道他何时回来。
（5）有时同位语从句可以不紧跟在说明的名词后面，而被别的词隔开。例如：
Several years later, word came that Napoleon himself was coming to inspect them.
几年以后，有消息传来说拿破仑要亲自视察他们。
The thought came to him that maybe the enemy had fled the city.
他突然想起可能敌人已经逃出城了。
M1: Come back to reality, Dom. Please. Reality.

M2: Those kids, your grandchildren, they are waiting for their father to come back home.
That’s their reality. And this job, this last job, that’s how I get there. I would not be
standing here if I knew any other way.
212
R ole Play
选择题。
1. The fact has worried many scientists the earth is becoming warmer and warmer these
years.
A. what B. which C. that D. though
2. News came from the school office Zhang Chao had been admitted to Haibin
College.
A. which B. what C. that D. where
3. Tomorrow is Emily’s birthday. Have you got any idea the party is to be held?
A. what B. which C. that D. where
4. A warm thought suddenly struck me I might buy a pair of shoes for my father’s
birthday.
A. if B. when C. that D. which
5. Do you have any idea is actually going on outside the office?
A. that B. what C. as D. which
Fun Time
Tom: William, our good friend, has asked me for a loan of five pounds. Should I be doing
right in lending it to him?
汤姆：我们的好朋友威廉向我借五英镑。我该不该借给他呢？
Jack: Certainly.
杰克：当然应该了。
Tom: And why?
汤姆：为什么？
Jack: Because otherwise he would try to borrow it from me.
杰克：否则他就该跟我借了。
213
Self-evaluation
214
Unit 定语从句
The Attributive
Clause
亲爱的同学们，英语定语从句是英语各类从句中比较常见的一种。英语中的定语从
句呈右开放状，可以向右无限扩展；而汉语没有定语从句之说，作为修饰成分的定语习
惯上放在被修饰词之前，呈左封闭状。下面来介绍定语从句的相关内容。
28.1 定语从句概述
定语用来限定、修饰名词或代词，是对名词或代词起修饰、限定作用的词和短语（动词
不定式短语、动名词表示的）。它可以是由形容词、名词、代词、数词、副词、分词、不定式
以及介词短语来担任，也可以由一个句子来担任。单词作定语时通常放在它所修饰的词之前，
作前置定语。短语、从句作定语时则放在所修饰的词之后，作后置定语。那么，用从句担任
的定语叫做定语从句，它一般是由关系代词或关系副词来引导的。
1. 定语从句
修饰一个名词或代词的从句称为定语从句，被修饰的名词或代词即先行词，定语从句一
般紧跟在它所修饰的先行词后面。定语从句可分为限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句两类。
2. 关系词
引导定语从句的关联词称为关系词，关系词主要有关系代词和关系副词。
215
关系代词有 who, whom, which, that, whose, as。
关系副词有 when, where, why。
3. 关系词的作用
关系词的作用是：起连接作用，引导定语从句；代替先行词并在定语从句中担当一个成
分。例如：
The man who was here yesterday is a painter.
昨天在这里的那个人是一名画家。（关系代词 who 在从句中作主语）
This is the room where we slept during the wartime.
这就是我们在战时睡过的房间。（关系副词 where 在从句中作状语）
The big room whose windows are red is mine.
那个窗户是红色的大房间是我的。（关系代词 whose 在从句中作定语）
Laughter
A successful man is one who makes more money than his wife can spend. A successful woman
is one who can find such a man.
成功的男人是赚的钱比老婆花得多的人，成功的女人是能找到这样的男人。
28.2 限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句
限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别如表 28-1 所示。
表 28-1 限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别
名称意义结构要求功能引导词译法
起限定作用，是先（1）作宾语时关系
采用合译法，通
行词不可缺少的词可省略
限制性定语不用逗号和主常翻译成先行词
定语，不能删除，修饰先行词（2）可使用关系代
从句句隔开的定语，
即“……
否则原句句意不词、关系副词和关
的……”
完整系形容词及 that
仅作补充说明，是采用分译法，通
（1）不可省略关系
非限制性定对先行词的补充用逗号和主句修饰先行词常翻译成主句
词
语从句说明，删除后原句隔开或整个主句的并列句或者
（2）不可使用 that
句意仍然完整状语从句
216
注意区分以下两个句子的不同。
His sister who is now a doctor always encourages him to go to college.
他那现在当医生的姐姐常鼓励他要考上大学。（他还有其他的姐姐）
His sister, who is now a doctor, always encourages him to go to college.
他的姐姐现在是当医生的，常鼓励他要考上大学。（他只有一个姐姐）

Derek Jones : The technology is the same as ours.（as 作关系代词引导定语从句，与
the same 连用。）I have never seen two products which are so similar.
（which 引导定语从句，作主语。）In concept and design, there are no
basic differences. None. However, I have examined the components and
the XR590.
Kate Mckenna : What is the XR590?
Derek Jones : The XR590 is the power source which drives Dealer Dan.（which 引导
定语从句，作主语。）I think it has a few weaknesses. It’s not as good. In
my opinion, it’s not reliable enough for children.
Don Bradley : Exactly how unreliable is it?
Derek Jones : I can’t say exactly. I haven’t completed the tests yet. It’s too early to say.
Kate Mckenna : Will it affect their sales?
Don Bradley : Derek.
Derek Jones : Not much in the first six months, I suppose.
Kate Mckenna : It’s the first six months that are very important.（that 引导定语从句，作
主语。）
Don Bradley : Edward, what do you think of their packaging?
Edward Green : Well, plenty of bright colours. It’ll have a lot of impact at point of sale.
28.3 关系代词引导的定语从句
1. 引导定语从句的关系代词
（1）who 指人，在从句中做主语。例如：
The boys who are playing football are from Class One.
踢足球的男孩是一班的。
217
The teacher will punish the students who did not finish their homework.
老师将惩罚那些没有完成作业的学生。
（2）whom 指人，在限制性定语从句中充当宾语，常可省略。例如：
I do not want to invite those people (whom) I dislike.
我不想邀请那些我不喜欢的人。
注意：关系代词 whom 在口语和非正式语体中常用 who 代替，可省略。例如：
The man who/whom you met just now is my brother.
你刚才遇到的那个人是我哥哥。
（3）which 指物，在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，但在限制性定语从句中做宾语时可省
略。例如：
Football is a game which is liked by most boys.
大多数男孩喜欢足球这一运动。
The book (which) I am reading is about American Revolution.
我在读的是一本有关美国独立战争的书。
（4）that 常用于限制性定语从句中，既可指人，又可指物，在当代英语中多指物。that
指人时，相当于 who 或者 whom；that 指物时，相当于 which。that 既可作主语又可作宾语，
做宾语时可省略。例如：
The number of the people that/who come to visit the city each year rises to one million.
每年来这座城市观光的人达到 100 万。
Where is the man that/whom I saw this morning?
我今天早上见到那个人在哪儿？
The good news (that/which) I just heard of was Mary’s being promoted to a higher position.
我刚刚听到的好消息是有关玛丽升职的事。
在大多数情况下，that 和 who，whom，which 之间可以相互替换，但在下列情形中，
一般要用 that 而不用who，whom，which。
① 当先行词是 anything, everything, nothing, few, all, none, little, some 等代词时，或者是
由 every, any, all, some, no, little, few, much 等修饰时。例如：
He dislikes everything that is old.
一切旧东西他都不喜欢。
There seems to be nothing that seems impossible for him in the world.
在这个世界上对他来说没有什么不可能的事情。
Any boy that is attentive and hard-working will be praised.
任何专心、刻苦的学生都将得到表扬。
There is little that I can do for you.
我能为你做的事情不多。
218
注意：当先行词指人时，偶尔也可以用 who。例如：
Any man that/who has a sense of duty won’t do such a thing.
任何有责任感的人都不会做这种事。
② 当先行词被序数词修饰时。例如：
The first place that they visited in Harbin was the Sun Island.
他们在哈尔滨游玩的第一个地方就是太阳岛。
The last student that stood was John.
站着的最后一个学生是约翰。
③ 当先行词被形容词最高级修饰时。例如：
It was the largest map that I have ever seen.
这是我所见过的最大的地图。
She was the best leader that has ever led us.
她是领导过我们的人中最好的一位。
④ 当形容词被 the very, the only, the last, the next, the same 修饰时。例如：
You are the very man that I want to see.
你正是我想见的那个人。
After the fire in his house, the old car is the only thing that he owned.
他家那场大火之后，那辆旧车是他所拥有的唯一财产了。
当先行词指人时，偶尔也可以用 who。例如：
Wang Hua is the only person in our school who will attend the meeting.
王华是我们学校唯一将要参会的人。
⑤ 当先行词前面有 who, which 等疑问代词，为了避免重复时。例如：
Who is the man that is standing there?
站在那儿的那个人是谁？
Which is the hotel that was recommended to you?
哪一个是推荐给你的旅馆？
⑥ 当先行词是集体名词或既有人也有物时。例如：
I must take care of the passengers and luggage that will be sent to the station.
我必须看管好那些要被送到车站的旅客和行李。
⑦ that 常和以-ible 和-able 结尾的词一起用。例如：
There is no plan that is impossible.
没有不可能的计划。
There is no road that is impassable.
没有不通的路。
（5）as 作为关系代词，用于限制性定语从句，只能用在 such, same, as 或 so 的后面；用
219
于非限制性定语从句，则代替部分主句或整个主句。as 在它引导的定语从句（限制性或非限
制性）中可以充当主语、宾语和表语。
as 可以代替主句的全部或后半部分，引导非限制性定语从句时，意为“正如……” 、 “就
像……” 、“据……”。as 常见于以下这些结构：as we can see, as can be seen, as we know, as is
(well) known, as may be imagined, as often happens, as has been said before, as was mentioned
above, as is often the case, as/indeed it is，等等。例如：
Let’s discuss only such questions as concern everyone of us.
我们只谈和我们每个人都有关的问题吧。
The same accident as had happened to me, happened to you.
发生在我身上的事故又同样发生在你身上。
This experiment is very simple, as indeed it is.
实验非常简单，事实上也确实如此。
as 和 which 都可以引导非限制性定语从句，as 和 which 都可以在定语从句中做主语、宾
语或代表前面整个句子。二者的区别如下。
① as 引导的从句位置灵活，可位于主句前、主句后，甚至可以切割一个主句，而 which
引导的从句只能放在主句之后。另外，as 有“正如……”、 “正像……”的意思。例如：
As（不可用 which）is known to all, China is a developing country.
正如我们大家所知道的，中国是一个发展中国家。
Great changes, as（不可用 which）is well known, have taken place in China.
众所周知，中国发生了巨大的变化。
He is from the south, as（可用 which）we can see from his accent.
他是个南方人，我们从他的口音就可以辨认出来。
② as 引导的从句既可指前面已经提到的情况，也可指后面将要提到的情况，而 which 引
导的从句只指前面提到的情况。例如：
The figure is big, as（不可用 which）is shown in the following.
就像下面显示的，这数字很大。
③ as 所引导的非限制性定语从句中，如果运用的是被动语态结构，be 动词可以省略，即
“as + 过去分词”，而且除过去分词外，有时还可以接形容词，比如 as usual 等，但 which 没有
此用法，be 动词不可省略。例如：
I hope all the precautions against air pollution, as（不可用 which）suggested by the local
government, will be seriously considered here.
我希望，正如地方政府所提议的，防止空气污染的所有措施都能在此得到认真考虑。
2. 关系代词与介词的位置
（1）如果关系代词 whom (who) 或 which 和一个后面接有带介词的及物动词短语一起用，
通常把介词放在关系代词的前面。例如：
220
The documents for which they were searching have been discovered.
他们找寻的文件已经找到了。
（2）如果介词明显是及物动词短语的一部分，介词常放在关系代词后面。例如：
This is the book which/that I am looking for.
这就是我正在找的那本书。
（3） “介词+关系代词”前可有 some, any, none, both, all, neither, most, each, few 等代词或
数词。例如：
His daughters, both of whom work abroad, ring him up every week.
她的两个女儿，都在国外工作，她们每周都给他打电话来。
We’ve tested three hundred types of watch, none of which is completely waterproof.
我们已经测试过 300 种手表，没有一种是完全防水的。
There are forty people in our team in all, most of whom are from the Northeast.
我们队总共有四十人，大多数人来自东北。
（4）介词 + which (whom) + 不定式结构。例如：
There is a planet on which to live.
有一个能居住的星球。
W: Peter, the new year is coming. Do you have any plans?

M: Then what’s your plan?
W: First, I want to visit the place where I was born.（限制性定语从句对先行词具有限制
和确定的作用，以表明先行词是某个、某些或某类特定的人或事物。在本句中，
定语从句 where I was born 限定了先行词 the place 的范畴。）
M: OK, no problem. Then?
W: Miss Scott, who is in France（who 作关系代词引导非限制性定语从句，指人，作主
语。），asked me to visit her the next year. I really want to see her, who immigrated to
France many years ago.（who 作关系代词引导非限制性定语从句，指人，作主语。）
M: France! Oh my god! That must cost me half a year’s salary.
W: Besides, I plan to play golf twice a week, which will do my health good.（which 作关
系代词引导非限制性定语从句，指代前面整个句子。）
M: It will cost me another half year’s salary. Now I know what my plan for the new year is.
W: Do you? Then what is it?
M: Prevent you from spending so much money.
221
Task 1
选择题。
1. — Do you know the man is talking with your father？
— Yes, he’s our headmaster.
A. he B. who C. which D. whom
2. Ann asked the policeman he worked to contact him whenever there was an accident.
A. with him B. with whom C. who D. whom
3. All is needed is a supply of oil.
A. the thing B. that C. what D. which
4. The most important thing we should pay attention to is the first thing I
have said.
A. which；that B. that；which C. which；which D. that；that
5. That is the day I’ll never forget.
A. which B. on which C. in which D. when
6. The factory we’ll visit next week is not far from here.
A. where B. to which C. which D. in which
7. They arrived at a farmhouse, in front of sat a small boy.
A. whom B. who C. which D. that
8. I have bought such a watch was advertised on TV.
A. that B. which C. as D. it
9. is well-known to all, too much stress can cause disease.
A. Which B. It C. That D. As
10. He has made another wonderful discovery, of great importance to science and man.
A. which I think is B. which I think it is
C. of which I think it is D. I think which is
28.4 关系副词引导的定语从句
（1）when 指时间，在定语从句中作时间状语，先行词为表示时间的词。例如：
Gone are the days when they could do what they liked.
他们为所欲为的日子一去不复返了。
We’ll put off the picnic until next week, when the weather may be better.
我们将把野餐推迟到下星期，那时天气可能会好一点儿。
（2）where 指地点，在定语从句中作地点状语，先行词为表示地点的词。例如：
222
I came to a very busy intersection where the stoplight had just turned red.
我来到一个川流不息的十字路口时，红灯刚好亮起。
Barbary was working in Aubury, where she went daily in a bus.
巴巴拉在奥伯里工作，每天得坐公共汽车去上班。
（3）why 指原因，在定语从句中作原因状语，先行词为表示原因的词。另外，why 可以
省略，why 只能引导限制性定语从句，不能引导非限制性定语从句。例如：
Please tell me the reason why you missed the plane.
告诉我你为什么没赶上飞机。
We don’t know the reason why he didn’t show up.
我们不知道他为什么没有来。
That’s one of the reasons (why) I asked you to come.
这就是我请你来的原因之一。
Task 2
填入适当的关系词。
1. This is the way we solved the problem.
2. Beijing is the place I was born.
3. Is this the reason he refused our offer?
4. The American soldiers rushed into the President Mansion they found those gold
bars.

W: Dear, a present for you.
M: Great! It must be a toy car that (which) can be assembled.（that 作关系代词引导定
语从句，指物，作主语。）
W: No, it is a tool kit.
M: How beautiful this house is!
W: This is the house whose owner is a handsome man.（whose 作关系代词引导定语从
句，指人，作主语。）
M: It seems you know him.
W: Yes. He is a man whose father is a kind old man.（whose 作关系代词引导定语从句，
指人，作主语。）
223
M: You are even familiar with his father. Tell me when and where you knew this man.
W: 1975 is the year when I was born.（when 作关系副词引导定语从句，表示时间，作
状语。）This house is the place where I spent my childhood.（where 作关系副词引导
定语从句，限定地点。）
M: Who on earth is that man?
W: This man is my uncle and the old man is my grandpa. That is the reason why (for
which) I am familiar with them.（why 作关系副词引导定语从句，表示原因，作状
语。）
Task 3
选择题。
1. The child parents are dead is called an orphan.
A. which B. his C. whose D. with
2. I lost a book, I can’t remember now.
A. whose title B. its title C. the title of it D. the title of that
28.5 漂亮句子中展现的定语从句
下面的句子可以很好地展现定语从句。
（1）Something that he says is not consistent with something that he does.
What he says is not consistent with what he does.
言行不一致。
（2）They are looking forward to seeing something that has never been heard of before.
They are looking forward to seeing what has never been heard of before.
他们渴望知道以前从未听说过的事情。
注意：what 是先行词和关系代词的结合体，在从句中可作主语，也可作宾语，主要指物，
但有时也可指人。
（3） With the introduction of electric computer, there is no complicated problem but can be
solved in a few hours.
With the introduction of electric computer, there is no complicated problem that cannot be
solved in a few hours.
由于引入了电子计算机，没有在几个小时内解决不了的复杂问题。
224
注意：but 有时可用作关系代词引出否定性定语从句，意思是“that/who/whom …. not” 。
（4）He often sat in the small bar drinking considerable more wine than was good for health.
他经常坐在小酒馆里喝过多的酒，这不利于身体健康。
（5）He smoked more cigarettes than was normally available.
他吸的香烟比他买的要多。
注意：than 用作关系代词引导定语从句，但主句必须有比较级的字样和 than 前后呼应。
（6）All the students attending this school have to wear uniform.
All the students who attend this school have to wear uniform.
注意：分词短语或不定式作名词的后置定语相当于定语从句。
（7）That is Tang Taizong, who, historians believe, was one of the greatest emperors in China.
那就是唐太宗，历史学家认为，他是中国最伟大的皇帝之一。
注意：定语从句中带有插入语结构，紧跟在关系代词之后。不影响关系代词原来结构的
插入语有 I know, it is hoped, they are sure，等等。
（8）The firm has an agent in Sydney who deal with the Australian side of the business.
这家公司在悉尼有一个代理商，这个代理商负责处理澳大利亚方面的事务。
（9） The old man won’t live long who smokes at least three packs of cigarettes every day for
20 years.
二十年中每天至少吸三包烟的那个老人不可能长寿。
注意：定语从句与其先行词分裂的现象包括在定语从句与先行词之间插入各种修饰先行
词的短语；将短的谓语插到主语与其长的定语从句之间；将短的宾补插到宾语与
其长的定语从句之间；等等。
（10）The handsome, well-educated man who came by the office where she worked looked like
a good bet.
这位顺道到她工作办公室来的英俊的、受过良好教育的男子看上去是个挺不错的选择。
注意：定语从句的连用是指定语从句再套定语从句。
28.6 定语从句的翻译
（1）对于限制性定语从句通常采用合译法，译成先行词的定语， “……的……”。例如：
Pollution is a pressing problem which we must deal with.
污染是我们必须解决的一个迫切问题。
（2）对于非限制性定语从句通常采用分译法，译成主句的并列句。例如：
This is a college of science and technology, the students of which are trained to be engineers or
scientists.
这是一所科技大学，该校的学生将被培养成工程师或科学工作者。
225
（3）定语从句通常翻译成状语从句。例如：
We know that a cat, whose eyes can take in many more rays than our eyes, can see clearly in
the night.
我们知道，由于猫的眼睛比人眼能吸收更多的光线，所以猫在黑夜也能看得很清楚。（原
因）
There was something original, independent, and heroic about the plan that pleased all of them.
这个方案富于创造性，独具一格，且很有魄力，因此他们都很喜欢。（结果）
Electronic computers, which have many advantages, cannot carry out creative work and
replace man.
尽管电子计算机有许多优点，但是它们不能进行创造性工作，也不能代替人。（让步）
Men become desperate for work, any work, which will help them to keep alive their families.
人们拼命想得到工作，不管什么工作，只要能维持一家人的生活就行。（条件）
When the time came for Leopold to go out, his companion helped him fix the line that was to
keep floating away from the ship.
利奥波德该出舱了，他的同伴帮他把牵引线固定好，以免飘离飞船。（目的）
Task 4
1. You must grasp the concept of “work” which is very important in physics.
2. Copper, which is used so widely for carrying electricity, offers very little resistance.
3. The scientist, who was dog-tired, went on with the experiment.
4. For any machine whose input and output forces are known, its mechanical advantage can be
calculated.
5. We have to oil the moving parts of the machine, the friction of which may thus be greatly
reduced.
28.7 定语从句和同位语从句的区别
（1）定语从句修饰先行词，它和先行词是修饰关系；同位语从句解释说明先行词的具体
226
内容，是补充说明的关系。例如：
The good news I just heard of was about Mary’s promotion to a higher position.
我刚刚听到的好消息是有关玛丽升职的事。（定语从句）
The truth that we failed to give him a quick response made him very angry.
我们未能及时给他答复的事实使他非常生气。（同位语从句）
（2）定语从句由关系代词或者关系副词引导，关系词在句中充当句子成分，有时可以省
略；同位语从句主要由 that 引导，在句中不充当成分，句子也可以由 when, where, how, why,
whether, what 等词引导。例如：
The problem that we are facing now is how we can collect so much money.
我们现在面临的问题是如何筹到这么多钱。（定语从句）
The problem how we can collect so much money is difficult to solve.
如何筹到这么多钱这一问题很难解决。（同位语从句）
（3）翻译同位语从句时，用“这个……”、“这些……”等来连接同位语从句和其所修饰
的名词；翻译定语从句时，常常用“……的……”连接被修饰的名词。例如：
We all have heard the news that he was killed in an air crash.
我们都听到了他死于空难这条消息。（同位语从句）
We all have heard the news that comes from the radio.
我们都听到了来自收音机的消息。（定语从句）
Task 5
选择题。
1. Along with the letter was his promise he would visit me this coming Christmas.
A. which B. that C. what D. whether
2. Luckily, we’d brought a road map without we would have lost our way.
A. it B. that C. this D. which
3. We are familiar with the idea all matter consists of atoms.
A. which B. what C. that D. it
4. This is one of the best films have been shown this year.
A. that B. what C. which D. where
5. The fact the carriage was warm sent him to sleep.
A. that B. which C. what D. when
227
I. 仿照例句改写下列句子。
Example: Something that he can do at the moment is to stay where he is.
What he can do at the moment is to stay where he is.
1. Something that he says is not consistent with something that he does.
2. Don’t hesitate to create something that you believe in.
3. After a night’s sleep, he forgot something that matters on the following day.
4. They are looking forward to seeing something that has never been heard of before.
5. I spent a month considering something that I’d always wanted to do.
II. 选择题。
1. The place interested me most was the Children’s Palace.
A. Which B. where C. what D. in which
2. Last summer we visited the West Lake, Hangzhou is famous in the world.
A. for which B. for that C. in which D. what
3. Do you know the man ?
A. whom I spoke B. to who spoke C. I spoke to D. that I spoke
4. This is the hotel last month.
A. which they stayed B. at that they stayed
C. where they stayed at D. where they stayed
5. Do you know the year the Chinese Communist Party was founded?
A. which B. that C. when D. on which
6. Great changes have taken place since then in the factory we are working.
A. where B. that C. which D. there
7. The pen he is writing is mine.
A. with which B. in which C. on which D. by which
8. The engineer my father works is about 50 years old.
A. to whom B. on whom C. with which D. with whom
228
9. Is there anyone in your class family is in the country?
A. who B. who’s C. which D. whose
10. I’m interested in you have said.
A. all that B. all what C. that D. which
11. I want to use the same dictionary was used yesterday.
A. which B. who C. what D. as
12. He isn’t such a man he used to be.
A. who B. whom C. that D. as
13. He is good at English, we all know.
A. that B. as C. whom D. what
14. Li Ming, to the concert enjoyed it very much.
A. I went with B. with whom I went
C. with who I went D. I went with him
15. I don’t like as you read.
A. the novels B. the such novels C. such novels D. same novels
16. He talked a lot about things and persons they remembered in the school.
A. which B. that C. whom D. what
17. The letter is from my sister, is working in Beijing.
A. which B. that C. whom D. who
18. In our factory there are 2,000 workers, two thirds of are women.
A. them B. which C. whom D. who
19. You’re the only person I’ve ever met could do it.
A. who; / B. /; whom C. whom; / D. /; who
20. I can never forget the day we worked together and the day we spent
together.
A. when; which B. which; when C. what; that D. on which; when
21. She wore a heavy fur coat in such a hot day, I found quite strange.
A. that B. which C. what D. when
22. The way he looks at problems is wrong.
A. which B. whose C. what D. that
23. This is the reason he didn’t come to the meeting.
A. in which B. with which C. that D. for which
24. This machine, for many years, is still working perfectly.
A. after which I have looked B. which I have looked after
C. that I have looked after D. I have looked after
229
25. Can you lend me the book the other day?
A. about which you talked B. which you talked
C. about that you talked D. that you talked
Fun Time
Recently, I received a call from a woman who wanted to replace some chairs of dining set
bought from us in the 1930s. I assured her we could help and sought the assistance of the office
manager. “You’ll never believe this one,” I told the office manager. “I just got a call from a
customer who bought some chairs from us in the 1930s.” Before I could finish, he interrupted
and said, “Don’t tell me she hasn’t received them yet.”
最近，我接到一个妇女的电话。她 20 世纪 30 年代从我们这里买了一套餐厅家具，
现在想来换一些椅子。我跟她说我们可以帮忙，并向部门经理提了出来。 “你肯定不会
相信，”我对部门经理说， “我刚接到一个顾客的电话，她在 30 年代就从我们这里买了
一些椅子。”我还没来得及说完，经理就打断我说：“不要告诉我她到现在还没收到货
啊！”
Self-evaluation
230
Unit it 的用法
The Usage of It
我们都知道 it 可以指代非人称的它，所以 it 它不是人，那么在这一单元，我们要

向大家介绍一下这个“不是人”的 it。
it 在句子中可作主语，it 在句子中作主语可起到以下作用。
（1）代替刚提到过的一件事。在这种情况下，it 可以指一个具体的东西（a），也可以指
前面所谈的事情或情况（b）。
a. What is this?
这是什么？
It is a computer.
这是电脑。
b. You promised to write the article, you must do it.
你答应写这篇文章的，一定得写。
（2）起指示代词的作用，指一个人或事物。在这种情况下，it 所指的东西不是很具体，
有时指做某个动作的人（a），有时指引起某种情况的事物（b）。
a. Who is knocking at the door?
谁在敲门？
It is Lily.
是莉莉。
231
b. It is the wind shaking the window.
是风刮得窗户响。
（3）表示时间、天气、距离、环境情况等。在这种情况下，it 不指某个特别的东西，而
是指以下几种情况。
① 自然现象。例如：
It is rather windy today.
今天风挺大。
It is drizzling (pouring, snowing hard).
现在正在下毛毛雨（下倾盆大雨、下大雪）。
It is fine (rather chilly, extremely hot) today.
今天天晴（有些冷、非常热）。
② 季节时间等。例如：
It was late autumn (early spring, mid-summer).
这时是深秋季节（早春季节、仲夏季节）。
It was twilight (midnight, ten o’clock in the morning).
这是黄昏时分（午夜、上午十点钟）。
③ 距离。例如：
It is about a night’s journey to the place by train.
到那个地方乘火车要一夜。
It is just one more stop to Toronto.
再停一站就到多伦多了。
④ 环境情况等。例如：
It was very quiet at the moment.
这时候很安静。
It will be lovely in the park today.
今天公园里一定很好玩。
（4）改变一个句子的结构，强调这个句子中的某一成分。在这种情况下，it 可以说没有
意思，它只帮助改变一个句子的结构，使某一成分得到强调。例如：
It is medicine that counts.
起作用的是药物。
比如说“Xiao Yang met your sister in the zoo yesterday.”这个句子就可借助 it 改为下面几
种形式，各强调一个不同的成分。
It was Xiao Yang who（或 that）met your sister in the zoo yesterday.
是小杨昨天在动物园碰到你妹妹的。
It was your sister that（或 whom）Xiao Yang met in the zoo yesterday.
232
小杨昨天在动物园碰到的是你妹妹。
It was in the zoo that（不用 where）Xiao Yang met your sister yesterday.
小杨昨天是在动物园碰到你妹妹的。
It was yesterday that（不用 when）Xiao Yang met your sister in the zoo.
小杨是昨天在动物园碰到你妹妹的。
改变结构的办法是：It + be + 要强调的部分 + that +（或 who, which）+句子其他部分。比
如：强调的部分指人时用 who(m)，有时用 that；其他情况多用 that，间或用 which；在口语
中 that 有时可以省略。
（5）代替一个由不定式、动名词短语或是从句表示的主语，使原来的这些主语可以放在
句子后部，避免句子显得头重脚轻。在这种情况下，it 没有具体的意义，而只是帮助把真正
的主语移到句子后面去，使句子显得平稳一些。能借助 it 移到句子后面的主语有三种：一种
由不定式表示，一种由动名词表示，一种由从句表示。
① 用不定式作主语的这类句子很多。例如：
It is funny of you to be still worrying about it.
你真可笑，还在为这事着急。
It is our duty to attend to this matter.
处理这事是我们的责任。
② 能以动名词作主语的这类句子比较少一些，主要在以 no good, no use, useless,
senseless, nuisance, worthwhile, waste, dangerous 等词做表语的句子中用。例如：
It is no use talking to her about it.
和她谈这事没有用。
It is dangerous playing with fire.
玩火是危险的。
Is it worthwhile making such an experiment?
做这样的试验值得吗？
③ 能用从句作主语的带 it 的结构常见的有下面几类：
a. It is a pity (shame, a fact, an honor, a wonder, a good thing, good news, no wonder …)
b. It is strange (natural, surprising, obvious, true, fortunate, good, and wonderful …)
c. It seems (happened, turned out, occurred to me, etc.) that …
d. It was said (reported, rumored, announced, arranged, decided, etc.) that ...
e. It is doubtful (not known, not decided, not made clear, to be found out, to be made clear, to
be decided, etc.) + 连接代词或副词引起的从句
f. It doesn’t matter (doesn’t make too much difference, doesn’t seem to matter much, doesn’t
need to be bothered, doesn’t alter the situation, etc.) +连接代词或副词引起的从句
233
G ame Time（此处有视频学习资料）
Directions: Look at the sentences below, guess what “it” refers to in each sentence, and
translate the meaning of each sentence. And then, look at the video, check out the
answers with your partner.
It is cloudy.
It is about a hundred kilometers from here to the seashore.
It is Sunday tomorrow, where shall we go?
It is very kind of you.
It is my turn.
It is over.
I can’t help it.
That is it.
选择题。
1. — There is still a copy of the book in the library. Will you go and borrow ?
— No. I’d rather buy in the bookstore.
A. it; one B. one; one C. one; it D. it; it
2. It is almost five years we saw each other last time.
A. before B. since C. after D. when
3. It was some time we realized the truth.
A. when B. until C. since D. before
4. How long do you think it will be China sends a manned spaceship to the moon?
Perhaps two or three years.
A. when B. until C. that D. before
5. is our belief that improvements in health care will lead to a stronger, more
prosperous economy.
A. As B. That C. This D. It
6. He didn’t make clear when and where the meeting would be held.
A. this B. that C. it D. these
234
7. As the busiest woman in Norton, she made her duty to look after all the other
people’s affairs in that town.
A. this B. that C. one D. it
8. I’d appreciate if you would like to teach me how to use the computer.
A. that B. it C. this D. you
9. I just wonder that makes him so excited.
A. why it does B. what he does C. how it is D. what it is
10. If I can help I don’t like working late into night.
A. so B. that C. it D. them
11. — It’s been raining for a whole week. I think it’ll get fine soon.
— . We are getting into the rainy season now.
A. Yes, it will B. Of course not
C. It’s possible D. It’s hard to say
12. Someone is ringing the doorbell. Go and see who .
A. is it B. he is C. is he D. it is
13. is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A. There B. This C. That D. It
14. I like in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.
A. it B. that C. this D. one
15. It was not until 1920 regular radio broadcast began to master a foreign language
until without much memory work.
A. while B. which C. that D. since
16. It was only when I read his poems recently I began to appreciate their beauty.
A. until B. that C. then D. since
17. We will have to finish the job .
A. long it takes however B. it takes however long
C. long however it takes D. however long it takes
18. is known to everybody, the moon travels around the earth once every month.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
19. no need for us to discuss the problem again since it has already been settled.
A. It has B. There has C. It is D. There is
20. Bill’s aim is to inform the viewers that cigarette advertising on TV is illegal, ?
A. isn’t it B. is it C. isn’t he D. is he
235
Let It Be
顺其自然
When I find myself in times of trouble 当我发现自己深陷困境
Mother Mary comes to me 圣母玛利亚来到我身边
Speaking words of wisdom, let it be 述说着智慧的话语，顺其自然
And in my hour of darkness 在我最黑暗的时刻
She is standing right in front of me 她就站在我面前
Let it be, let it be 随他去，顺其自然
Whisper words of wisdom, let it be 低语着智慧的话语，顺其自然
And when the broken hearted people 所有伤心的人们
Living in the world agree 生活在这个世界上
There will be an answer, let it be 都将会有一个答案，顺其自然
For though they may be parted 即使他们被迫分离
There is still a chance that they will see 他们仍有机会看到
Let it be, let it be 顺其自然，顺其自然
Let it be, let it be 顺其自然，顺其自然
Whisper words of wisdom, let it be 低语着智慧的话语随他去
And when the night is cloudy 阴云密布的夜空
There is still a light that shines on me 依旧有光照耀着我
Shine until tomorrow, let it be 直到明天，顺其自然
I wake up to the sound of music 我被音乐之声唤醒
Mother Mary comes to me 圣母玛利亚来到我身边
236
Self-evaluation
237
Unit 动词不定式
The Infinitive
怎么和别人打招呼呢？“Nice to see you.”如何表达自己的愿望呢？“I want to go

to America.”。你有没有想过，这些挂在嘴边的话，里面的 to 是什么呢？就让我们一起
来认识它吧。
30.1 动词不定式概述
动词不定式是一种活跃的非谓语动词。它在句中起的是名词、形容词或副词的作用，可
在句子中作主语、宾语、定语、状语和宾语补足语。动词不定式的形式是“to +动词原形”，
但 to 有时要省去。
动词不定式的各种形式如表 30-1 所示。
表 30-1 动词不定式的各种形式
主动形式被动形式
一般式 to do to be done
完成式 to have done to have been done
进行式 to be doing …
完成进行式 to have been doing …
238
30.2 动词不定式的基本用法
（1）动词不定式作主语，例如：
To master a language is not an easy thing.
掌握一门语言不是一件容易的事情。
To persevere means victory.
坚持就是胜利。
动词不定式作主语时可以放在后面，而用 it 作形式主语放在原主语的位置上，这样使句
子显得平稳些。例如：
It’s nice not to be dependent on them.
不依靠他们是好的。
It feels good to be out here for a while.
出来在这儿待一会儿是挺舒服的。
如果要说明不定式表示的动作是谁做的，可以在不定式前加一个 for 引起的短语。例如：
It is a great honor for us to be present at this rally.
我们来参加这个大会是很荣幸的。
It is not hard for one to do a bit of good.
一个人做点好事并不难。
在以某些形容词（如 kind, good, nice, wise, clever, silly, wrong, right, foolish, careless,
considerate, rude, naughty, impolite 等）作表语时，不定式前常可加一个 of 引起的短语，来说
明不定式指的是谁的情况。例如：
It is wise of them to turn down the proposal.
他们拒绝这个建议是明智的。
It is very nice of you to be so considerate.
你们想得这样周到是很好的。
（2）动词不定式作宾语，例如：
He promised me never to do it again.
他向我保证再也不做了。
有的及物动词要求跟复合宾语（即宾语+宾语补足语）。如果其中的宾语是不定式短语，
则必须将形式宾语 it 放在宾语的位置上，而将不定式短语（真正的宾语）放在宾语补足语之
前。例如：
I find it useful to learn English well.
我发现学好英语很有用。
We thought it wrong not to tell her.
239
我们认为不告诉她是错误的。
能以不定式作宾语的动词很多，常见的有 want, like, wish, hate, prefer, hope, continue,
manage, try, ask, offer, start, forget, promise, mean, pretend, intend, begin, attempt, decide, learn,
desire, agree, care, choose, determine, undertake, expect 等。
另外，tell, advise, show, teach, find out, decide, discuss, learn, forget 等动词常用一个带连接
代（副）词的不定式作宾语。例如：
They will teach us how to repair farm tools.
他们将教我们如何修理农具。
We must decide whether to go or stay.
我们得决定去还是留。
（3）动词不定式作表语，例如：
To see is to believe.
眼见为实。
To do this would be to cut the foot to fit the shoe.
这样做是削足适履。
（4）动词不定式作定语。动词不定式作定语，要放在它所修饰的名词或代词的后面。例
如：
I have nothing to say on this question.
对这个问题我无可奉告。
She is a very nice person to work with.
她是一个很好共事的人。
（5）动词不定式作状语。动词不定式及其短语具有副词的特性，可在句中用作状语。
① 放在句首也可以放在句尾表示目的、结果等。例如：
No one stopped to help her for the last hour or so.
已差不多一个小时了，没有一个人停下来帮他。
You should eat to live, not live to eat.
吃饭是为了活着，但活着不是为了吃饭。
What have I said to make you so excited?
我说了什么话使你这样激动？
另外，不定式也常用在 so as (to) 或 in order (to) 后，与其合起来作状语用，表示目的。
例如：
Let’s hurry so as not to be late for class.
咱们快点走，免得上课迟到。
In order to achieve this goal, we must learn from others.
240
为了实现这个目标，我们必须向别人学习。
② 跟在作表语的形容词或过去分词的后面。例如：
We are proud to be young people of China.
作为中国的青年我们感到自豪。
We should “not feel ashamed to ask and learn from people below”.
我们要不耻下问。
③ 用在 too ... to ... 结构中或是带有 enough 的句子中。例如：
He is too young to understand all that.
他太年轻了，不能理解这一切。
She was not old enough to understand all that.
她年岁不够大，不能理解这一切。
（6）动词不定式作宾语补足语。很多动词都有这样的用法，常见的动词有 ask, tell, invite,
compel, force, oblige, get, beg, allow, help, wish, want, expect, encourage, advise, persuade,
instruct, permit, remind, request, warn, press, urge 等。例如：
Her mother forbids her to go out.
她妈妈禁止她出去。
What made you think like that?
是什么使你这样想？

M: I go in quietly so as not to disturb the host.（in order, so as+不定式通常用来表示目
的，其中 so as to 只可用在句中。）There is no time to loose.（不定式一般在名词
式代词的后面作修饰语。）I am too hungry to go any farther.（too ... to ... 表示
“太……而不能……”，不定式用肯定形式表示否定意义。）I want to find something
to eat.（不定式一般在名词式代词的后面作修饰语。）I think it right for me to work
here.（在“for +名词式代词的宾格+不定式”中，名词式代词的宾格实际上是不
定式所表示的动作的逻辑主语。此句中，不定式短语 for me to work here 作宾语。
）
I consider the host (to be) too lazy.（believe, consider 等动词后的不定式主要是 to be,
to be 常可省略。）I felt it our duty to help others.（用形式宾语 it 代替不定式放在
谓语的后面，而把真正的作宾语的不定式放在句尾。）
H: It’s careless of me to forget to lock the door. To forgive is divine.（不定式在句中可
以充当主语，谓语动词一般要用单数形式。）
241
Task 1
选择题。
1. Mrs. Smith warned her son after drinking.
A. never to drive B. to never drive C. never driving D. never drive
2. Here isn’t any difference between the two. I really don’t know .
A. where to choose B. which to choose
C. to choose what D. to choose which
3. She pretended me when I passed by.
A. not to see B. not seeing C. to not see D. having not seen
4. Ella is the kind of person who people like to .
A. make friend with B. make friends of
C. make friends D. make friends with
5. Ben kept quiet about the scandal lose his job.
A. so not as to B. so as not to C. so as to not D. not so as to
30.3 动词不定式的时态
（1）不定式的一般形式所表示的动作，通常与主要谓语所表示的动作同时发生，或是在
它之后发生。例如：
Tell her we shall be delighted to come.
告诉她我们会很高兴来的。
They invited us to go there this summer.
他们邀请我们今年夏天到那儿去。
进行时形式表示由动词不定式表示的动作与主要动词所表示的动词发生在同一时间。
例如：
You are not supposed to be working. You haven’t quite recovered yet.
你现在不应当工作，你的病还没有完全好呢。
（2）当主要动词是 help, see, hear, watch 或 notice 等时，用不定式形式来表示两个动作
在同一时间发生。例如：
They saw her clean the room.
他们看见她在打扫房间。
I helped him (to) cross the street.
我帮助他过马路。
（3）与 expect, hope, intend, want 等动词的现在时连用时，不定式表示将来的动作。例如：
242
He expects to go there tomorrow.
他想明天去那儿。
I hope to see you again in a few days.
我希望几天后能再见到你。
（4）不定式的完成时表示所指的动作发生在主要动词表示的动作之前。例如：
I am sorry to have kept you waiting for so long time.
真抱歉让你等了这么久。
（5）如果主要谓语表示的动作发生时，不定式表示的动作正在进行，这时不定式就要用
进行时。例如：
They seem to be getting along quite well.
他们似乎相处得很好。
How did you come to be working here?
你是怎么来到这里工作的？
（6）如果不定式表示的是在谓语所表示时间之前一直进行的动作，就要用完成进行式。
例如：
I am happy to have been working with you.
我很愉快和你一起工作。
The struggle was known to have been going on for over 10 years.
据悉这场斗争已进行 10 多年了。
（7）然而在很多情况下，动词不定式仅仅指动作而不表示任何时间。例如：
It is easier to talk than to act.
说比做容易。
He likes to study in the library.
他喜欢在图书馆学习。
Task 2
用动词不定式补全下列句子。
1. It was a great achievement
（10 个月建成一栋 24 层的楼）.
2. The teacher decided
（不惩罚那些上课迟到的学生）.
3. Mr. Green was wondering
（是否去看望在法国的儿子）.
243
4. He feels it challenging
（在这么大一所大学做学生会主席）.
5. He was surprised
（在这个山村遇见一个中学同学）.
30.4 动词不定式的被动语态
当不定式逻辑上的主语是这个不定式所表示的动作的承受者时，不定式一般要用被动形
式。例如：
It is an honor for me to be asked to speak here.
我很荣幸被邀请在这里讲话。（做主语）
She preferred to be assigned some heavier work to do.
她宁愿给她些更重的活儿干。
（做宾语）
He wanted the letter to be typed at once.
他让把信马上打好。（做复合宾语）
The questions to be answered are on page 30.
需要回答的问题在第 30 页上。（做定语）
30.5 省略 to 的动词不定式
（1）在感官动词 see, feel, watch, hear, observe, notice, listen to, look at 等和使役动词 let,
make, have 等后，要跟不带 to 的动词不定式作宾语补足语。但这种句子一旦变成被动结构，
to 是不能省略的。例如：
I made them give her the money back.
我让他们把钱还给她。
I didn’t see you come in.
我没看见你进来。
She was often seen to act like that.
人们常常看见她这样做。
（2）有些动词（如 help）后面作宾补的不定式可以带 to，也可以不带 to。例如：
Help me get some salt.
帮我拿些盐。
（3）在 rather than, other than, would rather, had better, would sooner, had sooner, cannot but,
do nothing but (except) 等词组后，to 一般省略。例如：
244
We had better learn by heart as many sentence patterns as we can.
我们最好尽可能多地学习句型。
It is better to express your anger, rather than bottle it up.
生气宁可发泄出来而不要闷在心中。
（4）在一般的助动词或情态动词（如 do, will, shall, would, should, can, may, must 等）后
面，to 要省略掉。例如：
— May I come in?
能进来吗？
— Yes, please.
请进。
注意：在 ought 和 have 后不能省略 to。
（5）有时为了避免重复前面的动词，可以把一个不定式省略掉，单留下一个 to。例如：
I shall go if I want to.
如果我想去我就去。
— Do you want to give a speech on this subject?
你想就这个题目给大家谈谈吗？
— I prefer not to.
我想不谈为好。
30.6 介词 to 与不定式符号 to 的区别
英语中的不定式是以 to do something 的形式出现的，这里的 to 是不定式符号，没有实际

意义。然而，一些动词与介词 to 搭配构成短语，从形式上看，与不定式很相似，但是这里的
to 后面应该接动名词短语，如 look forward to, be accustomed to, get down to, object to, devote
oneself/sth. to, contribute to, adapt oneself to, be opposed to, be addicted to 等。例如：
We’re looking forward to seeing you very soon.
我们希望能很快见到你。
He is addicted to drinking/smoking.
杰克嗜好喝酒/吸烟。
He adapted (himself) to living on his own quickly.
他很快就适应了独立生活。
因此，我们要在学习中要不断积累并记忆此类词组。
245
30.7 不定式的特殊句型
1. too … to …
（1） “too … to …”意为“太……以至于……”。例如：
He is too excited to speak.
他太激动了，以至于说不出话来。
（2）如在 too 前有否定词，则整个句子用否定词表达肯定，too 后的那个词表达一种委婉
含义，意为“不太”。例如：
It’s never too late to mend.
改过不嫌晚。（谚语）
（3）当 too 前面有 only, all, but 时，意思是“非常……” ，等于 very。例如：
I’m only too pleased to be able to help you.
能帮助你我非常高兴。
He was but too eager to get home.
他非常想回家。
2. so as to
（1）表示目的，其否定式是 so as not to do。例如：
Tom kept quiet about the accident so as not to lose his job.
汤姆对事故保持沉默是为了不丢掉他的工作。
Go in quietly so as not to wake the baby.
轻点儿进去，别惊醒了婴儿。
（2）表示结果。例如：
Would you be so kind as to tell me the time?
劳驾，现在几点了？
M: I’m glad to see you.（不定式的简单形式由“to+动词原形”构成，其动作与主要动

词同时发生。在本句中，谓语 am glad 的状态与 see you 发生的时间几乎相同。）
W: Glad to see you, too. What are you doing here?
M: I will get money back from Tom. He promised to raise money for us.（to raise money
for us 发生在主要动词 promise 所表示的动作之后。）What are you doing here, Jane?
W: I come here to visit my fiancé. Tom promised to marry me. The evidence is not far to
246
seek.（seek, blame 的不定式常常用主动形式表被动意义。）
M: He must pretend to be sleeping.（不定式的进行时由“to+be+现在分词”构成，表示
在主要动词的动作发生时，不定式的动作正在进行。）
T: I am sorry to have kept you waiting for long.（不定式的完成时由“to+have+过去分
词”构成，表示不定式的动作发生在主要动词的动作之前。）
M: I will wait as long as I can get the money back.
T: Oh, I have a meeting to prepare. As to the money, how about tomorrow?
M: We really need the money. Please give me today.
T: But the meeting to be held tomorrow is very important.（不定式的被动语态的基本形式
是：to+be+过去分词。）
W: Peter, you have so much money. Give a little to John. OK?
T: My firm went into bankruptcy. Even my house is to let.（let 的不定式多用主动形式表
示被动含义，但如果后面接修饰语时，则通常用被动形式。）
W: You are a liar. I hate to have been treated like that.（to have been treated 是不定式的
完成时的被动形式。）
R ole Play
Task 3
选择题。
1. I saw him out of the room.
A. go B. had gone C. has gone D. goes
2. My mother is sleeping. You’d better .
A. not wake her up B. not to wake her up
C. not wake up her D. not to wake up her
3. I’ve heard him about you often.
A. spoke B. speaks C. speak D spoken
247
4. Though he had often made his little sister , today he was made by his little
sister.
A. cry; to cry B. crying; crying
C. cry; cry D. to cry; cry
5. I prefer rather than .
A. read; watch B. to read; watch
C. reading; to watch D. to read; to watch
Let’s Say
口头练习：在下列各句中，用所给的动词带一个不定式短语来转述某人的话。
allow remind order warn advise force require permit
Example: The professor said to Alan, “You may leave early.”

The professor allowed Alan to leave early.
Alan was allowed to leave early.
1. The general said to the soldiers, “Surround the enemy!”
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Bob said to me, “Don’t forget to take your book back to the library.”
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Paul thinks I have a good voice, so he said to me, “You should take singing lessons.”
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Mrs. Anderson was very stern and a little angry. She shook her finger at the children and said to
them, “Don’t play with matches!”
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
5. I am very relieved because the Dean of Admissions said to me, “You may register for school
late.”
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
248
I. 改错题。
1. The central purpose of management is for making every action or decision help achieve a carefully
A B C D
chosen goal.
2. You are required to be present at an English evening to hold at the auditorium on Sunday.
A B C D
3. The dromedary camel is raised especially to racing.
A B C D
4. A dictionary allows quick access to the meaning of a word only if one knows how spell the word.
A B C D
5. Before the invention of the clock people had to reliable on the celestial bodies to tell time.
A B C D
II. 选择题。
1. It’s kind you to help me do the homework. It’s hard me to finish it.
A. of; for B. for; of C. of; to D. for; for
2. They knew her very well. They had seen her up from childhood.
A. grow B. grew C. was growing D. to grow
3. The chair looks rather hard, but in fact it is very comfortable to .
A. sit B. sit on C. be sit D. be sat on
4. Last summer I took a course on .
A. how to make dresses B. how dresses be made
C. how to be made dresses D. how dresses to be made
5. We agreed here but so far she hasn’t turned up yet.
A. having met B. meeting C. to meet D. to have met
6. Tom kept practicing fail the driving test.
A. so not as to B. so as not to C. so as to not D. not so as to
7. Rather than on a crowded bus, he always prefers a bicycle.
A. ride; ride B. riding; ride C. ride; to ride D. to ride; riding
8. This problem is said three times.
A. to have been talked B. to have discussed
249
C. having been discussed D. to have been talked about
9. John, you must get your room after breakfast.
A. to be cleaned B. to clean C. cleaning D. cleaned
10. She did nothing at the photo.
A. except look B. but to look C. except to look D. but looking
11. I feel it an honor to speak here.
A. to be asked B. to ask C. having asked D. asked
12. this cake, you’ll need 2 eggs, 175 g sugar, and 175 g flour.
A. Having made, B. Make C. To make D. Making
13. With the plane in ten minutes, all the passengers on board were asked to turn off
their mobile phones.
A. taken off B. taking off C. to take off D. would take off
14. Zhou Lan doesn’t have to be made . She always studies very hard.
A. learn B. to learn C. learning D. learned
15. — Will you have anybody the flowers?
— Yes, I’ll have the flowers .
A. plant; planted B. to plant; planted
C. plant; to be planted D. to plant; plant
Fun Time
Do You Know How to Swim?
Once a learned man was crossing a river, wishing to enjoy himself. He began to talk to a
boatman.
“Do you know mathematics?” he asked.
“No, sir,” replied the boatman.
“Then you have lost one quarter of your life,” said the learned man. “Do you know
history？”
“No, sir,” answered the boatman.
“Then you have lost half of your life,” said the scholar.
“Do you know philosophy?” he said.
“I don’t know that, either,” said the boatman.
“Then you have lost three quarters of your life.”
250
Just then a sudden wind turned the boat upside down.
“Do you know how to swim?” asked the boatman.
“No, no,” replied the man of great learning.
“Well then,” replied the boatman. “You have lost your whole life.”
Self-evaluation
251
Unit 动名词
The Gerund
动名词，是不是很奇怪的一个名称？动词？名词？都不是。动名词，动词的变形，
兼具动词和名词的特性。下面就让我们一起来学习吧！
31.1 动名词概述
以-ing 结尾的具有动词含义的或有动词含义并起动词作用的名词称为动名词。动名词具
有名词的大部分特性，同时也具有动词的一些特性。
动名词的各种形式如表 31-1 所示。
表 31-1 动名词的各种形式
主动形式被动形式
一般式 doing being done
完成式 having done having been done
31.2 动名词的基本用法
（1）动名词作主语。例如：
Talking mends no holes.
252
空谈无济于事。（谚语）
Breathing became difficult on the summits.
在山顶上呼吸变得困难了。
It’s no use sending him over. It’s too late already.
派他去没用，已经太晚了。
（2）动名词作宾语。例如：
Would you mind filling out this form?
请填一下这张表好吗？
Have you finished correcting the students’ papers?
学生们的卷子改完没有？
suggest, finish, avoid, stop, can’t help, mind, admit, enjoy, leave off, require, postpone, put off,
delay, practice, fancy, excuse, pardon, consider, deny, endure, escape, miss 等动词都可以用动名词
作宾语（不能用不定式）。
在一些固定用法中，也需要动名词作宾语，如 can’t help doing, it’s no use doing, it’s worth
doing, be busy doing, feel like doing 等。
在 love, like, hate, prefer, begin, start, continue, intend, attempt, can’t bear, propose, want,
need, remember, forget, regret, neglect, try, deserve, can’ t afford 等动词后，可以用动名词作宾语，
也可以用不定式。例如：
They began talking (to talk) about something else.
他们开始谈别的事。
I propose making (to make) a change in the plan.
我建议把计划做一些改动。
接动名词和接不定式意思差别明显的有 remember, forget, regret, stop, want, need, try, mean,
go on 等词。例如：
I remember seeing her once somewhere.
我记得在哪里见过她。
I must remember to take my laptop with me.
我必须记住把电脑带着。
I regret not having accepted your advice.
我后悔没听你的劝告。
I regret to say I haven’t given you enough help.
我很遗憾地说我没给你足够的帮助。
253
Task 1
Can you make sentences with want to do, want doing, try to do and try doing, and explain the
differences between them?
（3）动名词作表语。例如：
Her job is raising pigs.
她的工作是养猪。
Reading is learning, but applying is also learning and the more important kind of learning at that.
读书是学习，使用也是学习，而且是更重要的学习。
（4）动名词作介词的宾语。它常可用在某些动词短语后面。例如：
He insisted on doing it in his own way.
他坚持要按自己的办法做。
We must be good at consulting the dictionary in our English learning.
我们在英语学习中要善于查阅字典。
能跟动名词的动词短语很多，常见的有 insist on, persist in, think of, dream of, suspect … of,
accuse … of, charge … with, hear of, approve of, prevent … from, be engaged in, look forward to,
oppose to, depend on, feel like, excuse … for, set about, get used to, be fond of, be capable of, be
keen on，等等。
（5）前面带有代词或名词的动名词结构。一个动名词短语前面可以加一个物主代词或名
词所有格，来表示这个动名词逻辑上的主语。例如：
Their coming to help was a great encouragement to us.
他们来支援对我们是很大的鼓舞。
I certainly enjoyed Tom’s singing.
我确实很欣赏汤姆的歌声。
在当代英语中，用代词宾格的情况也很多见，特别是当此结构不在句首时。例如：
Do you mind me making a suggestion?
你介意我提个建议吗？

W: I hate smoking.（动名词作动词的宾语时，动名词的动作者多是特指的。）
M: Then I decide to give up smoking.（动名词可以作动词短语的宾语。）
W: Talking mends no holes.（动名词的动作者是泛指的人，动名词在句中作主语。）
254
M: OK, action.
W: I am satisfied with your doing like this.（动名词作介语的宾语。）My god. I have never
heard that a parrot smokes.
M: Seeing is believing.（动名词 believing 和 seeing 的动作者是泛指的人，动名词作主
语和表语。）A smoking parrot is really before your eyes.（动名词作定语修饰名词。）
M: His new hobby, smoking cigarettes.（动名词短语 smoking cigarettes 作 his hobby 的同
位语。）
W: What else can he do?
M: Besides smoking, he can also talk to people in English, Japanese, French.（动名词作介
语的宾语。）
Task 1
选择题。
1. one’s work properly may be worse than not doing it at all.
A. Not to do B. Doing not C. Doing D. Not doing
2. Jack often tries to escape whenever he breaks traffic regulations.
A. being fined B. to be fined
C. having been fined D. to have been fined
3. Your hair wants . you’d better have it done tomorrow.
A. to cut B. cutting C. to be caught up D. being cut
4. The woman confessed to a lie to the CEO of the company.
A. tell B. have told C. telling D. having told
5. The teacher doesn’t permit in class.
A. to smoke B. smoke C. smoking D. to have a smoke
31.3 动名词的完成形式
动名词的现在时表示一个泛指的动作，或者表示与主要动词所指的动作同时发生的一个
动作。但动名词的完成时通常用来表示在主要动词所指的动作发生前所发生的动作。例如：
He didn’t mention having met me.
他没提见到了我。
I apologize for not having kept my promise.
我没遵守诺言，向你表示歉意。
255
31.4 动名词的被动形式
当一个动名词逻辑上的主语所表示的是这一动作的对象时，动名词一般要用被动形式。
例如：
So being killed by sharks was a common occurrence.
因此那时给鲨鱼吃掉是常有的事。
They couldn’t stand being treated like that.
他们无法忍受这样的待遇。
He didn’t mind being left at home.
把他留在家里他并不介意。
如果表示的动作在谓语表示的动作之前发生，有时需要用动名词的完成被动形式。例如：
I don’t remember having ever been given a chance to try this method.
我不记得谁给过我试验这方法的机会。
但多数情况下都避免使用这一形式，而用一般被动形式代替，以免显得累赘。
但要注意，在 want, need, deserve, require 等动词后，尽管表示的是被动的意思，却要用
主动形式。例如：
Your watch needs repairing.
你的表该修了。
She deserves praising.
她值得表扬。

M: Peter, what are you doing?
J: I am busy (in) cleaning the room.（be busy 表示忙于做某事，其后接一个动作时，
常用“in+动名词”表示，in 常可以省略。）
M: Where is Jane?
J: She has gone to do some shopping.（ “do+动名词”常表示做某种需要花费一定时间
的事，多在动名词之前加 some, any 等。）
M: Is it impudent of me to visit you without invitation?
J: It goes without saying that you are welcome to visit me at any time.（go without saying
意为“不用说”、 “毫无疑义”或“不成问题”等。）
256
M: Good brother. Then can you lend me some money?
J: There is no use (in) talking to me about it.（there is no use 意为“没有用或没有好处”，
后接一动作时，常用“in+动名词”表示，in 常常可以省略。）
M: What do you mean?
J: I mean it’s no use asking me.（be no use 后面虽然可以接不定式，但通常要接动名
词。）
M: Then who should I ask?
J: Of course, Jane.
M: Oh, I see. Can I smoke?
J: No smoking. The rule is set by Jane.（ “no+动名词”用于表示禁止或不准的简短命令
式法规，其后不可接宾语。）
M: She is not here now. Why not try one?
J: But …
M: It’s really difficult for you to decide.
J: No, I will have no difficulty (in) deciding.（在名词 difficulty 后面，常可用“in+动名
词”作修饰语，in 常常可以省略。）
M: Then do it right now, buddy!
R ole Play
31.5 名词化的动名词
一个动名词有时可以进一步名词化，具有更多名词的特点；它可以有自己的冠词，有定
语修饰，在某些情况下甚至有复数形式。例如：
We should give the classroom a good cleaning.
我们应该把教室好好打扫一下。
I have some shopping to do this afternoon.
我今天下午要去买点儿东西。
257
Please take our greetings to them.
请代我们向他们致意。
这种动名词可以称为名词化的动名词。它在具有更多名词特点的同时，也丧失了许多动
词的特点：它不再有完成形式和被动形式，不能再有自己的状语和宾语。
问题：请想想你还学过哪些名词化的动名词？
Task 2
用动名词形式补全下列句子。
1. He didn’t mention
（见到了我）.
2. I apologize for
（没遵守诺言）.
3. This question is far from
（解决）.
4. Her method is worth
（试一下）.
5. Thank you for
（给我们这么多的帮助）.
Let’s Say
口头练习：用所给的词语造句，可以选用任何时态和主语。
Example: enjoy +read the newspaper
I enjoy reading the newspaper every morning while I’m having my first cup of coffee.
1. mind + open the window
______________________________________________________________________________
2. quit + eat desserts
______________________________________________________________________________
3. get through + eat dinner
______________________________________________________________________________
4. avoid + answer my question
______________________________________________________________________________
5. postpone + do my work
______________________________________________________________________________
258
6. delay + leave on vacation
______________________________________________________________________________
7. consider + get a job
______________________________________________________________________________
8. mention + go to a concert
______________________________________________________________________________
I. 选择题。
1. My wife said in her letter that she would appreciate from you sometime.
A. to have heard B. to hear C. for hearing D. hearing
2. The thief took away the woman’s wallet without .
A. being seen B. seeing C. him seeing D. seeing him
3. No one can avoid by advertisements.
A. to be influenced B. being influenced C. influencing D. having influence
4. He thought that .
A. the effort doing the job was not worth
B. the effort was not worth in doing the job
C. it was not worth the effort doing the job
D. it was not worth the effort by doing the job
5. If I had remembered the door, the things would not have been stolen.
A. to lock B. locking C. to have locked D. having locked
6. How can you keep the machine when you are away?
A. run B. to run C. running D. being run
7. You can’t help commercials; every few minutes the program is interrupted to give
you one advertisement or another.
A. to hear B. to be heard C. hearing D. with hearing
8. My transistor radio isn’t working. It .
A. need repairing B. needs to repair C. needs repairing D. need to be repaired
9. The suspect at last admitted stolen goods but denied them.
A. receiving; selling B. to receive; to sell
C. to receiving; to selling D. to have received; to have sold
10. Tony, would you go and see if Sam has any difficulty his tape recorder?
259
A. to fix B. fixing C. for fixing D. fix
II. 补全下列句子。
1. We should give the room （好好打扫一次）.
2. He took a great delight in （帮助别人）.
3. I haven’t succeeded in （说服他）.
4. （见到你）has been a great pleasure.
5. He avoided （给我们作肯定的回答）.
III. 翻译下列句子。
1. 我最喜欢的运动是游泳。
2. 今天去没有用，他不会在家。
3. 他们都对爬山感兴趣。
4. 请原谅我来晚了。
5. 这个问题需要仔细地研究。
Listen to the song. Choose the correct words or phrases.
Holiday! Celebrate!
Holiday! Celebrate!
If we（took / had）a holiday

Took some time to（celebrate / have fun）
Just one（week / day）out of life
It would be, it would be so（great / nice）
Everyone spread the（word / news）
We’re gonna to have a（party / celebration）
All across the world
In every（nation / country）
260
It’s time for the（happy / good）times
Forget about the（old / bad）times, oh yeah
One day to（live / come）together
To release the pressure
We（need / want）a holiday
We can turn this（place / world）around

And bring back all of those happy（days / times）
Put your troubles down
It’s time to（celebrate / have fun）
Let love shine
And we will（find / get）
A way to（live / come）together
Can make（life / things）better
We（need / want）a holiday
Holiday! Celebrate!
Holiday! Celebrate!
Holiday! Celebrate!
Holiday! Celebrate!
Self-evaluation
261
Unit 分词
The Participle
21 世纪注定是一个网络时代，各种网络词汇也应运而生，有些是土生土长的，如
“神马都是浮云” （“什么都是浮云”的谐音）、鸭梨（ “压力”的谐音）；有些是舶来品，
如博客（blog）；而有些则是中西合璧，如 gelivable（给力）、工作 ing。ing 在英语中表
示某个动作正在进行，是现在分词的构成要件。下面就让我们认识一下现在分词及与其
相对的过去分词吧。
32.1 分词的基本概念
分词分为现在分词（The Present Participles）和过去分词（The Past Participles）。现在分

词与过去分词的区别在于：现在分词表示主动的、正在进行的动作，而及物动词的过去分词
表示已经完成且被动的动作，不及物动词的过去分词只表示完成的意义。
32.2 分词的形式
现在分词的形式如表 32-1 所示。
262
表 32-1 现在分词的形式
一般式 V-ing
否定式 not V-ing
完成式 having done
被动一般式 being done
被动完成式 having been done
过去分词的形式如表 32-2 所示。
表 32-2 过去分词的形式
一般式 V-ed
否定式 not V-ed
32.3 分词的语法功能
1. 作定语
（1）单个的分词作定语，一般放在被修饰词的前面，也叫前置修饰语。及物动词的现在
分词作定语强调主动，过去分词强调被动。例如：
the excited audience 激动的观众 an exciting speech 激动人心的演讲
a conquered army 吃了败仗的军队 a conquering army 攻无不克的军队
a recorded talk 被录制的谈话 a recording machine 录音机
（2）不及物动词的现在分词作定语强调动作正在进行，过去分词强调完成，不表被动。
例如：
boiling water 正在沸腾的水 boiled water 已经沸腾过的水
fading flowers 正在凋谢的花朵 faded flowers 已经凋谢的花朵
a drowning man 一个快要淹死的人 a drowned man 一个已经淹死的人
falling leaves 正在飘落的树叶 fallen leaves 落叶
（3）分词短语作定语放在被修饰词的后面也相当于一个定语从句。例如：
Who is the man standing by the door?
站在门边的那个人是谁？
The first textbook written for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 16th
century.
将英语作为外语教授的第一本教科书于 16 世纪问世。
263
The students playing in the playground are my classmates.
在操场上玩耍的学生们是我的同学。
These plastic bottles used already can be recycled.
这些已经用过的塑料瓶子可以回收。

A: What’s wrong?
B: This is a moving story.（现在分词表示主动意义。在本句中相当于“This is a story
that moves people.” 。）
B: I was deeply moved by it.（过去分词表示被动意义。）
A: Woman! You are too woman!
C: Help! Help!
B: Someone must be drowning.（现在分词表示进行中的动作。）
A: It is really a surprising news.
B: The surprised people are running to site of accident.
B: Oh, my dear! The drowned man can not come back to life.（过去分词表示动作已经完
成。）
A: Excuse me! Excuse me! Give me a way, please. The drowned man is my father.
R ole Play
Task 1
选择正确的分词填空。
1. China is a (developing, developed) country.
2. America is a (developing, developed) country.
3. His son was (disappointing, disappointed). The old man felt unhappy.
264
4. His son was (disappointing, disappointed), so he regretted not having prepared much
for the test.
2. 作表语
作表语时，现在分词表示事物的性质或特征，表主动的状态；过去分词表示人的感受，
表被动的状态。例如：
The news is surprising.
这消息令人吃惊。
We are surprised at the news.
我们对这则消息感到吃惊。
I am very interested in the interesting story.
我对这个有趣的故事非常感兴趣。
We are all tired of such a tiring question.
我们都厌烦无聊的问题。
Task 2
用所给词的正确形式填空。
1. I had nothing to do. I was (bore) and lonely.
2. Jack looked even more (amaze) than he felt.
3. The results were very (disappoint).
4. I was thanked by the (satisfy) customer.
3. 作补语
分词作补语时，通常用在感官动词（see, hear, feel, notice, find, watch）和役动动词（make,
have, keep, get, leave, catch, set）之后。下面以感官动词 see 为例来解析分词作补语的内涵：
（1）see sb./sth. do（主动、动作的全过程）
（2）see sb./sth. doing（主动、动作正在发生）
（3）see sb./sth. done（被动、动作的全过程）
（4）see sb./sth. being done（被动、动作正在发生）
例如：
I found my car missing.
我发现我的车不见了。
I’ll have my watch repaired.
我想把我的手表修一下。
265
After the Arab states won independence, great emphasis was laid on expanding education,
with girls as well as boys been encouraged.
阿拉伯国家赢得独立后，特别重视扩大教育，不但鼓励男孩子入学，而且鼓励女孩入学。
Make yourself heard and understood.
让别人能够听到并且理解你说的话。
Task 3
选择题。
1. Please keep us of the latest news.
A. to inform B. informed C. informing D. having informed
2. He left us and the work .
A. waiting; unfinished B. waited; unfinishing
C. to wait; to finish D. to wait; unfinished
3. Can you get the clock ?
A. to repair B. to repairing C. repaired D. having repaired
4. Can you get the clock again?
A. go B. gone C. goes D. going
5. I caught the boy in the exam.
A. cheating B. cheated C. cheat D. to cheat
4. 作状语
现在分词作状语表示主动，过去分词（短语）作状语表示被动。分词作状语时表示时间、
原因、理由、条件、让步等，相当于一个状语从句。分词作状语时，选择现在分词还是过去
分词，关键看主句，如果分词的动作是主句的主语发出的，分词就选用现在分词，反之就用
过去分词。例如，
Seen from the top, the stadium looks like a bird nest.
从上面看，体育场好像一个鸟巢。
Seeing from the space, the astronaut can not discover the Great Wall.
从太空看，宇航员看不到长城。
Used for a long time, the book looks old.
由于用了很长时间，这本书看上去很旧。
Using the book, I find it useful.。
在使用的过程中，我发现这本书很有用。
266
A: I’ve just got promoted. I will treat you to a dinner.
B: Great! This piece of news is exciting.（现在分词作表语。）
C: Yeah! This is quite an exciting news.（分词可以在名词前作修饰语。在本句中，exciting
修饰 news。）
A: Where shall we go?
B: I know a good restaurant called April Fools.
A: April Fools? The restaurant is strangely named.（过去分词用作表语。）I never heard a
restaurant named like this.（过去分词可以在 feel, hear, keep, notice, see 等动词的宾语
后面作补足语，表示被动，通常表示已经完成的动作。）
C: Oh, the restaurant is right beside the shopping mall. But going to that restaurant is a
long way.（going to that restaurant 作主语。）
A: Those not wanting to go can stay here.（分词可以在名词的前面或后面作修饰语，但
在修饰代词时只能用在代词的后面。在本句中，wanting 在代词 those 后面作修饰
语。）
C: That is too much. I have never heard anyone talking to me like this.（现在分词可以在
feel, find, hear, keep, see 等动词或者动词短语的后面作补足语，表示和主要动词的
动作是同时发生的。）
B: All right, stop quarrelling. I have something else to do. I meet you there at five.
C: It’s seven now. We’d call him.
A: OK. Hello, Peter, where are you now?
B: I am at home. Where are you?
A: We are at April Fools’.
B: Ha ha! That’s the right place for you.
A: What did you say?
B: Remember what day is it today? April Fools’ Day.
A: What is April Fools’ Day?
R ole Play
267
Task 4
判断下列句子的正误。
1. ( ) Given another chance, the job could be better done.
2. ( ) Given another chance, I could do the job better.
3. ( ) Although built thirty years ago, we find the house very beautiful.
4. ( ) Although built thirty years ago, the house looks very beautiful.
选择题。
1. The repairs cost a lot, but it’s money well .
A. to spend B. spent C. being spent D. spending
2. The prize of the game show is $30,000 and an all expenses vacation to China.
A. paying B. paid C. to be paid D. being paid
3. The disc, digitally in the studio, sounded fantastic at the party that night.
A. recorded B. recording C. to be recorded D. having recorded
4. Linda worked for the Minnesota Manufacturing and Mining Company, as 3M.
A. knowing B. known C. being known D. to be known
5. the earth to be flat, many feared that Columbus would fall off the edge of the earth.
A. Having believed B. Believing C. Believe D. Being believed
6. some officials, Napoleon inspected his army.
A. Followed B. Followed by C. Being followed D. Having been followed
7. There was a terrible noise the sudden burst of light.
A. followed B. being followed C. to be followed D. following
8. , liquids can be changed into gases.
A. Heating B. To be heated C. Heated D. Heat
9. better attention, the vegetables could have grown better with the sun shining brightly
in the sky and them light.
A. Giving; given B. Given; given C. Giving; giving D. Given; giving
10. Unless to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.
A. invited B. inviting C. being invited D. having invited
11. many times, the problems were settled at last.
A. Discussing B. Being discussed C. After discussing D. Discussed
268
12. in the fog, we were forced to spend two hours in the woods.
A. To lose B. Losing C. Lost D. Having lost
13. in white, she looks much more beautiful.
A. Wearing B. Dressing C. Dressed D. Worn
14. , the old man is living a happy life.
A. Taking good care B. Taken good care
C. Having taken good care D. Taken good care of
15. The old man walked in the street, .
A. followed by his son B. followed his son
C. and following his son D. and followed by his son
16. With trees, flowers and grass everywhere, my native town has taken on a new look.
A. planting B. planted C. to plant D. to be planted
17. the programme, they have to stay there for another two weeks.
A. Not completing B. Not completed
C. Not having completed D. Having not completed
18. from other countries for millions of years, Australia has many plants and animals not
found in any other country in the world.
A. Being separated B. Having separated
C. Having been separated D. To be separated
Fun Time
Please read the following joke, and pay attention to the participles used in it.
The Three Stars
One day Steven Spielberg（斯蒂芬·斯皮尔伯格）, Arnold Schwarzenegger（阿诺德·斯

瓦辛格） , and Pierce Brosnan（皮尔斯·布鲁斯南）were in a jungle in order to take some shots
for a movie. Unfortunately, they were caught by a tribal group. As they were about to be
executed they pleaded to the Queen of the Tribe for her mercy. She said, ‘‘Get me something
good to eat. If I like it, you will be freed.’’ The three stars looked at each other and agreed. They
then went into the jungle to look for some food. Spielberg was the first to come back. He came
up to the altar and offered grapes. She tasted one and immediately spat it out. She ordered her
servants to shove the rest of them up his ass. The servants finished their duty, leaving a
screaming Spielberg. Schwarzenegger was the next to arrive with some yummy apples. The
269
same thing happened to him, but curiously he laughed as the apples were shoved up his ass.
Spielberg was shocked. Here he was with grapes up his ass howling in pain, but
Schwarzenegger had several apples in his ass and he was still laughing. He asked him ‘‘What
the hell are you laughing at?’’ A laughing Schwarzenegger replied ‘‘Pierce is coming back with
a watermelon.’’
Self-evaluation
270
Unit 独立主格结构
The Absolute
Structure
我们在生活中将这也不像那也不像的东西称作“四不像”，英语中也存在这样的情
况：如果说是句子，却没有谓语动词；如果说是非谓语动词，可又带有自己的主语。下
面就让我们来认识一下这种特殊的结构——独立主格结构吧！
33.1 独立主格结构的概念
独立主格结构由两部分组成，前一部分是名词或者代词，后一部分是非谓语动词（不定
式、动名词和分词）或形容词、副词及介词短语，前后两部分具有逻辑主谓关系。这种结构
与主句不发生句法上的联系，它的位置相当灵活，可置于主句前、主句末或主句中，常由逗
号将其与主句分开。需要特别注意的是，独立主格结构与主句之间不能使用任何连接词。独
立主格结构本身不是句子，在句子中作状语，表示时间、原因、条件、伴随、目的等。
33.2 独立主格结构的基本构成形式
独立主格结构的基本构成形式如表 33-1 所示。
271
表 33-1 独立主格结构的基本构成形式
1. 名词（代词）+ 非谓语动词（不定式、现在分词、过去分词）
2. 名词（代词）+ 非谓语动词（being）+ 形容词、副词、介词短语、名词
3. with/without + 复合宾语（不定式、现在分词、过去分词、形容词、副词、介词短语）
1. 非谓语动词独立主格结构
（1）现在分词通常表示动作正在进行（或当时正在进行）。但有时现在分词不表示进行，
而表示一般情况的状态或动作。例如：
The children playing in the room, I couldn’t fix my attention on studying.
孩子们在房间里玩耍，使我无法集中精力学习。
Their room was on the third floor, its window overlooking the sports ground.
他们的房间位于三楼，窗户俯视着操场。
（2）名词（代词）+过去分词，过去分词通常表示被动意义或完成意义。例如：
The problems solved, he felt completely relieved.
问题解决后，他感觉如释重负。
Everything considered, we are sure to hold a successful annual conference.
一切（所有）事情都考虑到了，我们一定会举办一次成功的年会。
（3）在“名词/代词 + 动词不定式”结构中，如果动词不定式和它前面的名词或代词存在逻
辑上的主谓关系，动词不定式使用主动的形式；如果是动宾关系，使用被动形式。例如：
We divided the work, I to translate the former part of the book, he to translate the latter part of
it.
我将任务进行了分配，我翻译这本书的前半部分，他翻译后半部分。
They said good-bye to each other, one to go to the shopping mall, the other to go to visit a
friend.
他们相互道别后，一个去了购物中心，一个去拜访朋友了。
试比较：
The food being cooked, the boy was watching TV.
那个男孩一边做着饭，一边看电视。（两个动作同时进行）
The manager looks relaxed, many things settled.
解决了许多问题后，经理看上去很轻松。（事情已经处理好了，用过去分词 settled 表示
动作已经结束）
The manager looks worried, many things to settle.
有许多事情需要解决，经理看起来非常忧虑。（事情还没有处理且由经理本人来处理，用
不定式 to settle，表示将来的时间）
272
Task 1
指出下列句子中带有独立主格的句子。
1. Weather permitting, they will go and visit the zoo.
2. Lacking of money, his parents couldn’t send him to university.
3. All things considered, I think we ought to give the job to Mike.
4. Put into use in April 2000, the hotline was meant for residents reporting water and heating
supply breakdowns.
5. To learn English well, we students should put our whole heart into study and practice
6. A lot of work to do, he had no time to talk with us.
2. 名词（代词）+非谓语动词（being）+ 形容词、副词、介词短语、名词
（1）名词（代词）+形容词。例如：
So many students (being) absent from his class, the English teacher became very angry.
很多学生缺课，英语老师非常生气。
He entered the room, his face (being) pale.
他进入房间，脸色苍白。
（2）名词（代词）+副词。例如：
The last class in the morning (being) over, the students, together with the teacher, hurried to
the dinning hall.
上午的最后一节课下课后，学生们和老师匆匆走向食堂。
The lights (being) off, the students were still talking and laughing in the dorms.
熄灯后，学生仍然在宿舍里说说笑笑。
（3）名词（代词）+名词，例如：
Twenty people died in the accident in Gansu Province, many of them (being) children.
有 20 人在甘肃发生的交通事故中丧生，其中许多是儿童。
He found the robber, a stick (being) his only weapon.
他发现了抢劫犯，手里的棍子是他的唯一武器。
（4）名词（代词）+介词短语。在表示方式的独立主格结构中，为了使句子简洁，往往
将“逻辑主语+介词短语”中的冠词或代词都省略。例如：
The experienced teacher stepped into the classroom confidently, book in hand.
那位经验丰富的老师自信地走进教室，手里拿着书。
She came in, smile on face.
她走进房间，脸色洋溢着笑容。
注意：独立主格结构中的 being 在下列两种情况下一般不能省略：
273
① 在“There being +名词”结构中；
② 在逻辑主语是代词的情况下。
例如：
There being no bus, we had to walk home.
由于没有公共汽车，我们不得不步行回家。
It being Sunday, all the offices are closed.
因为是星期天，所有的办公室都关门了。
Task 2
用独立结构完成下列句子。
1. The little girl entered the room, （脸冻红了）.
2. （产量上升了 60%）
，the company has had another excellent year.
3. Many students come to visit the city, （其中大多数是大学生）.
4. （肩上扛着枪）, the hunter went into the forest.
3. with 和 without 引导的独立主格结构

由“with (without) +宾语（名词/代词）+宾语补足语”构成的独立主格结构，宾语通常由
名词或代词充当，但代词一定要用宾格。例如：
With winter coming on, the trees turn yellow and some birds fly south.
随着冬天的临近，树木变黄了，鸟儿向南飞了。（with +名词/代词+动词的-ing 形式）
Without a word more spoken, the manager left the meeting room.
没有再说一句话，经理离开了会议室。（without+名词/代词+动词的-ed 形式）
With lots of homework to do, the students had to stay up late.
由于有许多作业要做，学生不得不熬夜。（with+名词/代词+动词不定式）
Even in winter, the boy sleeps with the windows open.
就是（甚至）在冬天，学生也开着窗睡觉。（with+名词/代词+形容词）
The boy was walking, with his father ahead.
那个男孩步行走着，他的父亲走着前面。（with+名词/代词+副词）
She sat at the furnace, with her head in the hands.
她坐在火炉旁，双手抱着头。（with+名词/代词+介词短语）
注意：在 with 和 without 引导的独立主格结构中，多数情况下 with 能省略，但 without 不
能省略。例如：
With his homework done, Peter went out to play.
His homework done, Peter went out to play.
274
做完作业后，彼得出去玩了。
Without any game to play, the boy looked upset.
没有游戏可玩，男孩看起来闷闷不乐。
Task 3
用独立结构改正下列句子中的错误。
1. I couldn’t do my homework with all that noise went on.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. With the signal to give, the train started.
______________________________________________________________________________
3. They started off late and got to the airport with minutes spared.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. He stood in the rain, with his clothes wetly.
______________________________________________________________________________
5. He stood at the door, with computer in his hand.
______________________________________________________________________________
33.3 独立主格结构的句法功能
独立主格结构在句中一般作状语，表示时间、条件、原因、伴随状况等，还可以作定语。
（1）作时间状语。例如：
The work done (=After the work had been done), we went home.
完成工作后，我们都回家了。
Everyone having sat down (=When everyone had sat down), the teacher began his class.
所有人都入座后，老师开始上课。
（2）作条件状语。例如：
Weather permitting (=If weather permits), they will visit the Summer Palace.
如果天气允许，他们将去参观颐和园。
My health allowing (=If my health allows), I will work far into the night.
如果健康允许，我将工作到深夜。
（3）作原因状语。例如：
The weather terribly cold (=Because the weather was terribly cold), we entered the room to
warm ourselves.
由于天气非常冷，我们进入房间暖和一下。
275
The boy leading the way (=Because the boy led the way), we had no trouble getting out of the
forest.
由于有男孩领路，我们很容易地走出了森林。
（4）作伴随状语。例如：
The mother was cleaning the house, her baby playing on the bed (=and her baby was playing
on the bed).
母亲在打扫屋子，她的孩子在床上玩耍。
The students are walking in the school happily, each wearing a card in front of his chest (=and
each is wearing a card in front of his chest).
学生们幸福地走在校园里，每个人胸前都戴着卡。
（5）with 和 without 引导的独立主格结构可作后置定语修饰名词。例如：
Soon she arrived at a park with grass green and flowers in blossom.
= Soon she arrived at a park whose grass was green and whose flowers were in blossom.
她很快就到达了满是绿草和鲜花的公园。
The new building with its windows facing south is our office.
=The new building whose windows face south is our office.
窗户朝南的大楼是我们的办公室。
33.4 使用独立主格结构的注意事项
（1）要注意独立主格结构与独立成分的异同。有些分词短语可以独立存在，在句子中没
有逻辑上的主语，作为习惯用法使用。这些短语有：generally speaking（总的说来），frankly
speaking（坦率地说），judging from（从……判断），supposing（假设），等等。例如：
Generally speaking, the rule is very easy to understand.
一般来说，规则不难理解。
Judging from what he said, he must be an honest man.
从他的谈吐判断，他一定是一个诚实的人。
有些固定短语是带 to 的不定式，表明说话人的立场或态度，在句中作独立成分。这些
短语有：to be honest（老实说），to be sure（确实），to tell you the truth（说实话），to cut a long
story short（长话短说），to be frank（坦率地说），to make matters/things worse（更糟糕的是），
等等。例如：
To tell you the truth, I made a mistake in the word spelling.
说实话，我在单词拼写时拼错了一处。
（2）独立主格结构与分词短语都可以转换为状语从句。但是，独立主格结构转换为状语
从句后，它有自己的逻辑主语，与主句的主语不一致；而分词短语转换为状语从句后，从句
276
的主语与主句的主语一致。例如：
If time permits, we’d better have a holiday at weekends.
→ Time permitting, we’d better have a holiday at weekends.
如果时间允许，我们最好在周末去度假。
When we see from the hilltop, we can find the city more beautiful.
→ Seeing from the hilltop, we can find the city more beautiful.
从山顶上看，我们发现这个城市更美了。
选择题。
1. a man who expresses himself effectively is sure to succeed more rapidly than a man
whose command of language is poor.
A. Other things being equal B. Were other things equal
C. To be equal to other things D. Other things to be equal
2. So many directors ，the board meeting had to be put off.
A. were absent B. been absent
C. had been absent D. being absent
3. The speech , a lively discussion start.
A. being delivered B. was delivered
C. be delivered D. having been delivered
4. People couldn’t help the foolish emperor in the procession.
A. laugh at B. to laugh at
C. laughing at D. laughing on
5. All things , the planed trip will have to be called off.
A. be considered B. considered
C. considering D. having considered
6. If the building project by the end of this month is delayed, the construction
company will be fined.
A. to be completed B. is completed
C. being completed D. complete
7. Not far from the school there was a garden, owner seated in it playing chess with
his little grandson every afternoon.
A. its B. whose C. which D. that
277
8. The meeting over, we all left the room.
A. is B. to be C. being D. would be
9. European football is played in 80 countries, it the most popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
10. such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.
A. Having suffered B. Suffering
C. To suffer D. Suffered
11. The fish bad, the children left much of it .
A. tasted; untouched B. tasting; untouched
C. tasting; untouching D. tasted; untouching
12. in the United States, St. Louis has now become the 24th largest city.
A. being the fourth biggest city B. It was once the fourth biggest city
C. Once the fourth biggest city D. The fourth biggest city it was
13. , we all went home happily.
A. Goodbye was said B. Goodbye had been said
C. Goodbye said D. When goodbye said
14. , we all went shopping in good mood.
A. It being fine weather B. It fine weather
C. It was fine weather D. It being a fine weather
15. , we will surely succeed.
A. The teacher helping us B. The teacher to help us
C. The teacher will help us D. With the teacher helping
16. , the leaves are turning green.
A. When spring coming on B. Spring coming on
C. Spring came on D. Spring being come on
17. He stood there silently, his lips .
A. trembling B. trembled C. were trembling D. were trembling
18. Everyone their seats, the lecture began.
A. taken B. taking C. having taken D. to take
19. The storm their house, they had to live with their relatives.
A. destroyed B. destroying
C. having destroyed D. being destroyed
20. It’s quite strange that the man sleeps with his mouth and his eyes .
A. closed; open B. closed; opened
C. closing; open D. closing; opening
278
Fun Time
顺口溜教你学英语独立主格结构
独立结构要认清，名代之后副或形，
或是分词或介短，with 结构不可轻，
名代二词是其主，句子结构必分明，
独立结构好掌握，句中作用只一个，
千变万化皆做状，其中意义也不多，
时间条件和原因，方式伴随没别的，
状从和其前三个，可以互变不难学。
Self-evaluation
279
Unit 倒装句
The Inversion
如何避免句子头重脚轻呢？如何做到重点突出呢？这就需要求助于倒装句。下面就
让我们一起来学习一下倒装句吧！
34.1 倒装句概述
主语和谓语是句子的核心，它们之间存在图 34-1 所示的两种语序。
图 34-1 英语句子的语序
例如：
I saw Mary in the shopping mall yesterday.
昨天我在购物中心见到玛丽了。（自然语序）
Only in this way can we solve the problem.
只有用这种方法才能解决这个问题。（倒装语序）
280
倒装语序中又有完全倒装（Full Inversion）和部分倒装（Partial Inversion）两种。
34.2 完全倒装
完全倒装（The Full Inversion），又称“全部倒装” ，是指将句子中的谓语动词全部置于主

语之前。此结构通常只用于一般现在时和一般过去时。完全倒装主要用于以下几种情况。
（1）由 here, there, now, then 引导的句子，其谓语动词是 be, go, come, exist, follow 等时，
句子采用完全倒装的语序。例如：
Here is a letter for you.
这里有你的一封信。
There still exist some problems.
还存在一些问题。
There goes the bell.
铃响了。
Now comes your turn.
现在轮到你了。
Then came a new difficulty.
又出现了一个新困难。
注意：代词做主语时，只把该副词提前，主谓语序不变。例如：
Here it is.
就是这儿。
There you go again.
你又来了。
（2）有时为了使叙述或描绘更加生动形象，增加语言效果，可将表示方向的副词（如 down,
up, out, in, off, on, away 等）或拟声词（bang, crack 等）置于句首，句子采用完全倒装的语序
（主语为人称代词的句子除外）。例如：
Up went the rocket into the air.
火箭升入空中。
Down jumped the criminal from the third floor when the policeman pointed his pistol at him.
当警察用枪指着罪犯的时候，他就从三层跳了下来。
Away went the children.
孩子们离开了。
Out rushed a tiger from the bushes.
一只老虎从丛林了冲出来。
以上句子简洁明快，生动逼真地描述了有关动作，令我们一览此类倒装的风采。倒装句
281
的修辞功能在语段中可以体现得更为清楚。倒装是英语中一个重要的修辞手段。倒装句的使
用丰富了我们的语言表达，了解并掌握倒装句各种句式的用法，不仅会提高我们对英语语言
的欣赏能力，而且对英语表达能力的提高也将大有裨益。因此，写作中适当用一些倒装句式
定会使文章表达得更生动、有力。例如：
“Stop thief! Stop thief!” There is a magic cry in the sound. The tradesman leaves his counter, ...
Away they run, pell — mell, helter — skelter, yelling — screaming, ...
“Stop thief! Stop thief!” The cry is taking by a hundred voices; Away they fly, splashing
through the mud, up go the window, out run the people. (Dickens)
以上段落中，作者在第一段和第二段中分别将副词 away, up 和 out 置于句首引出四个倒
装句 Away they run, Away they fly, up go the window, out run the people，从而制造出一种紧张、
急促的气氛，生动地刻画了一个紧张、混乱的捉贼场面。
注意：代词做主语时，只把该副词提前，主谓语序不变。例如：
In he comes.
他进来了。
Up it flew.
它向上飞。
Here you are.
给你。
（3）地点状语提前，为了保持句子平衡且谓语是 be, stand, sit, lie 等动词时，句子采用完
全倒装的语序。例如：
On the grass lie a group of boys.
草地上躺着一群男孩。
Under the tree stands a girl.
树下站着一个女孩。
In the village live two blind men.
村子里住着两个盲人男子
On every piece of paper was a picture of a horse.
每张纸上画着一匹马。
From a speaker on the wall comes the doctor’s voice.
从墙上的扬声器里传来了医生的声音。
（4）表语位于句首时，倒装结构为“表语+连系动词+主语”。
① 形容词+连系动词+主语。例如：
Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.
出席会议的有怀特教授、史密斯教授和其他一些贵宾。
② 过去分词+连系动词+主语。例如：
282
Gone are the days when they could do what they liked to the Chinese people.
他们对中国人为所欲为的日子一去不复返了。
③ 现在分词+连系动词+主语。例如：
Lying on the floor was a boy.
地板上躺着一个男孩。
④ 介词短语+be+主语。例如：
Among the goods are Christmas trees, flowers and toys.
商品中有圣诞树、鲜花和玩具。
Task 1
1. 车来了。
2. 孩子们冲出来了。
3. 山谷里传来一声喊叫。
4. 出席晚会的有海滨学院的院长，还有许多别的宾客。
5. 坐在地上的是一群年轻人。
34.3 部分倒装
部分倒装（The Partial Inversion）指将谓语的一部分，如助动词或情态动词，倒装至主语

之前，而谓语动词无变化。如果句中的谓语没有助动词或情态动词，则需添加助动词 do, does
或 did，并将其置于主语之前。
（1）only 所修饰的副词、介词短语或状语从句放在句首时，要进行部分倒装。例如：
Only then did I realize the importance of learning English.
直到那时我才意识到学习英语的重要性。
Only in this way can you hope to improve the situation there.
只有使用这种方法你才有希望改善这里的情况。
Only after he came back was I able to see him.
他回来后我才能见到他。
283
注意：only 修饰主语，仍用自然语序。例如：
Only socialism can save China.
只有社会主义才能救中国。
Only he can do this work.
只有他能够做这份工作。
（2）以 not, never, seldom, little, nowhere, barely, scarcely, rarely, in vain 等否定副词、含有
no 的短语 at no time, no longer, by no means, in no time 及频度副词 often, many a time, not once,
always 等开头的句子，要进行部分倒装。例如：
Never have I seen such a performance.
我从来没有观看过这么精彩的表演。
Seldom do I go to the cinema.
我很少去看电影。
Never have I seen such a beautiful place.
我从来没有看到过这么美丽的地方。
Not always can people do what they want to.
人们并不总是能够做他们想做的事情。
Little do I dream of seeing such wonderful scenery.
我很少梦想看到这么美丽的景观。
At no time will China be the first to use nuclear weapons.
中国绝不会首先使用核武器。
In vain did we try to persuade him to give up smoking.
我们劝说他戒烟是徒劳的。
Not a single paper did the scholar write the whole term.
这位学者整个学期一篇论文也没有写。
（3）so … that 和 such … that 结构中的“so+ adj./adv.”或“such …”提前到句首时，此
部分用倒装语序。例如：
So unreasonable was his price that everybody startled.
他给的价格非常不合理，每个人都感到吃惊。
Such a good boy is he that we all love him.
他是一个乖孩子，我们都喜欢他。
In such a hurry did he leave that he forgot to lock the door.
他们离开的时候非常匆忙，以至于忘记了锁门。
（4）在以 so, nor, neither 开头的句子里，要进行部分倒装。例如：
A fish can swim and so can I.
鱼会游泳，我也会。
284
We have had breakfast and so have they.
我们已经吃过早餐了，他们也吃了。
I get up at seven and so does my brother.
我每天早上 7 点钟起床，我弟弟也是。
He didn’t smoke, nor did he drink.
他既不抽烟也不喝酒。
注意：
① 如果后一个句子只是单纯地重复前面句子的意思，则不倒装。例如：
— It is hot today.
今天真热。
— So it is.
的确如此。
— He finished it on time.
他按时完成了任务。
— So he did.
确实是这么回事。
② 如按照别人的意思做了什么事，so 也不用倒装。例如：
The teacher asked me to read louder, and I did so.
老师让我提高朗读声音，我照做了。
③ 当前面的句子中主语、谓语或肯、否定形式不同时，则用“so it is with …”句型来表
示。例如：
Tom likes singing, but he doesn’t like dancing. So it is with Mary.
汤姆喜欢唱歌，但是不喜欢跳舞。玛丽也是这样。
Tom is in Class Two, and his classroom is over there. So it is with Mary.
汤姆在 2 班，他的教室在那边。玛丽也是。
Tom is clever and he studies hard. So it is with Mary.
汤姆非常聪明，而且学习努力。玛丽也是这样。
（5）neither ... nor 连接的两个句子都要倒装；not only … but also 连接两个句子时，not
only 后面的句子要倒装。例如：
Neither has he called on her, nor will he do so.
他还没有拜访她，并且也不会这么做。
Not only did I know her, but also I am her close friend.
我不仅认识她，而且还是她的密友。
（6）含有 not until 的强调句，如果 not until 位于句首，句子要求用倒装结构；如果是主
从复合句，倒装结构出现在主句中。例如：
285
Not until the game had begun did he arrive at the sports ground.
比赛开始后，他才到达操场。
（7）adj./adv./n./v. +as 引导的让步状语从句，意为“尽管” ，通常把句中状语、表语部分
或动词提前，若表语是名词，不加冠词。例如：
Pretty as she is, she is not clever.
尽管她很漂亮，但是不聪明。
Much as I wanted to see him, I dared not see him.
尽管我想见他，但是我害怕看到他。
Child as he was, he had to make a living.
尽管他还是个孩子，但是不得不自谋生路。
（8）省略 if 的虚拟条件句要进行部分倒装。例如：
Should he be interested in this subject, he might work hard at it.
如果他对这门课程感兴趣，那么就可能努力学习。
Had I had time, I would have certainly gone to the movies with you that day.
如果我有时间，那天我一定会和你一起去看电影的。
Task 2
1. Only after being asked three times did he come to give a speech.
2. Little does he know about his major.
3. So terrible was the storm that the whole roof was blown off.
4. The boy can’t ski and nor can the girl.
5. Not only shall we learn from books, but also we should learn from practice.
6. Not until then did he come to realize the seriousness of the situation.
7. Child as he is, he knows a lot about the Chinese history.
8. Were I you, I would ask for a sick leave.
286
A: Isn’t it hot today!（此感叹句为倒装句，有点儿像一般疑问句的否定形式，但句尾

用感叹号。）
B: There are two ice-creams in the refrigerator.（there 及介词、形容词和副词之后主语
与动词倒装。）
A: I’ve put on a lot of weight.
B: Haven’t you!
A: I must lose my weight.
B: Many times have I heard this.（频率副词放在句首时，句子倒装，以加强语气。）
A: Only I am as slim as she, can I eat ice-creams.（以 only 开始的副词短语或者副词句子
放在句首加强语气。）
B: Very rarely have I seen a such strikingly beautiful woman.（rarely, very rarely, little,
never 等副词放在句首以加强语气。）
A: Were she my wife, I would not let her wear so little.（此倒装句的结构为假设语气，
省略 if。）
A: Ha! I lost 0.5 kg.
B: But I am 10 kg heavier!
R ole Play
选择题。
1. Now your turn to perform the surgery.
A. came B. has come C. comes D. would come
2. Only under special circumstances to take make-up tests.
287
A. are freshmen permitted C. permitted are freshmen
B. freshmen are permitted D. are permitted freshmen
3. Not until I came to the classroom, I had forgotten to take the textbook.
A. didn’t realize B. did I realize C. I didn’t realize D. I realized
4. — Do you know Tom was arrested by the police yesterday?
— I don’t know, .
A. nor don’t I care B. nor do I care
C. I don’t care neither D. I don’t care also
5. right now, she would get there on Sunday.
A. Would she leave B. If she leaves
C. Were she to leave D. If she had left
6. , I would have acted as an interpreter for you.
A. If you asked me B. You had asked me
C. Should you have asked me D. Had you asked me
7. got aboard the ship, his wife texted him.
A. He hardly; then B. Hardly had he; when
C. He had not; than D. Not had he; when
8. Tom is a student and studies at Haibin College. .
A. It is the same with Mary B. So it is with Mary
C. So is Mary D. So does Mary
9. Little about his own safety, though he was in great danger himself.
A. does he care B. did he care C. he cares D. he cared
10. Not a single word at yesterday’s English class.
A. she said B. said she C. did she say D. she did say
11. Not only polluted but crowded.
A. was the city; were the streets B. the city was; were the streets
C. was the city; the streets were D. the city was; the streets were
12. snacks and drinks, but they also brought cads for entertainment when they had a
picnic in the forest.
A. Not only they brought B. Not only did they bring
C. Not only brought they D. Not only they did bring
13. — I don’t think I can walk any further.
— , let’s stop here for a rest.
A. Neither do I B. Neither can I C. I didn’t think so D. I think so
14. So that no fish can live in it.
288
A. the lake is shallow B. shallow the lake is
C. shallow is the lake D. is the lake shallow
15. Only in this way in English.
A. you can make progress B. can you make progress
C. you will be able to make progress D. will you can make progress
16. , the boy knows a lot about furniture making.
A. Though is he young B. As is he young
C. Young as is he D. Young as he is
17. , his idea was accepted by all the students in class.
A. Strange as might it sound B. As it might sound strange
C. As strange it might sound D. Strange as it might sound
18. Under a big tree , wrapped up in thoughts.
A. did sat an old man B. an old man sat
C. did an old man sat D. sat an old man
19. Was it not you arrived at his house you discovered that he was on holiday?
A. when; that B. until; did C. until; that D. when; did
20. Many a time to see me while in hospital.
A. did he come; was I B. did he come; I was
C. he came; was I D. he was; I was
Fun Time
The following is the poem written by the famous American poet Henry Wadsworth
Longfellow. In this poem, the writer uses inversion in the first stanza（诗节）。
Snowflakes
雪花
Out of the bosom of the air, 从天之穹窿，
Out of the cloud-folds of her garments shaken, 从云之衣裳，
Over the woodlands brown and bare, 飘落于叶黄叶落的山林，
Over the harvest-fields forsaken, 飘落于秋后寂寥的田野，
Silent, and soft, and slow 悄无声息、轻盈曼妙地飘落、飘落……
Descends the snow.
289
Even as our cloudy fancies take 一如我们云般的梦幻，
Suddenly shape in some divine expression, 忽地化成种种极美的倾诉，
Even as the troubled heart doth make 一如我们不安的心境，
In the white countenance confession, 化成洁白如玉的神情，
The troubled sky reveals 是那多愁善感的天空，
The grief it feels. 泄露了她感知的苦难。
This is the poem of the air, 雪如天空之诗魂，

Slowly in silent syllables recorded; 用静美无比的音符缓缓低吟，
This is the secret of despair, 雪如纯真无瑕的精灵，
Long in its cloudy bosom hoarded, 在穹隆云裳间萦绕、萦绕……
Now whispered and revealed 而如今，飘落于山林田野，
To wood and field. 向他们低吟轻唱。
Self-evaluation
290
Unit 强调句
The Emphatic
Sentences
强调是有效地进行思想交流的重要手段之一，是人们为了表达自己的意愿或情感而
使用的一种形式。人们在交际过程中，为了使自己的思想能为听者或读者恰当地理解，
必须突出重要的内容，这就需要运用强调的手段。
英语中的强调句式主要有“It is … that …”句型、“do/does/did+动词原形”和
“Wh- ... is ...”。下面就让我们一起来学习强调句吧！
35.1 “It is … that …”句型
这是一种最常见的强调句型。利用这种句型可以强调除谓语动词外的大多数句子成分，
所强调的可以是单词、短语，也可以是从句，但结构必须完整。被强调的成分可以是主语、
宾语、表语和状语，但不能是定语或谓语。
1. 基本结构
这种强调句型的基本结构为：It is/was + 被强调部分（主语、宾语、宾语补足语或状
语等）+ that/who +句子的其他部分。
一般说来，如果被强调部分是人时，用连词 that 或 who；被强调的部分是宾语，指人时
也可以用 whom；如果被强调部分是物，只能用连词 that。例如：
Tom missed the first lesson yesterday because he was caught in the traffic jam.（原句）
291
It was Tom who missed the first lesson yesterday because he was caught in the traffic jam.
（强调主语）
It was the first lesson that Tom missed yesterday because he was caught in the traffic jam.
（强调宾语）
It was yesterday that Tom missed the first lesson because he was caught in the traffic jam.
（强调时间状语）
It was because Tom was caught in the traffic jam that he missed the first lesson yesterday.
（强调原因状语）
2. 时态
如果原句中谓语动词使用的是现在范畴的时态（一般现在时、现在进行时、现在完成时、
现在完成进行时、一般将来时、将来进行时、将来完成时等），用“It is ... that ...” 。如果原句
中谓语动词为过去范畴的时态（一般过去时、过去进行时、过去完成时、过去将来时等），则
用“It was ... that ...”。例如：
It is the boy who/that speaks English best in the class.（is 与 speaks 时态保持一致）
就是这个小男孩在班里讲英语讲得最好。
It was on Sunday that he gave George this ticket. (was 与 gave 时态保持一致)
他是在星期天把票给了乔治的。
有时，be 前可使用表示推测的情态动词。例如：
It must be Peter who has let this secret out.
一定是彼得将这个秘密泄露出去的。
It might be last night that they did their homework.
他们也许是昨晚做完作业的。
3. 人称和数
被强调的成分为原句的主语时，that 或 who 之后的谓语动词应与被强调的名词或代词在
人称和数方面保持一致，从而选用恰当的动词形式。例如：
It is you who/that are wrong.
是你错了。
It is I who/that am answering the question.
是我回答的问题。
但是如果被强调的部分是人称代词，那么应用人称代词主格形式，但在口语或非正式文
体中也可以用其宾格形式，此时 that 或 who 的谓语动词要用单数第三人称形式 is 或 was。例
如：
It is me who is being asked the favor.
292
是我被请求提供帮助。
另外，在“It is/was ..., not ... that ...”句型中，其谓语动词应与肯定部分的词保持一致关
系。
It is my brother, not I that studies in that school.
是我哥哥而不是我在那所学校上学。
It is you, not your sister that are in charge of the company.
是你而不是你妹妹在掌管这家公司。
4. 疑问句的强调结构
强调一般疑问句中的某一成分时，要在主句中用一般疑问句的顺序。例如：
Was it yesterday that he met my old friend?
是不是在昨天他碰到了我的老朋友？
Was it in the war that he lost his son?
是不是在战争中他丢失了自己的儿子？
强调特殊疑问句中的疑问词，其结构模式是“疑问词+ is/was + it + that ...”
。它同感叹句
的强调模式极其相似，首先将疑问句开头的部分作为强调部分，套入强调结构，然后再将其
变为疑问句。例如：
Who was it that you want to see?
谁想见你？
Where was it that you saw the teacher?
你是在哪儿看到老师的？
Why is it that you want to change your mind?
你为什么想改变主意？
5. 强调含有 not until 的句子

在强调 not until 句型时，not 位于 until 从句前，主句谓语动词作相应变化，即“It is(was) +
not until 从句+ that +其他”
。例如：
It was not until she had arrived home that she remembered her appointment with the doctor.
回家后她才记起同医生的预约。
It was not until 12 o’clock last night that my brother came home.
昨天晚上 12 点我弟弟才回家。
注意：此句型只用 until，不用 till。但如果不是强调句型，till 和 until 可通用；因为句型
中“It is/was not ...”已经是否定句了，that 后面的从句要用肯定句，切勿再用否
定句了。
293
6. 感叹句的强调结构
感叹句的强调结构既要体现强调句型的形式特征，又要体现感叹句的自然语序。例如：
How excited he looks!
→ How excited it is that he looks!
他看上去多么激动啊！
What a bright boy he is!
→ What a bright boy it is that he is!
你弟弟多么聪明啊！
7. 强调句型的鉴别方法及相似句型的辨析
判断“It is/was ...”这样的句型是不是强调句，只需把“It is/was”和“who/that”去掉，
如果意思是完整的，就是强调句；反之，就不是。以下列第二个句子为例，去掉“It is/was”
和“who/that”，意思没有改变，仍然是一个完整的句子，因为引导词“It is/was ...”和“who/that”
不充当句子成分。试比较：
It is strange that he didn’t come yesterday.
很奇怪，他昨天没有来。（非强调句）
It is you and Tom that didn’t come yesterday.
昨天是你和汤姆没来。
（强调句）
显然，第一个句子去掉“It is ... that ...”后，句子结构不完整，是主语从句；第二个句子
去掉“It is ... that ...”后，句子变为“you and Tom didn’t come yesterday”，仍是一个表意完整
的句子，所以这是一个强调句。
Task 1
选择题。
A. when B. before C. since D. that
1. It was 9 years ago I graduated from this world famous university.

2. It will be 9 years they meet in New York.
3. It is 9 years he came to live here.
4. It was 9 years he spent in the primary school.
5. It was not long the Chinese people began to fight against Japanese.
6. It was 9 o’clock in the evening he came to visit me.
294
35.2 “do/does/did+动词原形”句型
“It is/was ... that ...”结构不能强调谓语，如果需要强调谓语时，用助动词 do/does 或 did。

例如：
Do come earlier.
一定要早点来。
We’re pleased that she does intend to come.
她的确打算来，我们很满意。
Do be careful when you cross the street.
过马路时，一定要小心。
注意：此种强调只用 do/does 和 did，没有其他形式；句子为过去时态时用 did，后面的
谓语动词使用原形。
35.3 Wh-句型
（1）除了上述两种强调句型外，比较常见的还有“Wh- ...”结构的句型（简称 Wh-强调

句），它同样具有很浓的强调意味。如果把“Wh- ... be ...”删去，所剩的仍然是一个完整的句
子。例如：
What Oliver wanted is more food. (= Oliver wanted more food.)
奥利弗想要更多的食物。
注意：Wh-和 be 在句子中都可以担任成分。上面的句子可以看成是 What 引导一个主语
从句，be 是系动词，后面是表语。Wh-强调句可用来强调主语、宾语、表语。例
如：
What Charles Dickens wrote novels about was Victorian London.
查尔斯·狄更斯的小说写的是维多利亚时代的伦敦。
What I felt when I saw the woman was beautiful.
看到那位女士时，我的感觉是漂亮。
（2）Wh-强调句还可以通过使用代动词 do 来强调句中的谓语动词或作宾语补足语的非谓
语动词。例如：
What I want to do now is (to) get there as quickly as I can.
我现在想做的是尽可能快地到那儿。
（3）在这一句型中，be 后面作表语的不定式可以省略 to，如果所强调的动词是进行时，
那么 is 之后用-ing 形式和它相配。例如：
What I’m doing now is teaching him a lesson.
295
我现在这样做是为了给他一次教训。
（4）Wh-强调句中的 what 从句，间或也作表语。例如：
This is what he spoke at the meeting.
这就是他在会上讲话的内容。
（5）Wh-强调句的 wh-从句，有时可能是以 who, where 或 when 引起的，它们通常只用作
表语。例如：
This headmaster was who I meant.
我指的就是校长。
Here is where the accident happened last week.
这儿就是上周事故发生的地方。
35.4 用 if 来表示强调
（1）if 从句+I don’t know who/what, etc. does/is/has, etc.。主语部分也可以用 nobody

does/is/has, etc.或 everybody does/is/has, etc. 来代替（这里的 if 从句往往是正话反说或反话正
说）。例如：
If he can’t do it, I don’t know who can.
要是他做不了这件事，我不知道还有谁能做。（强调只有他能做）
If Jim is a coward, everybody is.
要是吉姆是个胆小鬼，那么人人都是胆小鬼。（强调吉姆不是胆小鬼）
（2）if 从句+it be 主句，即把所要强调的内容放在 it be 的后面，把其他内容放在由 if 引
导的从句中。例如：
If anyone knew the truth, it was Tom.
如果说有人了解事实的真相，那便是汤姆。
If there is one thing he loves, it is money.
如果说世界上还有他爱的东西，那便是金钱。
A: The magazine is not in the least interesting.（否定句中的 not 后面可以加 not at all, in
the least, by any means 等短语以加强语气。）What a beautiful girl.（可以用感叹句来
加强语气。）I have never seen such a beautiful girl.（可以用 all, really, so, such 等副词
或短语来加强语气。）
B: Very tired I am.（将宾语或表语放在句首可以加强语气。）Can I sit here?
296
A: Sorry, sir. This seat has been taken by someone else.
C: Anybody here?
A: No. Sit down, please.
B: But you said the seat had been taken just now.
A: It is this girl who has taken this seat.［强调句用来强调句中非动词，即主语、宾语或
修饰语等，其结构为“It is (was) + 被强调部分+that(who, whom)” ］
A: She is my sister. Why are you laughing? Don’t you believe me?
B: I do believe you.（强调句用来强调句中的谓语动词，用 do/does/did + 动词原形构
成。）
B: But I am just her father. When on earth did I have a son?（疑问句中疑问词后面可以
加 in the world 或 on earth 来加强语气。）
R ole Play
选择题。
1. It is the ability to do the job matters not which university you graduated from.
A. one B. that C. what D. it
2. Tom said that it was due to his strong interest in history he chose the course.
A. that B. what C. why D. how
3. It is these chemical products can cause the symptoms of the disease, such as
headache and sore throat.
A. who B. that C. how D. what
4. Why! I have nothing to confess. you want me to say?
A. What is it that B. What it is that C. How is it that D. How it is that
5. It was with great joy he received the news that his lost daughter had been found.
297
A. because B. which C. since D. that
6. A terrible accident , however, happen yesterday.
A. does B. did C. has to D. had to
7. It was not until she got to the language lab Mary realized she had forgotten to take
the earphone.
A. when B. that C. where D. before
8. It was black home after the experiment.
A. not until midnight did he go B. until midnight that he didn’t go
C. not until midnight that he went D. until midnight when he didn’t go
9. — that he was able to get the top secret?
— Oh, a friend of his helped him.
A. Where was it B. What was it C. How was it D. Why was it
10. It was the coaching that he received as a young men made him such a good football
player.
A. that B. has C. what D. later
11. that the trade between the two countries reached its highest point.
A. During the 1960’s B. It was in the 1960’s
C. That it was in the 1960’s D. It was the 1960’s
12. It was the middle-age man had been in in prison saved the drowning boy.
A. who; that B. which; that C. that; which D. where; that
13. Was that skipped the English yesterday?
A. you it B. that you C. it you D. who that
14. It was the heavy snow prevented us from coming to the English class.
A. who B. which C. as D. that
15. It was she was about to go out someone texted（发短信）him.
A. when; that B. so; that C. before; then D. when; before
16. It was he did to his mother took me aback.
A. it; when B. that; what C. that; when D. what; that
17. It was in the small house was built with bricks by his parents he spent
his childhood.
A. which; which B. that, where C. which; that D. that; which
18. It was his hard work Mary got promoted.
A. as; which B. for; which C. for; that D. because; that
19. It was the school gate I saw him quarrel with his girlfriend.
298
20. I don’t know that you stay here.
A. how long it is B. how long is it C. it is how long D. is it how long
Fun Time（此处有视频学习资料）
Watch & Enjoy
In this section, you are going to watch an interesting flash.
Self-evaluation
299
Unit 省略句
The Elliptical
Sentences
在生活中，每个人都有犯懒的时候，甚至有时候连话都懒得说了。有没有什么办法
可以让我们说话时能省点儿力气，还能表达出本意呢？答案是肯定的，那就是省略句！
下面就让我们赶紧来学习一下吧！
36.1 省略句概述
一个句子中有时会有一个或更多的成分被省略掉，这样的句子称为省略句。省略句中被
省略的部分可能是以下几种。
（1）主语。例如：
Excuse me, beg your pardon.
对不起，请再说一遍。
Haven’t seen you for ages!
好久不见了！
(Do you) want some sugar?
（你）要一点儿糖吗？
（2）谓语或谓语的一部分。例如：
(Is) anything the matter?
有什么问题吗？
300
(Does) anybody need help?
有人需要帮忙吗？
(Has) Mary done her homework?
玛丽做好作业了吗？
（3）宾语。例如：
— Which of them is the better choice?
他们谁是更合适的人选？
— Well, it’s hard to tell (it).
嗯，这很难说。
（4）主语和谓语（或谓语的一部分），只剩下表语、宾语、状语或其他成分。例如：
What a pity (it is) you can’t go to the lecture!
真遗憾你不能去听课！
(I am) Afraid I can’t come.
我恐怕不能来了。
（5）不定式。例如：
He didn’t come, though we had invited him to (come).
我们曾邀请他来，但他没来。
（6）冠词。例如：
(A) Friend of mine gave it to me.
我的一个朋友给我的。
(The) Fact is we don’t know it ourselves.
事实是我们自己也不知道。
（7）其他成分。例如：
(Of) Course that’s only a beginning.
当然这还只是一个开头。
— Shall we be late?
我们会不会迟到？
— I hope (we shall) not (be late).
我希望不会。
一个省略句有时本身意思很清楚，例如：
Never heard of such a thing.
从来没听见过这样的事。
Leaving so early?
这么早就动身？
有时要靠上下文或说话的场合来把意思弄清楚，例如：
301
— (Asking a patient) Better today?
（问病人）今天好点了吗？
— Much better.
好多了。
A: (It) Looks like rain.（在不会引起误解的情况下或非正式场合，句子的主语可以省略。

本句省略主语 it。）Hi, (It is) nice to see you again!（省略形式主语和 is。）
B: I am sorry, but ...
A: (Have you) Forgotten my name?（省略主语 you 与助动词 have。）(You can) Just call
me Peter.（省略主语 you 与助动词 can。）I am a doctor, and my wife (is) a teacher.
（and 连接两个并列的从句，若两句中的谓语动词相同，第二句中的谓语动词可以
省略。本句省略了谓语动词 is。）Do you remember me now?
B: No.
A: I am not as strong as I was (strong).（句尾省略了形容词 strong，以避免重复。）(It is)
No wonder you can’t remember me.（省略“It is” 。）By the way, who won the tennis
game last night?
B: Sorry, I don’t know (who won the tennis game last night).（以 know, remember, forget
等动词结尾的简答句后的从句常可省略，以避免重复。本句省略了从句“who won
the tennis game last night” 。）
A: What a beautiful umbrella (it is).（感叹句中通常可以省略主语和谓语动词。本句在
句尾省略了“it is” 。）Here is my home! Thank you very much.
B: My pleasure! Why did I come here. And who on earth is this guy?
C: Who is that good man？
A: I don’t know him.
36.2 简单句中的省略
简单句中常有一些成分被省略掉。这种情况在对话时最为普遍，不管是回答别人的问题
（a）
，或是在接着别人说话时（b），都会发生。
a. — How are you getting along with your work?
你们工作进行得怎样？
302
— Pretty well.
还不错。
— How is the weather?
天气怎么样？
— Going to clear up.
快晴了。
b. — It looks like a shower.
看起来要下一阵雨了。
— Yes, somewhat.
是的，有点儿像。
— He won’t come.
他不肯来。
— Why?
为什么？
这种句子中的省略部分常可从前面的那句话中找到。
另外，在陈述自己的意见（a），提出问题或要求（b），或是在感叹句中（c）都可以做这
种省略。
a. Glad to see you.
很高兴见到你。
Not feeling very well today.
今天觉得有点儿不舒服。
Nice day again.
又是一个好天。
b. Anybody against it?
有人反对吗？
— Right?
对吗？
— Right.
对。
What next？
下一步怎么样？
c. A good idea!
好主意！
Just wonderful!
太妙了！
303
36.3 复合句中的省略
复合句中某些成分被省略的情形也是很多的，在回答问题时我们经常会遇到这种情况。
例如：
— Can you postpone it ?
能延期举行吗？
— I am afraid not.
我想不能。
— Is everything going all right?
一切都进展得顺利吗？
— Well, not so smoothly as we expected, though.
嗯，可没有预料的那样顺利。
（1）表示时间、条件、让步、方式等的状语从句中，如果从句的主语跟主句的主语一致
或从句的主语是 it，而谓语动词是系动词 be 时，就可将从句的主语及系动词 be 省略。例如：
Solid can be turned into liquid and liquid into gas if heated enough. (=Solid can be turned into
liquid and liquid can be turned into gas if it is heated enough.)
如果加到足够的热，固体会变成液体，而液体又会变成气体。
Have a little more if delicious. (=You have a little more if it is delicious.)
如果好吃就多吃一点儿。
Make changes where necessary. (=You make changes where it is necessary.)
在必要的地方做些修改。
I won’t attend his party, though invited a few days ago. (= I won’t attend his party, though I
was invited a few days ago.)
尽管几天前请了我，但我还是不会参加他的聚会。
（2）表示时间、条件、让步、方式等的状语从句中，如果从句的主语跟主句的主语一致，
就可将从句的主语省略，同时将从句中的谓语动词变为分词形式。例如：
He was very excited when told that he had passed the exam. (=He was very excited when he
was told that he had passed the exam.)
当告诉他考试通过了时，他非常兴奋。
If running a little faster, he will take the first place. (=If he runs a little faster, he will take the
first place.)
如果再跑快一点，他就会获得第一名。
They began to talk warmly as if being good friends. (=They began to talk warmly as if they
were good friends.)
304
他们就好像是好朋友一样开始热烈地谈论起来。
（3）条件从句中的主语是第二人称时，可将 if 及从句的主语省略成为祈使句，从而用 and
或 or 等将两句连接起来，成为并列句。例如：
Give me ten more minutes, and I’ll finish it. (= If you give me ten more minutes, I’ll finish it.)
多给我十分钟，我就会把它完成了。
Drive slowly, or you’ll get a fine. (= If you don’t drive slowly, you’ll get a fine.)
开慢一点儿，否则你就会被罚。
有时，这个句型可进一步省略，成为：more + 名词，and + 句子。例如：
A little more effort, and you get it finished. (= If you make a little more effort, you’ll get it
finished.)
再努力一点，你就会把它完成了。
（4）在比较状语从句中，常将从句中与主句中相同的成分省略。例如：
The weather in the south is much better than in the north. (= The weather in the south is much
better than the weather in the north.)
南方的天气比北方的天气好多了。
The Beijing you see today is much more beautiful than it was twenty years ago. (= The Beijing
you see today is much more beautiful than it was beautiful twenty years ago.)
你今天所看到的北京比二十年前的北京漂亮多了。
注意：当比较的主句和从句都为及物动词带宾语时，从句省略后，留下的代词用主格或
宾格时，意思不同。例如：
He likes the dog better than she.
他比她更喜欢那条狗。
He likes the dog better than her.
他喜欢那条狗甚于喜欢她。
因此，从句的主语若为名词，省略谓语部分后须加助动词 do 的适当形式，否则就会产
生歧义。例如：
He likes his dog better than his wife does.
他比他的妻子更喜欢那条狗。
He likes his dog better than his wife.
他喜欢那条狗甚于喜欢他的妻子。
（5）名词性从句中的一部分省略。例如：
He was late this morning, but I don’t know why.
他今天早晨迟到了，但我不知道他迟到的原因。
He got here this morning, but do you know how?
305
他今天早晨就到这儿了，但你知道他是怎么来的吗？
（6）主句中的一部分省略。例如：
Glad to hear that you succeeded in finding the answer.
听说你成功地找到了答案，我很高兴。
What if he did not come today?
要是他今天不来，那怎么办呢？
36.4 并列句中的省略
（1）当并列的主语相同时，后面的主语被省略。例如：
The car was quite old but (it) was in excellent condition.
这部车相当旧了，但机器性能还非常好。
They shook hands and (they) began to talk at once.
他们握了手后立刻开始谈话。
（2）当并列的谓语动词相同时，动词（包括助动词、不定式等）可省略。例如：
Reading makes a full man; conference (makes) a ready man; writing an exact man.
读书使人充实；讨论使人机智；写作使人准确。
Some of us study French, others (study) German.
我们中有的学法语，有的学德语。
（3）省略动词宾语和介词宾语。例如：
Let’s do the dishes. I’ll wash (the dishes) and you dry (the dishes).
我们洗碗吧，我来洗碗，你来把碗弄干。
（4）省略定语。例如：
A group of young boys and (young) girls are dancing on the meadow below the hill.
一群少男少女在山下的草地上跳舞。
（5）省略状语。例如：
He was not hurt. (How) Strange!
他没有受伤。真奇怪！
（6）省略多种句子成分。例如：
We tried to help her but (we tried) in vain.
我们想法子帮他，但没用。
Kate is easy in conversation and (she is) graceful in manner.
凯特谈吐从容，举止优雅。
306
选择题。
1. When different cultures, we often pay attention only to the differences without
noticing the many similarities.
A. compared B. being compared C. comparing D. having compared
2. When first to the market, these products enjoyed great success.
A. introducing B. introduced C. introduce D. being introduced
3. It shames me to say it, but I told a lie when at the meeting by my boss.
A. questioning B. having questioned C. questioned D. to be questioned
4. The man we followed suddenly stopped and looked as if whether he was going in
the right direction.
A. seeing B. having seen C. to have seen D. to see
5. Generally speaking, according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.
A. when taking B. when taken C. when to take D. when to be taken
6. When , the museum will be open to the public next year.
A. completed B. completing C. being completed D. to be completed
7. Though money, his parents managed to send him to university.
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
8. The research is so designed that once nothing can be done to change it.
A. begins B. having begun C. beginning D. begun
9. When help, one often says “Thank you.” or “It’s kind of you.”
A. offering B. to offer C. to be offered D. offered
10. — You are always working. Come on, let’s go shopping.
— you ever want to do is going shopping.
A. Anything B. Something C. All D. That
11. Is this the reason at the meeting for his carelessness in his work?
A. he explained B. what he explained
C. how he explained D. why he explained
12. What surprised me was not what he said but he said it.
A. the way B. in the way that C. in the way D. the way which
13. It is easy to do the repair. you need is a hammer and some nails.
A. Something B. All C. Both D. Everything
14. That’s an unpleasant thing to say about your father after has done for you.
307
A. something B. anything C. all D. that
15. — Does your brother intend to study German?
— Yes, he intends .
A. / B. to C. so D. that
16. — Would you like to go to the Grand Theatre with me tonight?
— .
A. Yes, I’d like to go to the Grand Theatre
B. I’d like to, but I have an exam tomorrow
C. No, I won’t
D. That’s right
17. — You should have thanked her before you left.
— I meant , but when I was leaving, I couldn’t find her anywhere.
A. to do B. to C. doing D. doing to
18. Much of the power of the trade unions has been lost. , their political influence should
be very great.
A. As a result B. As usual C. Even so D. So far
19. — You haven’t lost the ticket, have you?
— . I know it’s not easy to get another one at the moment.
A. I hope not B. Yes, I have C. I hope so D. Yes, I’m afraid so
20. — The boys are not doing a good job at all, are they?
— .
A. I guess not so B. I don’t guess C. I don’t guess so D. I guess not
Fun Time
此 fish 非彼 fish
提起 fish，它给人们的第一印象便是指“鱼”，实际上它的用法并非如此简单。fish
用作可数名词指“鱼的条数”时单数和复数形式相同（two fish 两条鱼），指“鱼的种类”
时复数形式才为 fishes（two fishes 两种鱼）。fish 用作不可数名词时无复数形式，应作“鱼
肉”解（Help yourself to some fish. 随便吃些鱼。）。fish 用作动词时，它的含义又与“钓
（捕）鱼”有关（go fishing 去钓鱼）。
在英语口语里，fish 还常常被用来指“人” ，类似于汉语里的“家伙” 、“东西”等，如 a
poor fish（可怜虫），a big fish（大亨），a cool fish（无耻之徒），a strange fish（奇人、怪人）
，
308
a loose fish（放荡鬼）等。但必须注意的是，fish 用来指人时形象虽然鲜明，但往往含有贬义。
由 fish 构成的习语也非常生动有趣，如 fish in the air 本意为“空中钓鱼”，喻指“方
法（向）不对而达不到目的”，相当于汉语中的成语“缘木求鱼” 。又如：like a fish out of
water 喻指“如鱼离水” 、“感到生疏” ，feel the fishes 喻指“葬身鱼腹” 、“晕船” 。
含 fish 的一些谚语更加富有哲理性。例如：
（1）Never offer to teach fish to swim.
不要班门弄斧。（原意为：决不要教鱼游泳。）
（2）The best fish smell bad when they are three days old.
久居别家招人嫌。（原意为：鱼过三天就要臭。）
（3）He who would catch fish must not mind getting wet.
不入虎穴，焉得虎子。（原意为：捉鱼不要怕鞋湿。）
（4）There’s as good fish in the sea as ever came out of it.
纵然失去一个机会，不愁没有其他机会。（原意为：海里的好鱼是取之不尽的。）
Self-evaluation
309
Unit 虚拟语气
The Subjunctive
Mood
有人说，理想很丰满，现实很骨感。在现实世界中，有时候觉得理想就是拉磨驴子
前挂着的胡萝卜，可望而又不可及。在这一单元，我们要学习的是一种可以表达出我们
美好愿望和假想虚拟情况的一种语气，这就是貌似难学的虚拟语气！
那就让我们赶紧来一探究竟吧！
37.1 虚拟语气概述
在英语中，随着说话人意图的不同，动词需要用不同的形式，称为语气。英语中共有三
种语气：陈述语气（the Indicative Mood）、祈使语气（the Imperative Mood）、虚拟语气（the
Subjunctive Mood）。
虚拟语气主要表示主观愿望和假想虚拟的情况，而不表示客观存在的事实，所说的是一
个条件，不一定是事实，或与事实相反。虚拟语气通过谓语动词的特殊形式来表示。例如：
I wish you were more considerate.
但愿你更体贴些。
虚拟语气大体上有以下两类形式。
（1）should, would, may, might 等加动词原形构成。例如：
Would you mind shutting the door?
劳驾关门。
310
（2）和某些时态的形式相同，但表示的时间不同。例如：
If I had the money, I would buy it.
我要是有钱就要买它了。（表示现在的情况，却用相当于过去时的形式）
37.2 虚拟语气在条件句中的应用
包含条件从句的句子称为条件句。条件句有两类：一类是真实条件句（Sentences of Real
Condition），一类是虚拟条件句（Sentences of Unreal Condition）。
如果假设的情况是有可能发生的，就是真实条件句。例如：
If she has time, she will finish it.
如果有时间，她会做完的。
If you haven’t finished your composition, you can give it to me tomorrow.
如果你还没写完作文，可以明天再给我。
如果是纯然假设的情况或是发生的可能性不大的情况，则是虚拟条件句。例如：
If I were you, I would reconsider their proposal.
如果我是你，我会重新考虑他们的建议的。
If we hadn’t built the reservoir, there would have been a terrible flood.
假如我们没修这座水库，就会发生可怕的水灾。
虚拟条件句主要有以下两类。
（1）表示现在及将来情况的虚拟条件句（表示纯然假设或实现的可能性不大的情况）。其
谓语的主要形式如表 37-1 所示。
表 37-1 表示现在及将来情况的虚拟条件句的谓语形式
从句主句
过去式 would + 动词原形
例如：
If you hurried, you would catch the train.
你要是赶快的话还能赶上火车。（但你是这么慢吞吞的）
If I knew French, I would read the book in the original.
如果我懂法语，我就要看这本书的原文了。（其实不懂）
注意：在从句中动词 be 多用 were 这一形式，不管是什么人称。例如：
If she were here, everything would be all right.
要是她在这儿，一切都没问题了。
If I were you, I wouldn’t lose heart.
311
我要是你，就不会灰心。
If it weren’t raining, we wouldn’t stay indoors.
要是现在不下雨，我们就不会待在屋里了。
但在非正式场合，特别是在口语中，第一人称和第三人称单数现在用 was 的时候也不少。
例如：
If she was there, we could ask her.
如果她在那儿，我们可以问她。
If I was in her place, I would think in another way.
我要是处于她的位置，我会换一种方式考虑问题的。
但总是说“If I were you …”，而不是“If I was you ...” 。
（2）表示过去情况的虚拟条件句。其谓语的主要形式如表 37-2 所示。
表 37-2 表示过去情况的虚拟条件句的谓语形式
从句主句
had + 过去分词 would have + 过去分词
例如：
He would have come if we had invited him.
要是我们邀请了她，她是会来的。（可是我们没邀请）
He would have come if he hadn’t been so busy.
要不是忙，他就来了。
在这类虚拟条件句中，主句的谓语除了用 would 构成外，有时还可能用 might 或 could。
例如：
If she were here, she might be able to help.
要是她在这里，可能会帮上忙。
If we had the manpower, we could open up even more land.
如果有人力，我们还能开更多的荒地。
在第一人称后有时也可以用 should（但美国人多用 would）。例如：
If she were here with us, we should (would) feel much better.
如果她和我们在一起，我们会感觉好得多。
I shouldn’t (wouldn’t) have done it if it hadn’t been necessary.
如果不必要，我是不会这样做的。
在表示将来情况的条件从句中，有时可用“were to (should) + 动词原形”来构成谓语。
例如：
If I were to (should) do it, I would do it in a different way.
312
要是我来做这件事，我会用另外一种做法。
We wouldn’t lose courage even if we should ( were to ) fail again.
即使再次失败我们也不会泄气。
（3）混合时间条件句（Conditional Sentences of Mixed Time）。有时候，条件从句表示的
动作和主句表示的动作发生的时间不一致（如一个是过去发生的，一个是现在发生的）。这时，
动词的形式要根据表示的时间来调整。例如：
If the weather had been more favourable, the flowers would be growing still better.
如果过去天气好一些，花还会长得更好。
If he had received six more votes, he would be our president now.
如果他再多得六票，他现在就是我们的主席了。
W: It is Saturday tomorrow. What’s your plan?

M: If it rains tomorrow, we will stay home.（虚拟语气表示现在或未来可能发生的事情。
本句虽然指的是未来，但 if 从句中不可用将来时，必须用现在时表示将来。）
W: If it stops raining tomorrow, we will go out.
M: Where shall we go?
W: How about climbing the mountain?
M: If you will climb, I will climb, too.（本句中 if 从句里的 you will 不是表示未来，而
是表示愿意，相当于 are willing 或者 disposed to。）
W: We should get up very early tomorrow morning. Then, we set off without having
breakfast.
M: What? If I don’t eat breakfast tomorrow, I will have no energy to climb.
W: We will have breakfast in X hotel if we get there early enough.
M: OK. I want have some coffee now. Darling, would you like to boil one cup for me?
W: OK.
37.3 虚拟语气在某些从句中的应用
虚拟语气还可用来表示愿望、建议、命令等。在下面几类从句中，谓语动词都需要用虚
拟语气。
（1）wish 后的宾语从句。例如：
313
I wish I were as strong as you.
我希望像你一样强壮。
How I wish it wasn’t raining!
现在要是不下雨多好啊！
（2）suggest, order, demand, propose, command, request, desire, insist 等动词后的宾语从句。
例如：
They demanded that the aggressor troops (should) be withdrawn immediately.
他们要求立即撤出侵略军。
The commander ordered that all civilians (should) be evacuated.
指挥官命令撤退所有平民。
I propose that we (should) set a deadline for handing in the plans.
我建议定出一个交计划的最后期限。
They requested that we (should) send a delegation to their country.
他们请求我们派一个代表团到他们国家去。
He insisted that we (should) take up the matter at the meeting.
他坚持要我们在会上谈这个问题。
I suggest we set off immediately.
我建议马上动身。
He asked that he be given an opportunity to try.
他要求给他一个试试的机会。
She urged that he write and accept the post.
她敦促他写信接受这个职位。
（3）it is desired, it is suggested, it is requested, it was ordered, it was proposed, it is necessary,
it is important, it has been decided 等结构后的主语从句。例如：
It is requested that Miss Wu (should) give a performance at the party.
有人请求吴小姐在会上表演一个节目。
It is desired that we (should) get everything ready by tonight.
希望一切在今晚准备好。
It is necessary that he (should) be sent there at once.
有必要马上派他到那里去。
It has been decided that the meeting (should) be postponed till next Saturday.
已决定会议延期到下星期六开。
（4）suggestion, motion, proposal, order, recommendation, plan, idea 等后面的表语从句和同
位语从句。例如：
My suggestion is that we (should) send a few people to help the other groups.
314
我的建议是我们派几个人去帮助别的小组。
My idea is that we (should) challenge the other groups to a friendly competition.
我的意见是向别组挑战，来一个友谊竞赛。
The orders were that we stay where we were.
命令是我们仍留在原处。
W: It is your turn to wash these.

M: Why?
W: Because I will practice singing.
M: When did you start to have such a hobby?
W: Just today. Tom said I am a gift for singing. He suggested that I practice more.［一些含
有假设、猜想、建议等意思的动词（如 advice, order, request, suggest）后面的宾语
从句要用“should + 动词原形”结构，should 往往省略。］
M: (Laughing ...)
W: Why are you laughing?
M: To think of his singing, I could hardly help laughing.（表示虚拟语气的状语从句可以
由不定式短语或分词短语等代替。 “To think of his singing”相当于“If I think of his
singing” 。）
W: Why?
M: Even he himself is poor singer.
W: Even if you laughed at me, I wouldn’t give up.（在 as if, as though, in case, even if 等
引导的状语从句中，表示与事实相反时，要用虚拟语气。）
M: Where are you going?
W: I am going to Tom’s home and ask him to teach me. With his help, I will make more
progress.（表示虚拟语气的状语从句可以由 with, without, but for 等介词短语代替。
“With his help”相当于“If I had his help” 。）
M: Darling, if you don’t go, I will satisfy any of your wishes.
W: Really? Then, I wish you were my first listener.（wish 后的从句用过去时表示与现在
事实相反的假设。）
M: I really wish I had not spoken like that.（wish 后的从句用过去完成时表示与过去事
实相反的假设。）
W: Now, listen to me.
315
37.4 虚拟语气在其他情况下的应用
（1）虚拟语气还可用在口语中，使语气显得比较客气委婉。这时谓语多用 should, would,

could, might 加动词原形构成。例如：
It would be a shame to stop the work half way.
半途而废就太遗憾了。
This is something I should advise you not to do.
我看你还是不这样的好。
（2）提出请求或邀请。例如：
Would you mind turning the light on?
劳驾把灯打开。
Could you come a little earlier next time?
下次早点来好吗？
（3）提出建议或劝告。例如：
You had better leave the matter to me.
你最好把这件事交给我。
Perhaps you could get better results this way.
你这样做效果或许会好一点儿。
（4）提出问题。例如：
What would you advise me to do?
你看我怎么办好呢？
Could you leave your telephone number with us?
你能把电话号码留下吗？
（5）此外，某些表示祝愿等的句子中也需要用虚拟语气。例如：
Long live world peace!
世界和平万岁！
“God bless you.” said the priest.
教士说： “愿上帝保佑你。”
May you be happy all your life.
祝你一生幸福。
If only I had listened to your advice!
我要是听了你的劝告就好了！
（6）虚拟条件句的从句部分如果含有 were, should 或 had，可将 if 省略，再把 were, should
或 had 移到从句句首，实行倒装。例如：
316
Were they here now, they could help us.
如果他们在这儿的话，肯定会帮助我们的。
Had you come earlier, you would have met him.
如果你能早点儿来，肯定能见到他。
Should it rain, the crops would be saved.
如果能下雨的话，庄稼就有救了。
M1: It is high time that I left.［It is (high) time 后接一般过去时，表示早该是……的时

候了。］
M2: Don’t go, my dear brother. Along by myself, I wouldn’t have been delighted.（“Alone
by myself”相当于“If I had been alone by myself” 。）
M1: You look very upset today. What’s wrong?
M2: Jane refused my 100th proposal.
M1: Poor young man. Were I Jane, I would be very pleased to marry you.（虚拟语气中
的状语从句可以省略连接词 if，句中的助动词 had, were, should 等要移到主语
之前。）
M2: Would that Jane accepted my proposal.（would 表示“但愿” 、“希望”等意思时，
其后由 that 引导的从句可以表示与事实相反的虚拟语气，would 之前的主语常被
省略，在这里 would 就相当于 how I wish。）
M1: Cheer up, Peter. Even if you failed, you shouldn’t give up.（even if 表示“即使……
也……” 。）
M2: Right! 101st proposal.
M1: May you succeed!（ “may + 动词原形”是虚拟语气的一种形式，表示祝愿。）
M2: Hi, Peter! What happened?
M1: Jane sent me a bundle of flowers, but she forgot to pull the flowers out from the
flowerpot.
R ole Play
then, make up more sentences that used under different situations.
317
I. 选择题。
1. If only he quietly as the doctor instructed, he would not suffer so much now.
A. lies B. lay C. had lain D. should lie
2. How I wish every family a large house with a beautiful garden.
A. has B. had C. will have D. had had
3. You did not let me drive. If we in turn, you so tired.
A. drove; didn’t get B. drove; wouldn’t get
C. were driving; wouldn’t get D. had driven ; wouldn’t have got
4. it rain tomorrow, we would have to put off the visit to the Yangpu Bridge.
A. Were B. Should C. Would D. Will
5. I suggested the person to be put into prison.
A. refers B. referring C. referred D. refer
6. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it .
A. breaks B. has broken C. were broken D. had been broken
7. I insisted to see a doctor, but he insisted nothing wrong with him.
A. on him to go; should be B. he went; be
C. he go; was D. he should to; is
8. — Your aunt invites you to the movies today.
— I had rather she me tomorrow than today.
A. tells B. told C. would tell D. had told
9. — Would you have called her up had it been possible?
— Yes, but I busy doing my homework.
A. was B. were C. had been D. would be
10. I was ill that day, otherwise I the sports meet.
A. would have taken part in B. took part in
C. had taken part in D. would take part in
11. the clouds, you would find the airplane in the sky easily.
A. Had it not been for B. If it were not
C. If it had not been for D. Were it not for
12. If my lawyer here last Sunday, he me from going.
318
A. had been; would have prevented B. had been; would prevent
C. were; prevent D. were; would have prevented
13. hard, he would have passed the exam.
A. If he were to work B. Had he worked
C. Should he work D. Were he to work
14. today, he would get there by Friday.
A. Were he to leave B. If he had left
C. Did he to leave D. Had he left
15. Had you listened to the doctor, you all right now.
A. are B. were C. would be D. would have been
16. I did not see your sister at the meeting. If she , she would have met my brother.
A. has come B. did come C. come D. had come
17. He busy yesterday, or he you with your experiment.
A. was; had helped B. was; would have helped
C. had been; would have helped D. were; would have helped
18. If it for the snow, we the mountain yesterday.
A. were not; could have climb B. were not; could climb
C. had not been; could have climbed D. hadn’t been; could climb
1. 我不知道他的电话号码，否则我就打电话给他了。
2. 他本可以给你更多的帮助，即使他很忙。
3. ——如果可能的话，你会不会打电话给他？
——会的，不过我当时在忙着做家庭作业呢。
4. 如果你昨晚没有看电影到那么晚的话，你现在就不会这么困了。
5. 没有电，今天人类的生活就完全不同了。
319
Fun Time
左右为难的事情（sticky business）
生活中总是有很多让人“左右为难”的事情，比如说今天又有哥们向我来借钱！这
个哥们声称他有一笔赚大钱的买卖，但苦于资金有限，所以想先在我这里支点银子，等
赚了钱之后，不但立刻归还，还会另有酬劳。说实话，我一点儿也不看好他的买卖。但
是，不借吧，伤了哥们的和气；借吧，又恐这钱是有去无回。于是，我就向外教 Michael
咨询了一下该如何处理。
Michael 说这真是一件 sticky business，因为在美国大笔借款一般是到银行去贷款，所
以他劝我应该直截了当地回绝那个哥们。接着他说自己现在也遇到了 a sticky business，他
的父母希望他能尽快回国，而他却想留在中国，正在左右为难。我感叹了一句： “You’re in
a situation that is difficult to deal with.”。他说这就是 sticky business 的意思。我想了一下：
stick 是“粘”的意思，sticky 当然也就有“粘性的”的意思，粘的（sticky）东西粘到了
手上可真是不好办，所以 sticky business 表示“让人左右为难的事情”也还是可以推理出
来的，只是我以前总是用“difficult”、 “hard”这些词，看来还不如 sticky business 形容起
来更加形象。不过 Michael 告诉我，sticky business 在口语中用的比较多，正式场合或者
是书面语中，还是 difficult 等词出现得更为频繁。
Self-evaluation
320

英語情境應用文法教程

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

英語情境應用文法教程

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

英语情景应用语法教程

Ⅰ①英… Ⅱ①马… Ⅲ．①英语 －语法 －高等学校 －教材 Ⅳ．①Ｈ３１４

Unit 2 一般过去时 The Simple Past Tense ················································································· 12

Unit 3 现在进行时 The Present Continuous Tense···································································· 20

Unit 4 过去进行时 The Past Continuous Tense ········································································· 27

Unit 5 一般将来时 The Simple Future Tense············································································· 35

Unit 6 过去将来时 The Past Future Tense ················································································· 41

Unit 7 现在完成时 The Present Perfect Tense ··········································································· 46

Unit 8 过去完成时 The Past Perfect Tense················································································· 62

Unit 9 现在完成进行时 The Present Perfect Progressive Tense··············································· 72

Unit 10 过去完成进行时 The Past Perfect Progressive Tense ·················································· 77

Unit 11 将来进行时 The Future Continuous Tense ··································································· 83

Unit 12 将来完成时 The Future Perfect Tense ·········································································· 87

Unit 13 被动语态 The Passive Voice ··························································································· 92

Unit 15 宾语从句 The Object Clause························································································ 115

Unit 16 时间状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Time ···························································· 122

Unit 17 地点状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Place ···························································· 132

Unit 18 条件状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Condition ···················································· 139

Unit 19 目的状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Purpose ······················································· 149

Unit 20 结果状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Result ·························································· 157

Unit 22 让步状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Concession·················································· 174

Unit 23 方式状语从句 The Adverbial Clause of Manner ······················································· 184

Unit 24 主谓一致 Subject-Verb Agreement ············································································· 187

Unit 25 主语从句 The Subject Clause ······················································································ 198

Unit 26 表语从句 The Predicative Clause················································································ 204

Unit 27 同位语从句 The Appositive Clause ············································································· 211

Unit 28 定语从句 The Attributive Clause ················································································ 215

Unit 29 it 的用法 The Usage of It······························································································ 231

Unit 30 动词不定式 The Infinitive···························································································· 238

Unit 31 动名词 The Gerund ······································································································ 252

Unit 32 分词 The Participle······································································································· 262

Unit 33 独立主格结构 The Absolute Structure········································································ 271

Unit 34 倒装句 The Inversion ··································································································· 280

Unit 35 强调句 The Emphatic Sentences ················································································· 291

Unit 36 省略句 The Elliptical Sentences ·················································································· 300

Unit 37 虚拟语气 The Subjunctive Mood ················································································ 310

不规则变化：have 变 have 为 has have→has

I am a student. I am not a student.

一般疑问句 肯定回答 否定回答

Are you a student? Yes, I am. No, I am not.

Dialogue & Analysis（此处有视频学习资料）

一般现在时对大多数的动词来说表示图 1-1 中圆圈的范围，就是说一般现在时表示包括

3. Li Ming’s brother likes playing basketball.（改为否定句）

4. She lives in a small town near New York.（改为一般疑问句）

5. I read books every day.（改为一般疑问句）

6. We have three chairs.（改为否定句）

7. Tina doesn’t run fast.（改为肯定句）

New language points The mistakes I have made Solutions

一般过去时（The Simple Past Tense）：表示过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态；过去习

I/He/She/It was ... I/He/She/It was not ...

I/He/She/It/We/You/They had not ...

行为动词 I/He/She/It/We/You/They studied … I/He/She/It/We/You/They did not study …

Was he/she/it ...? Yes, he was. (No, he wasn’t.)

Had I/he/she/it/you/we/they ...? Yes, you had. (No, you hadn’t.)

A: Did you have breakfast this morning?

（1）表示过去的动作或状态，常和明确的过去时间状语连用，如 yesterday，last week，

（2）表示过去某一段时间内经常或反复出现的动作，句子中常带有 every day, often,

2. He found some meat in the fridge.（改为一般疑问句）

3. She stayed there for a week.（对画线部分提问）

4. There was some orange juice in the cup.（改为一般疑问句）

5. The girls didn’t go shopping after class yesterday.（改为肯定句）

New language points The mistakes I have made Solutions

现在进行时（The Present Continuous Tense）

I am doing my homework. I am not doing my homework.

Ⅰ①英… Ⅱ①马… Ⅲ．①英语－语法－高等学校－教材 Ⅳ．①Ｈ３１４

一般疑问句肯定回答否定回答

一般疑问句肯定回答否定回答

一般疑问句肯定回答否定回答

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义

动词原形过去式过去分词中文释义